Download - 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Transcript
Page 1: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Foreword

Your INFINITI represents a new way ofthinking about vehicle design. It inte-grates advanced engineering and superiorcraftsmanship with a simple, refined aes-thetic sensitivity associated with tradi-tional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxuryand beauty. The car itself is important, butso is the sense of harmony that the vehicleevokes in its driver, and the sense of satis-faction you feel with the INFINITI — fromthe way it looks and drives to the high levelof dealer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI tothe fullest, we encourage you to read thisOwner’s Manual immediately. It explainsall of the features, controls and perfor-mance characteristics of your INFINITI; italso provides important instructions andsafety information.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet is in-cluded in your Owner’s literature portfolio. TheINFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide ex-plains details about maintaining and servicingyour vehicle. Always carry it with you when youtake your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer. TheWarranty Information Booklet contents pro-vide complete information about all warrantiescovering this vehicle, the requirements to keepthe warranties in effect as well as the INFINITIRoadside Assistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Careand Lemon Law Information Booklet willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’slemon law.

INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satis-fying ownership experience for as long asyou own your car. Should you have anyquestions regarding your INFINITI or yourINFINITI dealer, please contact our Con-sumer Affairs department at:In U.S. 1-800-662-6200.In Canada 1-800-361-4792.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELYBefore driving your vehicle, read yourOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensurefamiliarity with controls and maintenancerequirements, assisting you in the safe op-eration of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATIONREMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to helpensure a safe and comfortable trip for you andyour passengers!

O NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

O ALWAYS observe posted speed limits andnever drive too fast for conditions.

O ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Pre-teenchildren should be seated in the rearseat.

O ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features to alloccupants of the vehicle.

O ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual forimportant safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modi-fication could affect its performance,safety or durability, and may even violategovernmental regulations. In addition,damage or performance problems re-sulting from modification will not be cov-ered under the INFINITI warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUALThis manual includes information for alloptions available on this model. There-fore, you may find some information thatdoes not apply to your vehicle.

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 2: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

All information, specifications and illustra-tions in this manual are those in effect atthe time of printing. INFINITI reserves theright to change specifications or design atany time without notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in thismanual. They are used in the followingways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or serious per-sonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, theprocedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moderatepersonal injury or damage to your vehicle. Toavoid or reduce the risk, the procedures mustbe followed carefully.

If you see the symbol above, it means “Donot do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those abovein an illustration, it means the arrow pointsto the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothose above indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothose above call attention to an item in theillustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components contain oremit chemicals known to the State of Califor-nia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. In addition, certain fluidscontained in vehicles and certain products ofcomponent wear contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to cause can-cer and birth defects or other reproductiveharm.

BLUETOOTH is a trademarkowned by Bluetooth SIG,Inc., U.S.A. and licenced toXanavi Informatics Corpora-tion.

© 2005 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manualmay be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system,or transmitted in any form, or by any means, elec-tronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording orotherwise, without the prior written permission ofNissan Motor Co., Ltd.

SIC0697

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 3: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents 0

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

Index 10

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 4: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 5: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

0 Illustrated table of contents

Exterior front .................................................... 0-2Exterior rear ..................................................... 0-3Passenger compartment ................................... 0-4Cockpit............................................................. 0-6Instrument panel ............................................. 0-7

Meters and gauges........................................... 0-8Engine compartment......................................... 0-9

VK45DE engine ........................................... 0-9VQ35DE engine ......................................... 0-10

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 6: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Hood (Page 3-18)

2. Headlight and turn signal switch— Operation (P.2-26)— Bulb replacement (P.8-31)— Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)

(if so equipped) (P.2-29)

3. Windshield wiper and washer switch— Operation (P.2-25)— Blade replacement (P.8-23)

4. Sunroof (P.2-46)

5. Power windows (P.2-44)

6. Recovery hook (P.6-16)

7. Fog lights (P.2-31)

8. Tires— Wheel and tires (P.8-35, P.9-9)— Flat tire (P.6-2)

9. Outside mirrors (P.3-25)

10. Doors— Keys (P.3-2)— Door locks (P.3-5)— Intelligent Key (P.3-8)

SSI0088

EXTERIOR FRONT

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 7: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. High-mounted stop light (Bulb replace-ment) (P.8-31)

2. Rear window defroster switch (P.2-26)

3. Rear combination light (Bulb replace-ment) (P.8-31)

4. Fuel-filler door— Operation (P.3-21)— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)

5. Trunk lid (P.3-18)

6. Child safety locks (P.3-7)

SSI0089

EXTERIOR REAR

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 8: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Rear sunshade (if so equipped)(P.2-48)

2. Top tether strap anchors (P.1-26)

3. Interior lights (P.2-49)

4. Flip-down screen (if so equipped)(P.4-47)

5. Seat belts (P.1-8)

6. Supplemental curtain side-impact airbags (P.1-36)

7. Seats (P.1-2)

8. Power windows (P.2-44)

9. Sun visors (P.3-23)

10. Sunroof (P.2-46)

11. Sunglasses holder (P.2-41)

12. Front passenger air bag and statuslight (P.1-44)

13. Automatic anti-glare mirror,HomeLink (if so equipped) (P.3-24,P.2-51)

14. Trunk pass-through (P.1-7)/Rear arm-rest (P.1-7)

15. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system (P.1-24)

16. Rear seat controls (if so equipped)— Rear power seat adjust switch

(P.1-4)— Heated seat ON/OFF switch

(P.2-33)— Automatic return ON/CANCEL

switch (P.1-5)— Rear sunshade control switch

(P.2-48)

17. Rear passenger control switches (if soequipped)— For temperature (P.4-29)

SSI0099

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 9: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

— For audio (P.4-44)

18. Rear cup holders (P.2-39)

19. Supplemental side air bags (P.1-36)

20. Front console (P.2-42)/Front armrest(P.1-7)

21. Front cup holders (P.2-40)

22. Front seat controls (if so equipped)— Climate controlled seat adjusting

knob (P.2-34)— Rear sunshade control switch

(P.2-48)— Rear passenger controls

ON/CANCEL switch (P.2-48)— SNOW MODE ON/OFF switch

(P.2-36)

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 10: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Instrument brightness control switch(P.2-30)

2. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-25)

3. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)switch (if so equipped) (P.2-29)

4. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P.2-36)

5. Headlight, fog light and turn signalswitch (P.2-26)

6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (Left

side)— ENTER switch (P.4-6, P.4-42)— BACK switch (P.4-43)— TALK switch (P.4-66)/Phone switch

(P.4-58)— Volume control switches (P.4-43)— Source select switch (P.4-43)

7. Windshield wiper and washer switch(P.2-25)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls(Right side)— Cruise control switches (P.5-18)— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P.5-20)

9. Hood release handle (P.3-18)

10. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-19)

11. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch(if so equipped) (P.2-35)

12. Intelligent Key port (P.5-8)

13. Tilting/telescopic steering wheelswitch (P.3-22)

14. Steering wheel— Horn (P.2-32)— Driver supplemental air bag

(P.1-36)

SSI0090

COCKPIT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 11: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Side ventilator (P.4-23)

2. Meters and gauges (P.2-4)

3. Center ventilator (P.4-23)

4. Security indicator light (P.2-24)

5. Hazard warning flasher switch(P.2-32)

6. Automatic climate control system(P.4-25)

7. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system (if so equipped)— Vehicle information and setting but-

tons (P.4-7)— Phone system (P.4-59)— Audio system (P.4-30)

8. Front passenger supplemental air bag(P.1-36)

9. Fuse box cover (P.8-28)

10. Parking brake pedal— Parking (P.5-44)— Maintenance (P.8-25)

11. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-6)

12. Clock (P.2-37)

13. Cigarette lighter and ashtrays(P.2-38)

14. Audio system (P.4-30)

15. Glove box lid release button (P.2-41)

16. Bluetooth in-vehicle phonemodule (P.4-59)/DVD drive for naviga-tion system (if so equipped) (P.4-46)

17. Trunk release power cancel switch(P.3-19)

SSI0091

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 12: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge(P.2-6)

2. Tachometer (P.2-5)

3. Warning/indicator lights (P.2-11)

4. Speedometer (P.2-5)

5. Fuel gauge (P.2-6)

6. Meter illumination control knob (P.2-7)

7. Dot matrix liquid crystal display(P.2-20)

8. Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-5)

9. TRIP/RESET knob for twin tripodometer (P.2-5)

SSI0092

METERS AND GAUGES

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 13: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

VK45DE ENGINE*

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-26)

2. Battery (P.8-18)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-14)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-17)

5. Window washer fluid reservoir(P.8-18)

6. Coolant reservoir (P.8-11)

7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-17)

8. Radiator filler cap (P.8-10)

9. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-13)

10. Air cleaner (P.8-22)

* Shown with the engine compartment ac-cess panels removed. For removal andreplacement instructions, see “Enginecompartment check locations” in the “8.Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion.

SSI0097

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 14: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

VQ35DE ENGINE*

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-26)

2. Battery (P.8-18)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-14)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-17)

5. Window washer fluid reservoir(P.8-18)

6. Coolant reservoir (P.8-11)

7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-17)

8. Radiator filler cap (P.8-10)

9. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-13)

10. Air cleaner (P.8-22)

* Shown with the engine compartment ac-cess panels removed. For removal andreplacement instructions, see “Enginecompartment check locations” in the “8.Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion.

SSI0098

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 15: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system

Seats................................................................ 1-2Front seats.................................................. 1-2Rear seats................................................... 1-4Head restraint ............................................. 1-5Armrest ....................................................... 1-7

Seat belts......................................................... 1-8Precautions on seat belt usage ................... 1-8Child safety............................................... 1-11Pregnant women ....................................... 1-12Injured persons ........................................ 1-12Pre-crash seat belts (front seats) (if soequipped) ................................................. 1-12Three-point type seat belt ......................... 1-13Seat belt extenders................................... 1-16Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-16

Child restraints............................................... 1-17Precautions on child restraints.................. 1-17Child restraint installation on rear seatcenter or outboard positions..................... 1-19LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system....................................... 1-24

Top tether strap child restraint ................. 1-26Child restraint installation on frontpassenger seat ......................................... 1-27

Booster seats ................................................. 1-30Precautions on booster seats.................... 1-30Booster seat installation on rear seatcenter or outboard positions..................... 1-33Booster seat installation on frontpassenger seat ......................................... 1-35

Supplemental restraint system ....................... 1-36Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem ...................................................... 1-36INFINITI advanced air bag system (frontseats)........................................................ 1-42Supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system ....................... 1-47Pre-tensioner seat belt system (frontseats)........................................................ 1-49Supplemental air bag warning labels ........ 1-50Supplemental air bag warning light .......... 1-50Repair and replacement procedure............ 1-51

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 16: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

O For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit well backin the seat and adjust the seat beltproperly. See “Precautions on seat beltusage” later in this section.

FRONT SEATS

Front power seat adjustment

WARNING

O Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation. The seat maymove suddenly and could cause loss ofcontrol of the vehicle.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

Operating tips:

O The seat motor has an auto-reset over-load protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 sec-onds, then reactivate the switch.

O Do not operate the power seat for along period of time when the engine isoff. This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in the“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”

SSS0133B

SEATS

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 17: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

section for automatic drive positioner op-eration.

Forward and backward:

Moving the switch j1 forward or back-ward will slide the seat forward or back-ward to the desired position.

Reclining:

Move the recline switch j2 backwarduntil the desired angle is obtained. Tobring the seatback forward again, movethe switch j2 forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help ob-tain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions

on seat belt usage” later in this section.)The seatback may also be reclined toallow occupants to rest when the vehicleis parked.

SSS0474

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 18: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Seat lifter:

Push the front or rear end of the switchup or down to adjust the height and angleof the seat.

For the front passenger’s seat, only theangle of the seat can be adjusted.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat):

The lumbar support feature provideslower back support to the driver. Push thefront j1 or back j2 end of the switch toadjust the seat lumbar area.

REAR SEATS

Rear power seat adjustment (if soequipped)

Forward and backward:

Push the front j1 or back j2 end of theswitch to move the rear outboard seatsforward or backward. The seats move con-tinuously while the switch is beingpushed.

SSS0475 SSS0476 SSS0477

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 19: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Entry/exit assist (automatic return):

Pushing the ON side j1 of the switch lo-cated on the rear center armrest, the au-tomatic return function will activate.

When a rear door is opened, the rear seatof the corresponding side automaticallyslides all the way back, facilitating easeof entry and exit.

Pushing the CANCEL side j2 of the switchwill deactivate the automatic return func-tion.

HEAD RESTRAINT

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-erly as they may provide significant protec-tion against injury in an accident. Do notremove them. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat.

Adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower, push the lock knob j1 and pushthe head restraint down.

To adjust the head restraint angle j2 ,push it in the direction required (frontseat head restraints).

SSS0478 SSS0228A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 20: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Adjust the head restraint so the center islevel with the center of your ears.

Active head restraint (front seats)

WARNING

O Always adjust the head restraints prop-erly as specified in the previous sec-tion. Failure to do so can reduce the ef-fectiveness of the active head restraint.

O Active head restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system can

prevent all injuries in any accident.

O Do not attach anything to the head re-straint stalks. Doing so could impair ac-tive head restraint function.

The active head restraint moves forwardutilizing the force that the seatback re-ceives from the occupant in a rear-endcollision. The movement of the head re-straint helps support the occupant’s headby reducing its backward movement andhelping absorb some of the forces thatmay lead to whiplash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for col-lisions at low to medium speeds in whichit is said that whiplash injury occursmost.

Active head restraints operate only in cer-tain rear-end collisions. After the colli-sion, the head restraints return to theiroriginal positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraintsas described in the previous section.

SSS0287 SPA1278

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 21: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

ARMREST

Front armrest

Pull the lever jA up and slide the driver’s orpassenger’s armrest forward and back-ward.

Slide the armrest to the original positionwhen using the front cup holders.

Rear armrest

Pull the armrest forward until it is hori-zontal.

Trunk pass-through

The rear center seatback can be folded toallow trunk access from inside of the ve-hicle.

To access the trunk, pull down the rearcenter armrest and pull out the trunk pass-through lid j1 .

To lock the lid, use the mechanical key andturn it to the LOCK position j2 . To unlock,turn the mechanical key to the UNLOCK po-sition j3 . For the mechanical key usage,see “Keys (Intelligent Key)” in

SIC2783 SSS0520 SSS0479

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 22: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section.

Make sure that the mechanical key is re-moved before opening or closing thetrunk pass-through lid. Otherwise the lidand the rear armrest may be damaged.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properlyadjusted, and you are sitting upright andwell back in your seat, your chances ofbeing injured or killed in an accidentand/or the severity of injury may begreatly reduced. INFINITI strongly en-courages you and all of your passengersto buckle up every time you drive, even ifyour seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts beworn at all times when a vehicle is beingdriven.

SEAT BELTS

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 23: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

O Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

O The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do somay reduce the effectiveness of the en-tire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in anaccident. Serious injury or death canoccur if the seat belt is not worn prop-erly.

O Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck.The belt should be away from your faceand neck, but not falling off yourshoulder.

O Position the lap belt as low and snugas possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOTTHE WAIST. A lap belt worn too highcould increase the risk of internal inju-ries in an accident.

O Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

O Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce its effec-tiveness.

O Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

O Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

O If the seat belt warning light glowscontinuously while the ignition isturned ON with all doors closed and allseat belts fastened, it may indicate amalfunction in the system. Have thesystem checked by an INFINITI dealer.

O Once the pre-tensioner seat belt hasactivated, it cannot be reused and mustbe replaced together with the retractor.See an INFINITI dealer.

SSS0136A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 24: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system componentsshould be done by an INFINITI dealer.

O All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby an INFINITI dealer. INFINITI rec-ommends that all seat belt assembliesin use during a collision be replacedunless the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use duringa collision should also be inspectedand replaced if either damage or im-proper operation is noted.

O All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations. Thechild restraints should be replaced ifthey are damaged.

SSS0134A SSS0016

SSS0014

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 25: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protectthem. They need to be properly re-strained.

In addition to the general information inthis manual, child safety information isavailable from many other sources, in-cluding doctors, teachers, governmenttraffic safety offices, and community orga-nizations. Every child is different, so besure to learn the best way to transportyour child.

There are three basic types of child re-straint systems:

O Rear facing child restraint

O Front facing child restraint

O Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on thechild’s size. Generally, infants (up toabout 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg))should be placed in rear facing child re-straints. Front facing child restraints areavailable for children who outgrow rearfacing child restraints and are at least 1year old. Booster seats are used to helpposition a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a

child who can no longer use a front facingchild restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt may cometoo close to the face or neck. The lap beltmay not fit over their small hip bones. Inan accident, an improperly fitting seat beltcould cause serious or fatal injury. Alwaysuse appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require the use of approvedchild restraints for infants and small chil-dren. (See “Child restraints” later in thissection.)

Also, there are other types of child re-straints available for larger children foradditional protection.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rearseat. According to accident statistics,children are safer when properly re-strained in the rear seat than in the frontseat. This is especially important because

your vehicle has a supplemental restraintsystem (air bag system) for the front pas-senger. See “Supplemental restraintsystem” later in this section.

Infants

Infants up to at least one year old shouldbe placed in a rear facing child restraint.INFINITI recommends that infants beplaced in child restraints that comply withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.You should choose a child restraint whichfits your vehicle and always follow themanufacturer’s instructions for installa-tion and use.

Small children

Children that are over one year old andweight between 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs(18 kg) can be placed in a forward facingchild restraint. Refer to the manufactur-er’s instructions for minimum andmaximum weight and height recommen-dations. INFINITI recommends that smallchildren be placed in child restraints thatcomply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose achild restraint that fits your vehicle andalways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 26: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

tions for installation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child re-straints should be seated and restrainedby the seat belts which are provided. Theseat belt may not fit properly if the childis less than 4 feet 9 inches (142.5 cm) talland weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should beused to obtain proper seat belt fit.

INFINITI recommends that a child beplaced in a commercially availablebooster seat if the shoulder belt in thechild’s seating position fits close to theface or neck or if the lap portion of theseat belt goes across the abdomen. Thebooster seat should raise the child sothat the shoulder belt is properly posi-tioned across the top, middle portion ofthe shoulder and the lap belt is low onthe hips. A booster seat can only be usedin seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seatshould fit the vehicle seat and have alabel certifying that it complies with Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.Once the child has grown so the shoulderbelt is no longer on or near the face and

neck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seatand do not allow a child in the cargo areaswhile the vehicle is moving. The child couldbe seriously injured or killed in an accidentor sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnantwomen use seat belts. The seat beltshould be worn snug, and always positionthe lap belt as low as possible around thehips, not the waist, and place theshoulder belt over your shoulder andacross your chest. Never run thelap/shoulder belt over your abdominalarea. Contact your doctor for specific rec-ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured per-sons use seat belts, depending on the in-jury. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS (frontseats) (if so equipped)

The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seatbelt to help restrain front seat occupantsunder emergency braking. This can helpreduce the risk of injury when a collisionoccurs.

Pre-crash seat belts will not be activatedwhen:

O the brake pedal is not depressed

O the seat belt is not fastened

O the selector lever is in the reverse po-sition

O the vehicle speed is under 10 MPH (15km/h)

Always wear your seat belt correctly andsit upright and well back.

If the seat belt warning light blinks evenif the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelts are fastened, it may indicate thepre-crash seat belt system has a malfunc-tion. Have your INFINITI dealer check andrepair the system.

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 27: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

O Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

O For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit well backin the seat and adjust the seat beltproperly.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier inthis section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-tractor and insert the tongue into thebuckle until it clicks.

O The retractor is designed to lockduring a sudden stop or on impact. Aslow pulling motion will permit thebelt to move, and allow you somefreedom of movement in the seat.

O If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then smoothlypull the belt out of the retractor.

SSS0292Front seat

SSS0293Rear seat

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 28: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion towardthe retractor to take up extra slack.Make sure the shoulder belt is routedover your shoulder and across yourchest.

The front passenger and rear seat beltshave a locking mechanism for child re-straint installation. It is referred to as theautomatic locking mode or child restraintmode.

When the automatic locking mechanism is

activated the seat belt cannot be ex-tended again until the seat belt tongue isdetached from the buckle and fully re-tracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is inthe emergency locking mode. For addi-tional information, see “Child restraints”later in this section.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by an occu-pant, the locking mode should not be ac-tivated. If it is activated it may cause un-comfortable seat belt tension. It can alsochange the operation of the front passen-ger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag

and status light” later in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat seatbacks are completely secured inthe latched position. If they are not com-pletely secured, passengers may be injuredin an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0290Front seat

SSS0291ARear seat

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 29: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, push the button onthe buckle. The seat belt will automati-cally retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed tolock belt movement by two separatemethods:

O when the belt is pulled quickly fromthe retractor.

O when the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seatbelts, check the operation as follows:

O grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-ward quickly. The retractor should lockand restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during thischeck or if you have any question aboutbelt operation, see an INFINITI dealer.

Center of rear seat

Selecting correct set of seat belts:

The center seat belt buckle is identifiedby the CENTER mark jA . The center seatbelt tongue can be fastened only into thecenter seat belt buckle.

SSS0326 SPA1836

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 30: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Shoulder belt height adjustment(front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.See “Precautions on seat belt usage” ear-lier in this section.

WARNING

O After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

O The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best foryou. Failure to do so may reduce the ef-fectiveness of the entire restraintsystem and increase the chance or se-verity of injury in an accident.

To adjust, push the button jA , and thenmove the shoulder belt anchor to the de-sired position, so that the belt passesover the center of the shoulder. The beltshould be away from your face and neck,but not falling off of your shoulder. Re-lease the button to lock the shoulder beltanchor into position.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving posi-tion, it is not possible to properly fit thelap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an ex-tender is available. The extender adds ap-proximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and

may be used for either the driver or frontpassenger seating position. See anINFINITI dealer for assistance if the ex-tender is required.

WARNING

O Only INFINITI belt extenders, made bythe same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with the INFINITI seat belts.

O Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

O Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

O To clean the seat belt webbings, applya mild soap solution or any non-causticsolution recommended for gentlycleaning cloth upholstery or carpets.

SSS0294A

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 31: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Then brush it, wipe with a cloth and al-low it to dry in the shade. Do not allowthe seat belts to retract until they arecompletely dry.

O If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, theseat belts may retract slowly. Wipe theshoulder belt guide with a clean, drycloth.

O Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components suchas buckles, tongues, retractors, flex-ible wires and anchors work properly.If loose parts, deterioration, cuts orother damage on the webbing arefound, the entire belt assembly shouldbe replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

O Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint can re-sult in serious injury or death.

O Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not pos-sible for even the strongest adult to re-sist the forces of a severe accident. Thechild could be crushed between theadult and parts of the vehicle. Also, donot put the same seat belt around bothyour child and yourself.

O Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental front air bag could seri-ously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be usedin the rear seat.

O INFINITI recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat.

According to accident statistics, chil-dren are safer when properly restrainedin the rear seat than in the front seat.

O An improperly installed child restraintcould lead to serious injury or death inan accident.

In general, child restraints are designedto be installed with the lap portion of alap/shoulder seat belt. In addition, thisvehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint lower anchor system, referred toas the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) system. Some child re-straints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to these lower anchors. For de-tails, see “LATCH (Lower Anchors andTether for CHildren) SYSTEM” later in thissection.

Child restraints for infants and children ofvarious sizes are offered by several manu-facturers. When selecting any child re-straint system, keep the following points inmind:

O Choose only a restraint with a labelcertifying that it complies with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 32: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213.

O Check the child restraint in your ve-hicle to be sure it is compatible withthe vehicle’s seat and seat beltsystem.

O If the child restraint is compatiblewith your vehicle, place your child inthe child restraint and check thevarious adjustments to be sure thechild restraint is compatible with yourchild. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height andweight. Always follow all recom-mended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in approved childrestraints at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

WARNING

O Improper use of a child restraint canincrease the risk or severity of injuryfor both the child and other occupantsof the vehicle.

O Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child re-straint, be sure to select one which willfit your child and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install some typesof child restraints in your vehicle.

O If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being in-jured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

O Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

O After attaching the child restraint, testit before you place the child in it. Pushit from side to side. Try to push it for-ward and check to see if the belt holdsthe restraint in place. The child re-straint should not move more than 1inch (25 mm). If the restraint is not se-cure, tighten the belt as necessary, orput the restraint in another seat andtest it again. You may need to try a dif-ferent child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

O If you must install a front facing childrestraint in the front seat, see “Childrestraint installation on front passengerseat” later in this section for details.

O When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot. Checkthe seating surface and buckles beforeplacing your child in the child restraint.

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 33: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONON REAR SEAT CENTER OROUTBOARD POSITIONS

Front facing

WARNING

O The three-point belt in your vehicle isequipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

O Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision.

If your vehicle is equipped with rearpower seat adjustment, note the fol-lowing:

O Attach the child restraints after ad-justing the rear outboard seats to therearmost position.

O Do not move the rear outboard seats

with the child restraints attached tothem.

When you install a front facing child re-straint in a rear outboard or center seat,follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on theseat. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the vehicle seat-back. If necessary, adjust or removethe head restraint to obtain the cor-rect child restraint fit. See “Head re-straint” earlier in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, storeit in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the child re-straint is removed.

SSS0278Rear center seat

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 34: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is inter-fering with the proper child restraint fit,try another seating position or a dif-ferent child restraint.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage. Be sure to follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions forbelt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of thebelt is fully extended. At this time, thebelt retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child restraint mode). It revertsback to emergency locking mode whenthe belt is fully retracted.

SSS0252ARear outboard seat

SSS0253G SSS0254H

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 35: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up onthe shoulder belt to remove any slack inthe belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child re-straint, use force to push the child re-straint from side to side, and push itforward to make sure that it is securelyheld in place. It should not move morethan 1 in. (25 mm). If it does move morethan 1 in. (25 mm), pull again on theshoulder belt to further tighten thechild restraint. If unable to properly se-cure the restraint, move the restraint toanother rear seating position and tryagain, or try a different child restraint.Not all child restraints fit in all types ofvehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-

matic locking mode by trying to pullmore seat belt out of the retractor. Ifyou cannot pull any more seat belt web-bing out of the retractor, the retractor isin the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior to eachuse. If the seat belt is not locked, re-peat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode) is can-celed.

Rear facing

WARNING

O The three-point belt in your vehicle isequipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be used wheninstalling a child restraint.

O Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraint notbeing properly secured. The restraintcould tip over or otherwise be

SSS0332C SSS0333

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 36: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

unsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision.

If your vehicle is equipped with rearpower seat adjustment, note the fol-lowing:

O Attach the child restraints after ad-justing the rear outboard seats to therearmost position.

O Do not move the rear outboard seatswith the child restraints attached tothem.

When you install a rear facing child re-straint in the rear seat, follow thesesteps:

1. Position the child restraint on theseat. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0334Rear outboard seat

SSS0279ARear center seat

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 37: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage. Be sure to follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions forbelt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of thebelt is fully extended. At this time, theseat belt retractor is in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode). Itreverts back to emergency lockingmode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up onthe shoulder belt to remove any slack inthe belt.

SSS0335 SSS0258A SSS0259A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

Z 05.7.28/Y50-D X

Page 38: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

5. Before placing the child in the child re-straint, use force to push the child re-straint from side to side, and push itforward to make sure that it is securelyheld in place. It should not move morethan 1 in. (25 mm). If it does move morethan 1 in. (25 mm), pull again on theshoulder belt to further tighten thechild restraint. If unable to properly se-cure the restraint, move the restraint toanother rear seating position and tryagain, or try a different child restraint.Not all child restraints fit in all types ofvehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-matic locking mode by trying to pullmore belt out of the retractor. If youcannot pull any more belt webbing outof the retractor, the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior to eachuse. If the seat belt is not locked, re-peat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is allowed to wind back into theretractor, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEM

1. LATCH Lower anchor points (right)2. LATCH Lower anchor points (left)3. LATCH Label(1 and 2 are located in the space betweenthe seatback and seat cushion)

The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) anchor points are located in theseat cushions of the rear outboard seatingpositions only. Do not attempt to install achild restraint in the center position usingthe LATCH anchors.

SSS0260A SSS0522

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 05.7.28/Y50-D X

Page 39: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The LATCH system anchors are located atthe rear of the seat cushion near the seat-back. A label is attached to the seatback tohelp you locate the LATCH system anchors.

WARNING

O Attach LATCH system compatible childrestraints only at the locations shown. Ifa child restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

O Do not secure a child restraint in the cen-ter rear seating position using the LATCHsystem anchors. The child restraint willnot be secured properly.

O The LATCH system anchors are designedto withstand only those loads imposedby correctly fitted child restraints. Underno circumstance are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.

If your vehicle is equipped with rear powerseat adjustment, note the following:

O Attach the child restraints after adjust-ing the rear outboard seats to the rear-most position.

O Do not move the rear outboard seatswith the child restraints attached tothem.

Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can beconnected to two anchors located at cer-tain seating positions in your vehicle. Thissystem is known as the LATCH system. Thissystem may also be referred to as theISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. Withthis system, you do not have to use a ve-hicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.Your vehicle is equipped with special an-chor points that are used with LATCHsystem compatible child restraints. Checkyour child restraint for a label stating that itis compatible with the LATCH system. Thisinformation may also be in the instructionsprovided by the child restraint manufac-turer. If you have such a child restraint, re-fer to the illustration for the seating posi-tions equipped with LATCH system anchorswhich can be used to secure the child re-straint.

Some child restraints may also require theuse of a top tether strap. See “Top tetherstrap child restraint” later in this sectionfor installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefullyread and follow the instructions in thismanual and those supplied with the childrestraint.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 40: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When you install a LATCH system compat-ible child restraint to the lower anchor at-tachments, follow these steps.

WARNING

Inspect the lower anchors by inserting yourfingers into the lower anchor area andfeeling to make sure there are no obstruc-tions over the LATCH system anchors, suchas seat belt webbing or seat cushion mate-rial. The child restraint will not be securedproperly if the LATCH system anchors are

obstructed.

1. Turn up the cover j1 (if so equipped) lo-cated on the bottom of the rear seat-back to find the LATCH lower anchorpoints jA .

2. To install the LATCH system compatiblechild restraint, insert the child restraintLATCH system anchor attachments intothe anchor points on the rear seat. Ifthe child restraint is equipped with atop tether, see “Top tether strap childrestraint” later in this section for instal-lation instructions.

3. After attaching the child restraint andbefore placing the child in it, use forceto push the child restraint from side toside and push it forward to make surethat the child restraint is securely heldin place. It should not move more than1 in. (25 mm).

4. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior to eachuse.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINT

WARNING

Child restraint anchor points are designed towithstand only those loads imposed by cor-rectly fitted child restraints. Under no cir-cumstances are they to be used for adult seatbelts or harnesses.

If your child restraint has a top tetherstrap, it must be secured to the anchor

SSS0519 SSS0502

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 41: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

point provided behind its position.

First, adjust the seatback so that it is up-right. Then secure the child restraint withthe rear seat belt or the LATCH system(outboard positions), as applicable.

Adjust the head restraint to the bottomposition. Position the top tether strapover the top of the head restraint and se-cure it to the tether anchor bracket thatprovides the straightest installation.Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instruction to remove anyslack.

For best child restraint fit, see the childrestraint installation instructions in thissection and the child restraint manufac-turer’s instructions.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear par-cel shelf finisher.If you have any questions when in-stalling a top strap child restraint on therear seat, consult an INFINITI dealer fordetails.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

O Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front passenger seat.Supplemental front air bags inflate withgreat force. A rear-facing child restraintcould be struck by the supplementalfront air bag in a crash and could seri-ously injure or kill your child.

O INFINITI recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position. Also, be surethe front passenger air bag status lightis illuminated to indicate the passengerair bag is OFF. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this sec-tion for details.

SSS0300A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 42: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front passen-ger seat.

O The three-point seat belt in your ve-hicle is equipped with an automaticlocking mode retractor which must beused when installing a child restraint.

O Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The childrestraint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision. Also, itcan change the operation of the frontpassenger air bag. See “Front pas-senger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

If you must install a child restraint in thefront seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on thefront passenger seat. It should beplaced in a front facing direction only.Move the seat to the rearmost posi-tion. Adjust the head restraint to itshighest position. Always follow thechild restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions. Child restraints for infants mustbe used in the rear facing directionand therefore must not be used in thefront seat.

The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the vehicle seat-back. If necessary, adjust or removethe head restraint to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. See “Head re-straint” earlier in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, storeit in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the child re-straint is removed.

If the seating position does not havean adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper child re-straint fit, try another seating positionor a different child restraint.

SSS0301B

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 43: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel thelatch engage. Be sure to follow thechild restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all ofthe belt is fully extended. At this time,the belt retractor is in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode). Itreverts back to emergency lockingmode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull upjA on the shoulder belt to remove anyslack in the belt.

SSS0360 SSS0361 SSS0331C

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 44: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

5. Before placing the child in the child re-straint, use force to push the child re-straint from side to side, and push itforward to make sure that it is securelyheld in place. It should not move morethan 1 in. (25 mm). If it does move morethan 1 in. (25 mm), pull again on theshoulder belt to further tighten thechild restraint. If unable to properly se-cure the restraint, move the restraint toanother rear seating position and tryagain, or try a different child restraint.Not all child restraints fit in all types ofvehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-matic locking mode by trying to pullmore belt out of the retractor. If youcannot pull any more belt webbing outof the retractor, the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior to eachuse. If the seat belt is not locked, re-peat steps 3 through 6.

8. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Thepassenger air bag status light shouldsay “OFF”. If this light is not illumi-nated, it may indicate a malfunction.Move the child restraint to anotherseating position. Have the systemchecked by an INFINITI dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode) is can-celed.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS

WARNING

O Infants and small children should alwaysbe placed in an appropriate child re-straint while riding in the vehicle. Failureto use a child restraint or booster seatcan result in serious injury or death.

O Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

O INFINITI recommends that the boosterseat be installed in the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat.

SSS0302E

BOOSTER SEATS

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 45: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O A booster seat must only be installed ina seating position that has alap/shoulder belt. Failure to use athree-point type seat belt with abooster seat can result in a serious in-jury in sudden stop or collision.

O An improperly installed booster seatcould lead to serious injury or death inan accident.

WARNING

Do not use towels, books, pillows or otheritems in place of a booster seat. Itemssuch as these may move during normaldriving or a collision and result in seriousinjury or death. Booster seats are designedto be used with a lap/shoulder belt.Booster seats are designed to properlyroute the lap and shoulder portions of theseat belt over the strongest portions of a

child’s body to provide the maximum pro-tection during a collision.

Booster seats of various sizes are offeredby several manufacturers. When selectingany booster seat, keep the followingpoints in mind:

O Choose only a booster seat with alabel certifying that it complies withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

O Check the booster seat in your vehicleto be sure it is compatible with the ve-hicle’s seat and seat belt system.

LRS0455

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 46: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Make sure the child’s head will beproperly supported by the boosterseat or vehicle seat. The seatbackmust be at or above the center of thechild’s ears. For example, if a low backbooster seat j1 is chosen, the vehicleseatback must be at or above the cen-ter of the child’s ears. If the seatbackis lower than the center of the child’sears, a high back booster seat j2should be used.

O If the booster seat is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in thebooster seat and check the variousadjustments to be sure the booster

seat is compatible with your child. Al-ways follow all recommended proce-dures.

All U.S. states and provinces of Canadarequire that infants and small children berestrained in an approved child restraintat all times while the vehicle is being op-erated.

WARNING

O Improper use of a booster seat can in-crease the risk or severity of injury forboth the child and other occupants ofthe vehicle.

O Follow all of the booster seat manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a booster seat,be sure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be pos-sible to properly install some types ofbooster seats in your vehicle.

O If the booster seat and seat belt arenot used properly, the risk of a childbeing injured in a collision or a suddenstop greatly increases.

SSS0387 SSS0388

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 47: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the booster seat, but asupright as possible.

O After placing the child in the boosterseat and fastening the seat belt, makesure the shoulder portion of the belt isaway from the child’s face and neckand the lap portion of the belt does notcross the abdomen.

O Do not put the shoulder belt behind thechild or under the child’s arm. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation onfront passenger seat” later in this sec-tion.

O When your booster seat is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot. Check

the seating surface and buckles beforeplacing your child in the booster seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ONREAR SEAT CENTER OR OUTBOARDPOSITIONS

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt automaticlocking mode when using a booster seatwith the seat belts.

If your vehicle is equipped with rearpower seat adjustment, note the fol-lowing:

LRS0451Center position

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 48: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Attach the booster seats after ad-justing the rear outboard seats to therearmost position.

O Do not move the rear outboard seatswith the booster seats attached tothem.

When you install a booster seat in therear seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the booster seat on the seat.Only place it in a front facing direc-tion. Always follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.If necessary, adjust or remove thehead restraint to obtain the correctbooster seat fit. See “Head restraint”earlier in this section. If the head re-straint is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to install the head re-straint when the booster seat is re-moved. If the seating position doesnot have an adjustable head restraintand it is interfering with the properbooster seat fit, try another seatingposition or a different booster seat.

3. Position the lap portion of the seatbelt low and snug on the child’s hips.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of theseat belt toward the retractor to takeup extra slack. Be sure the shoulderbelt is positioned across the top,middle portion of the child’s shoulder.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

5. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-structions for properly fastening a seatbelt shown in the “Three-point type

seat belt” earlier in this section.

LRS0452Outboard position

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 49: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ONFRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

INFINITI recommends that child restraintsbe installed in the rear seat. However, ifyou must install a booster seat in the frontpassenger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position. Also, be sure thefront passenger air bag status light is illu-minated to indicate the passenger

air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this sectionfor details.

If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, follow these steps:

1. Move the seat to the rearmost posi-tion.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.Only place it in a front facing direc-tion. Always follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positionedon the vehicle seat so that it is stable.If necessary, adjust or remove thehead restraint to obtain the correctbooster seat fit. See “Head restraint”earlier in this section. If the head re-straint is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to install the head re-straint when the booster seat is re-moved. If the seating position doesnot have an adjustable head restraintand it is interfering with the properbooster seat fit, try another seatingposition or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat

belt low and snug on the child’s hips.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of theseat belt toward the retractor to takeup extra slack. Be sure the shoulderbelt is positioned across the top,middle portion of the child’s shoulder.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-structions for properly fastening a seatbelt shown in the “Three-point typeseat belt” earlier in this section.

7. Turn the ignition to the ON position.The passenger air bag status lightshould say “OFF”. If this light is not il-luminated, it may indicate a malfunc-tion. Move the booster seat to anotherseating position. Have the systemchecked by an INFINITI dealer.

LRS0454

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 50: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)section contains important informationconcerning the driver and passenger frontimpact supplemental air bags (INFINITIAdvanced Air Bag System), front seatside-impact supplemental air bags, cur-tain side-impact air bags and front seatpre-tensioner seat belts.Supplemental front air bag system: TheINFINITI advanced air bag system canhelp cushion the impact force to the faceand chest of the driver and front pas-senger in certain frontal collisions.Supplemental side air bag system: Thissystem can help cushion the impact forceto the chest and pelvis area of the driverand front passenger in certain side impactcollisions. The front seat side-impactsupplemental air bags are designed to in-flate on the side where the vehicle is im-pacted.Supplemental curtain side-impact air bagsystem: This system can help cushion theimpact force to the head of occupants infront and rear outboard seating positionsin certain side impact collisions. The cur-tain side-impact air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted.

These supplemental restraint systems aredesigned to supplement the crash protec-tion provided by the driver and passengerseat belts and are not a substitute forthem. Seat belts should always be cor-rectly worn and the occupant seated asuitable distance away from the steeringwheel, instrument panel and door fin-ishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in thissection for instructions and precautionson seat belt usage.)

After pushing the ignition switch to theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the systems areoperational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 51: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

O The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, rollover, orlower severity frontal collision. Also, thefront passenger air bag will not inflate ifthe passenger air bag status light is lit.Always wear your seat belts to help re-duce the risk or severity of injury invarious kinds of accidents.

O The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat. Supplemental front air bags in-flate with great force. Even with the IN-FINITI advanced air bag system, if youare unrestrained, leaning forward, sittingsideways or out of position in any way,you are at greater risk of injury or deathin a crash. You may also receive seriousor fatal injuries from the supplementalfront air bag if you are up against it whenit inflates. Always sit back against theseatback and as far-away as practical

SSS0131B

SSS0132B

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 52: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

from the steering wheel or instrumentpanel. Always use the seat belts.

O The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. Theair bag system monitors the severity of acollision and seat belt usage then in-flates the air bags. Failure to properlywear seat belts can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.

O The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-senger air bag OFF under some condi-tions. This sensor is only used in thisseat. Failure to be properly seated andwearing the seat belt can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.See “Front Passenger air bag and statuslight” later in this section.

O Keep hands on the outside of thesteering wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase the

risk of injury if the supplemental front airbag inflates.

SSS0007

SSS0006

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 53: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

O Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

O Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags, side air bags or curtain side-impact air bags inflate if they are notproperly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-dren should be properly restrained inthe rear seat, if possible.

O Even with the INFINITI Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. See“Child restraints” earlier in this sectionfor details.

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 54: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag:

O The supplemental side air bag and cur-tain side-impact air bag ordinarily willnot inflate in the event of a frontal im-pact, rear impact, rollover or lower sever-ity side collision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk or severityof injury in various kinds of accidents.

SSS0059A

SSS0188A

SSS0140

SSS0162

SSS0159

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 05.2.15/Y50-D X

Page 55: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O The seat belts, the supplemental side airbags and curtain side-impact air bagsare most effective when you are sittingwell back and upright in the seat. Theside air bag and curtain side-impact airbag inflate with great force. Do not allowanyone to place their hand, leg or facenear the side air bag on the side of theseatback of the front seat or near theside roof rails. Do not allow anyone sit-ting in the front seats or rear outboardseats to extend their hand out of the win-dow or lean against the door. Some ex-amples of dangerous riding positions areshown in the previous illustrations.

O When sitting in the rear seat, do not holdonto the seatback of the front seat. If thesupplemental side air bag inflates, youmay be seriously injured. Be especiallycareful with children, who should alwaysbe properly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shown inthe illustrations.

O Do not use seat covers on the front seat-backs. They may interfere with supple-mental side air bag inflation.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

Z 05.2.15/Y50-D X

Page 56: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Crash zone sensor2. Supplemental front air bag modules

(INFINITI advanced air bags)3. Supplemental side air bag modules4. Occupant classification system control

unit

5. Occupant classification sensor6. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bags7. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bag modules8. Diagnosis sensor unit

9. Satellite sensors10. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor

INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAGSYSTEM (front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with theINFINITI advanced air bag system for thedriver and front passenger seats. Thissystem is designed to meet certificationrequirements under U.S. regulations. It isalso permitted in Canada. However, all ofthe information, cautions and warnings inthis manual still apply and must be fol-lowed. The driver supplemental air bag islocated in the center of the steeringwheel; the front passenger supplementalair bag is mounted in the instrumentpanel above the glove box. The front airbags are designed to inflate in higher se-verity frontal collisions, although theymay inflate if the forces in another type ofcollision are similar to those of a higherseverity frontal impact. They may not in-flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicledamage (or lack of it) is not always an in-dication of proper supplemental air bagoperation.

The INFINITI advanced air bag systemhas dual stage inflators for both thedriver and passenger air bags. The

SSS0480

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 57: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

system monitors information from thecrash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensorunit, seat belt buckle switches, occupantclassification sensor and passenger seatbelt tension sensor. Inflator operation isbased on the severity of a collision andwhether the seat belts are being used. Forthe front right passenger, it additionallymonitors the weight of an occupant or ob-ject on the seat and seat belt tension.Based on information from the sensors,only one front air bag may inflate in acrash, depending on the crash severityand whether the front occupants arebelted or unbelted. Additionally, the frontright passenger air bag may be automati-cally turned OFF under some conditions,depending on the weight detected on thepassenger seat and how the seat belt isused. If the front passenger air bag isOFF, the passenger air bag status lightwill be illuminated. See “Front passengerair bag and status light” later in this sec-tion for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper per-formance of the system. If you have anyquestions about the performance of yourair bag system, please contact anINFINITI dealer.

When the supplemental front air bag in-flates, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smokeis not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken not to inhale it,as it may cause irritation and choking.Those with a history of a breathing condi-tion should get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along withthe use of seat belts, help to cushion theimpact force on the face and chest of thefront occupants. They can help save livesand reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facialabrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lowerbody.

Even with INFINITI advanced air bags,seat belts should be correctly worn andthe driver and passenger seated uprightas far as practical away from the steeringwheel or instrument panel. The supple-mental front air bags inflate quickly in or-der to help protect the front occupants.Because of this, the force of the front airbag inflating can increase the risk of in-jury if the occupant is too close to, or isagainst the air bag module during infla-tion. The air bag will deflate quickly aftera collision. The supplemental front air

bags operate only when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system is op-erational.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 58: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Front passenger air bag andstatus light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some condi-tions. Read this section carefully to learnhow it operates. Proper use of the seat,seat belt and child restraints is necessaryfor most effective protection. Failure to

follow all instructions in this manual con-cerning the use of seats, seat belts andchild restraints can increase the risk or se-verity of injury in an accident.

Status light:

The front passenger air bag status light islocated on the map light cover. The lightoperates as follows:

Unoccupied passenger seat or when otherconditions are met as outlined in this sec-tion: The light illuminates to indicate thatthe front passenger air bag is OFF and willnot inflate in a crash.

Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meets the conditions outlined in thissection: The light does not illuminate toindicate that the front passenger air bagis operational.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF when the vehicle isoperated under some conditions as de-scribed below as permitted by U.S. regu-lations. If the front passenger air bag isOFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The

driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to helpreduce the risk of injury or death from aninflating air bag to certain front passengerseat occupants, such as children, by re-quiring the air bag to be automaticallyturned OFF. Certain sensors are used tomeet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classifi-cation sensor. It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is de-signed to detect an occupant and objectson the seat by weight. It works togetherwith seat belt sensors described later. Forexample, if a child is in the front passen-ger seat, the advanced air bag system isdesigned to turn the passenger air bagOFF. Also, if a child restraint of the typespecified in the regulations is on the seat,its weight and the child’s weight can bedetected and cause the air bag to turnOFF. The occupant classification sensoroperation can vary depending on the frontpassenger seat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors aredesigned to detect if the seat belt isbuckled and the amount of tension on theseat belt, such as when it is in the auto-

SSS0481Front passenger air bag status light

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 59: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

matic locking mode (child restraint mode).Based on the weight on the seat detectedby the occupant classification sensor andthe belt tension detected on the seat belt,the advanced air bag system determineswhether the front passenger air bagshould be automatically turned OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants whoare properly seated and using the seatbelt as outlined in this manual should notcause the passenger air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. For small adults itmay be turned OFF. Also, if the occupanttakes his/her weight off the seat cushion(for example, by not sitting upright, bysitting on an edge of the seat, or by oth-erwise being out of position), this couldcause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.In addition, if the occupant improperlyuses the seat belt in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode), thiscould cause the air bag to be turned OFF.Always be sure to be seated and wearingthe seat belt properly for the most effec-tive protection by the seat belt andsupplemental air bag.

INFINITI recommends that pre-teens andchildren be properly restrained in a rearseat. INFINITI also recommends that ap-propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat.If this is not possible, the occupant clas-sification sensor and seat belt sensorsare designed to operate as describedabove to turn the front passenger air bagOFF for specified child restraints. Failingto properly secure child restrains and touse the automatic locking mode (child re-straint mode) may allow the restraint totip or move in an accident or suddenstop. This can also result in the pas-senger air bag inflating in a crash insteadof being OFF. See “Child restraints” ear-lier in this section for proper use and in-stallation.

If the front passenger seat is not occu-pied, the passenger air bag is designednot to inflate in a crash. However, heavyobjects placed on the seat could result inair bag inflation, because of the object’sweight detected by the occupant classifi-cation sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if achild is standing on the seat, or if twochildren are on the seat, contrary to theinstructions in this manual. Always besure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light,you can monitor when the front pas-

senger air bag is automatically turnedOFF. The light will illuminate (indicatingthe air bag is OFF and will not inflate)when the front passenger seat is not oc-cupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat and thepassenger air bag status light is illumi-nated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),it could be that the person is a smalladult, or is not sitting on the seat orusing the seat belt properly. If a child re-straint must be used in the front seat, butthe status light is not lit (indicating thatthe air bag might inflate in a crash), itcould be that the child restraint or seatbelt is not being used properly. If suchsituations happen, properly position andrestrain the occupant or child restraint.Otherwise reposition the occupant orchild restraint in a rear seat.

If a malfunction occurs in the front pas-senger air bag system, the supplementalair bag warning light , located in themeter and gauges area will blink. Havethe system checked by an INFINITIdealer.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 60: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Other supplemental front air bagprecautions

WARNING

O Do not place any objects on thesteering wheel pad or on the instru-ment panel. Also, do not place any ob-jects between any occupant and thesteering wheel or instrument panel.Such objects may become dangerousprojectiles and cause injury if thesupplemental front air bag inflates.

O Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components willbe hot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. Thisis to prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

O Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe supplemental front air bag system.

O Tampering with the supplemental airbag system may result in serious per-sonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly by placingmaterial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel or byinstalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

O Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat. Additionally, do notstow any objects under the front pas-senger seat or the seat cushion andseatback. Such objects may interferewith the proper operation of the occu-pant classification system (weightsensor).

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affectthe supplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the seat belt systemmay result in serious personal injury.

O Work around and on the supplementalfront air bag system should be done byan INFINITI dealer. Installation ofelectrical equipment should also bedone by an INFINITI dealer. The yellowand orange Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring and connectorsshould not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the air bag system.

O A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

O The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easyidentification.

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 61: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about thesupplemental front air bag system andguide the buyer to the appropriate sec-tions in this Owner’s Manual.

SUPPLEMENTAL SIDE AIR BAGAND CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT AIRBAG SYSTEM

The supplemental side air bags are lo-cated in the outside of the seatback ofthe front seats. The supplemental curtainside-impact air bags are located in theside roof rails. These systems are de-signed to meet voluntary guidelines tohelp reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of theinformation, cautions and warnings inthis manual still apply and must be fol-lowed. The supplemental side air bags

and curtain side-impact air bags are de-signed to inflate in higher severity sidecollisions, although they may inflate if theforces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity sideimpact. They are designed to inflate onthe side where the vehicle is impacted.They may not inflate in certain side colli-sions on the side where the vehicle is im-pacted. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) isnot always an indication of proper supple-mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairlyloud noise may be heard, followed by re-lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a his-tory of a breathing condition should getfresh air promptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along withthe use of seat belts, help to cushion theimpact force on the chest and pelvis ofthe front occupants. Curtain side-impactair bags help to cushion the impact forceto the head of occupants in the front andrear outboard seating positions. They canhelp save lives and reduce serious inju-ries. However, an inflating side air bag

SSS0521

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 62: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

and curtain side-impact air bag maycause abrasions or other injuries. Supple-mental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags do not provide restraintto the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly wornand the driver and passenger seated up-right as far as practical away from theside air bag. Rear seat passengers shouldbe seated as far away as practical fromthe door finishers and side roof rails. Theside air bags and curtain side-impact airbag inflate quickly in order to help protectthe out-of-position occupants. Because ofthis, the force of the side air bag and cur-tain side-impact air bag inflating can in-crease the risk of injury if the occupant istoo close to, or is against, these air bagmodules during inflation. The side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag will de-flate quickly after the collision is over.

After pushing the ignition switch to theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the systems are operational.

WARNING

O Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if the supplemental sideair bag inflates.

O Right after inflation, several side airbag and curtain side-impact air bagsystem components will be hot. Do nottouch them; you may severely burnyourself.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthis side air bag and curtain air bagsystem. This is to prevent accidental in-flation of the side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag or damage to theside air bag and curtain side-impact airbag system.

O Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thesupplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system.

O Tampering with the supplemental airbag system may result in serious per-sonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seat by placing mate-rial near the seatback or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, around the side air bag.

O Work around and on the side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systemshould be done by an INFINITI dealer.Installation of electrical equipmentshould also be done by an INFINITIdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harnesses connectorsare yellow and orange for easyidentification.

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 63: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about the sideair bag and curtain side-impact air bagsystem and guide the buyer to the appro-priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELTSYSTEM (front seats)

WARNING

O The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot bereused after activation. It must be re-placed together with the retractor andbuckle as a unit.

O If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but the pre-tensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by an INFINITI dealer.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt system. Thisis to prevent accidental activation ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt or damageto the pre-tensioner seat belt opera-tion. Tampering with the pre-tensioner

seat belt system may result in seriouspersonal injury.

O Work around and on the pre-tensionersystem should be done by an INFINITIdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by anINFINITI dealer. Unauthorized elec-trical test equipment and probing de-vices should not be used on the pre-tensioner seat belt system.

O If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contactan INFINITI dealer. Correct preten-sioner disposal procedures are set forthin the appropriate INFINITI ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem activates in conjunction with thesupplemental air bag systems. Workingwith the seat belt retractor, it helpstighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-comes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-pants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with theseat belt’s retractor. These seat belts areused the same as conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt acti-vates, smoke is released and a loud noisemay be heard. The smoke is not harmful,but care should be taken not to inhale itas it may cause irritation and choking.Those with a history of a breathing condi-tion should get fresh air promptly.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the supplemental airbag warning light will not come on,will flash intermittently or will turn on for7 seconds and remain on after the igni-tion switch has been pushed to the ONposition. In this case, the pre-tensionerseat belt may not function properly. Theymust be checked and repaired. Take yourvehicle to the nearest INFINITI dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner’s Manual.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 64: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplementalfront air bag and supplemental side-impact air bag systems are placed in thevehicle as shown in the illustration.

j1 SRS air bag

The warning labels are located on the sur-face of the sun visors.

j2 SRS side-impact air bag

The warning label is located on the sideof the passenger’s side center pillar.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel,monitors the circuits of the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systems,and pre-tensioner seat belt. The circuitsmonitored by the supplemental air bagwarning light are the diagnosis sensorunit, satellite sensors, crash zone sensor,front air bag modules, side air bag mod-ules, curtain side-impact air bag modules,

and all related wiring, and pre-tensionerseat belt.

After pushing the ignition switch to theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supplemen-tal air bag warning light will turn off afterabout 7 seconds if the system is opera-tional.

If any of the following conditions occur,the supplemental front air bag, supple-mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems, and pre-tensionerseat belt need servicing:

O The supplemental air bag warninglight remains on after approximately 7seconds after pushing the ignitionswitch to the ON position.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight flashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplementalfront air bags, supplemental side airbags, curtain side-impact air bags and/orpre-tensioner seat belt may not operateproperly. They must be checked and re-paired. Take your vehicle to the nearestINFINITI dealer.

SSS0330 SPA1097

1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 65: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light ison, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain side-impact air bag systems and/orpre-tensioner seat belt will not operate inan accident. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE

The supplemental front air bags, supple-mental side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags and pre-tensioner seat belt aredesigned to activate on a one-time-onlybasis. As a reminder, unless it is dam-aged, the supplemental air bag warninglight will remain illuminated after inflationhas occurred. Repair and replacement ofthese systems should be done only by anINFINITI dealer.

When maintenance work is required onthe vehicle, the supplemental front airbags, side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags, related parts and pre-tensioner

seat belt should be pointed out to theperson conducting the maintenance. Theignition switch should always be in theLOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

O Once a supplemental front air bag, sideair bag or curtain side-impact air baghas inflated, the air bag module willnot function again and must be re-placed. Additionally, if any of thesupplemental front air bags inflate, theactivated pre-tensioner seat belt mustalso be replaced. The air bag moduleand pre-tensioner seat belt systemshould be replaced by an INFINITIdealer. The air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belt system cannot berepaired.

O The supplemental front air bag, side airbag and curtain side-impact air bagsystems and pre-tensioner seat beltsystem should be inspected by anINFINITI dealer if there is any damageto the front end or side portion of thevehicle.

O If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat beltsystem or scrap the vehicle, contact anINFINITI dealer.

Correct supplemental air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt system disposalprocedures are set forth in the appro-priate INFINITI Service Manual. Incor-rect disposal procedures could causepersonal injury.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 66: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit ........................................................... 2-2Instrument panel ............................................. 2-3Meters and gauges........................................... 2-4

Speedometer and odometer ........................ 2-5Tachometer ................................................. 2-5Engine coolant temperature gauge.............. 2-6Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-6Meter/ring illumination and needlesweep ......................................................... 2-7

Compass (if so equipped)................................. 2-8Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders....................................................... 2-11

Checking bulbs ......................................... 2-11Warning lights........................................... 2-12Indicator lights ......................................... 2-17Audible reminders..................................... 2-19

Dot matrix liquid crystal display..................... 2-20Indicators for operation ............................ 2-21

Security systems ............................................ 2-22Vehicle security system............................. 2-22INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ....... 2-24

Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 2-25Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch ............................................................ 2-26

Headlight and turn signal switch.................... 2-26Xenon headlights (if so equipped) ............ 2-26Headlight switch ....................................... 2-27Turn signal switch..................................... 2-31Fog light switch ........................................ 2-31

Hazard warning flasher switch ....................... 2-32Horn............................................................... 2-32Heated seats (Rear seats) (if so equipped) ..... 2-33Climate controlled seats (Front seats) (if soequipped)....................................................... 2-34Lane departure warning (LDW) switch (if soequipped)....................................................... 2-35SNOW mode switch (if so equipped) .............. 2-36Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch........ 2-36Clock.............................................................. 2-37

Adjusting the time .................................... 2-37Power outlet................................................... 2-37Cigarette lighter and ashtrays ........................ 2-38

Front ......................................................... 2-38Rear .......................................................... 2-39

Storage .......................................................... 2-39Cup holders .............................................. 2-39Sunglasses holder ................................... 2-41Glove box.................................................. 2-41

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 67: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Console box .............................................. 2-42Cargo net (if so equipped) ........................ 2-43

Windows ........................................................ 2-44Power windows ......................................... 2-44

Sunroof .......................................................... 2-46Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-46

Rear control cancel switch (if so equipped) .... 2-48Rear sunshade (if so equipped)...................... 2-48Interior lights ................................................ 2-49

Map lights ................................................ 2-49Rear personal lights.................................. 2-49Interior light control switch ...................... 2-50

Vanity mirror lights ........................................ 2-51

Trunk light...................................................... 2-51HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if soequipped)....................................................... 2-51

Programming HomeLink .......................... 2-52Programming HomeLink for Canadiancustomers ................................................. 2-54Operating HomeLink UniversalTransceiver................................................ 2-54Programming trouble diagnosis ................ 2-54Clearing the programmed information....... 2-54Reprogramming a single HomeLinkbutton....................................................... 2-54If your vehicle is stolen ............................ 2-55

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 68: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Instrument brightness control switch(P.2-30)

2. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-25)

3. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)switch (if so equipped) (P.2-29)

4. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P.2-36)

5. Headlight, fog light and turn signalswitch (P.2-26)

6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (Left

side)— ENTER switch (P.4-6, P.4-42)— BACK switch (P.4-43)— TALK switch (P.4-66)/Phone switch

(P.4-58)— Volume control switches (P.4-43)— Source select switch (P.4-43)

7. Windshield wiper and washer switch(P.2-25)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls(Right side)— Cruise control switches (P.5-18)— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P.5-20)

9. Hood release handle (P.5-18)

10. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-18)

11. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch(if so equipped) (P.2-35)

12. Intelligent Key port (P.5-8)

13. Tilting/telescopic steering wheelswitch (P.3-22)

14. Steering wheel— Horn (P.2-32)— Driver supplemental air bag

(P.1-36)

SSI0090

COCKPIT

2-2 Instruments and controls

Z 04.12.14/Y50-D X

Page 69: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Side ventilator (P.4-23)

2. Meters and gauges (P.2-4)

3. Center ventilator (P.4-23)

4. Security indicator light (P.2-22)

5. Hazard warning flasher switch(P.2-32)

6. Automatic climate control system(P.4-25)

7. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system (if so equipped)— Vehicle information and setting but-

tons (P.4-7)— Phone system (P.4-58)— Audio system (P.4-30)

8. Front passenger supplemental air bag(P.1-36)

9. Fuse box cover (P.8-28)

10. Parking brake pedal— Parking (P.5-44)— Maintenance (P.8-25)

11. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-6)

12. Clock (P.2-37)

13. Cigarette lighter and ashtrays(P.2-38)

14. Audio system (P.4-30)

15. Glove box lid release button (P.2-41)

16. Bluetooth in-vehicle phonemodule (P.4-58)/DVD drive for navi-gation system (if so equipped)(P.4-45)

17. Trunk release power cancel switch(P.3-19)

SSI0091

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instruments and controls 2-3

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 70: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge*

2. Tachometer*

3. Warning/indicator lights

4. Speedometer*

5. Fuel gauge*

6. Meter illumination control knob

7. Dot matrix liquid crystal display

8. Odometer/twin trip odometer

9. Change/reset knob for twin tripodometer

*: The needle indicators in the speedom-eter, tachometer, engine coolant tem-perature gauge and fuel gauge maymove slightly after the ignition switchis pushed to the LOCK position. This isnot a malfunction.

SSI0092

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 71: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer j1 and twin trip odometerj2 are displayed when the ignition switchis in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-tance of individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the TRIP/RESET knob j3 changesthe display as follows:

TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer:

Push the TRIP/RESET knob for more than1 second to reset the currently displayedtrip odometer to zero.

Average fuel economy and distance toempty information is also available. Referto “How to use status button” in the“4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice-activated control systems” sectionlater in this manual. TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (RPM). Do not revthe engine into the red zone jA .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause seriousengine damage.

SIC2760 SIC2761

Instruments and controls 2-5

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 72: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature.

The engine coolant temperature is in thenormal range when the gauge needlepoints within the zone jA shown in the il-lustration.

The engine coolant temperature will varywith the outside air temperature and driv-ing conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If gauge is over the normalrange, stop the vehicle as soon as safelypossible. If the engine is overheated, con-tinued operation of the vehicle may seri-ously damage the engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” in the “6. In case of emer-gency” section for immediate actionrequired.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuellevel in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-ing, turning, acceleration, or going up ordown hill.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) af-ter the ignition switch is pushed to LOCK.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-isters “E” (Empty).

The low fuel warning light jA comes onwhen the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel

SIC2762 SIC2763

2-6 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 73: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

as soon as it is convenient, preferably be-fore the gauge reaches “E”. There will bea small reserve of fuel in the tank whenthe fuel gauge needle reaches “E”.

The indicates that the fuel-filler dooris located on the passenger’s side of thevehicle.

CAUTION

O If the vehicle runs out of fuel, themalfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

may come on. Refuel as soon as pos-sible. After a few driving trips, the

lamp should turn off. If the lampremains on after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected by anINFINITI dealer.

O For additional information, see “Mal-function indicator lamp (MIL)” later inthis section.

METER/RING ILLUMINATION ANDNEEDLE SWEEP

The ring illumination surrounding metersand gauges illuminates when the driver’sdoor is closed after getting into the ve-hicle with the Intelligent Key carried in.

When the engine is started, the indicatorneedles will sweep in the speedometerand tachometer and the ring illuminationwill be brightened gradually.

Meter illumination control knob

The meter illumination control knob j1

operates when the headlight switch is inthe AUTO (not lighting) or OFF positionwith the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

To adjust the brightness of the meters,push the control knob several times untilthe desired brightness is achieved.

To turn the ring illumination and needlesweep on and off, push the control knoband hold it for 1 second.

SIC2874

Instruments and controls 2-7

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 74: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, the compass display jB willindicate the direction of the vehicle’sheading such as N (North), E (East), S(South) or W (West).

If the display reads “C”, calibrate thecompass by driving the vehicle in 3 com-plete circles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).You can also calibrate the compass bydriving your vehicle on your everydayroute. The compass will be calibratedonce it has tracked 3 complete circles.

To turn on and off the compass manually,push the COMP (compass) switch jA

while the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition.

SIC1901A

COMPASS (if so equipped)

2-8 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 75: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic northand geographical north is known as vari-ance. In some areas, this difference cansometimes be great enough to causefalse compass readings. Follow these in-structions to set the variance for your par-ticular location if this happens:

1. Push the COMP switch for more than 3seconds. The current zone number willappear in the display.

2. Find your current location and vari-ance number on the zone map.

3. Push the COMP switch repeatedly untilthe new zone number appears in thedisplay, then release the switch. Afteryou release the switch, the displaywill show a compass direction within afew seconds.

Inaccurate compass direction:

1. With the display turned on, push theCOMP switch for 3 seconds, until azone selection number is displayed inthe mirror compass window.

2. Push the COMP switch repeatedly untilthe correct zone is displayed, then re-lease the switch.SIC0611B

Zone mapInstruments and controls 2-9

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 76: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

3. The display returns to the normal com-pass mode within 10 seconds afterthe switch is released.

4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeatsteps 1 through 3. See map.

O If the compass deviates from the cor-rect indication soon after repeated ad-justment, have the compass checkedat an INFINITI dealer.

O The compass may not indicate the cor-rect compass point in tunnels or whiledriving up or down a steep hill.(The compass returns to the correctcompass point when the vehiclemoves to an area where the geomag-netism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

O Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect the op-eration of the compass.

O When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as it maycause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.

2-10 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 77: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWD mod-els) Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light

or Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)warning light Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission check warning light Low washer fluid warning light Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system indicatorlight (Orange) (if so equipped)

or Brake warning light Rear Active Steer (RAS) warning light (if soequipped) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

Charge warning light Seat belt warning light Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Cruise control set indicator light (if soequipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) indicatorlight (if so equipped) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system/PreviewFunction warning light (Orange) (if so equipped) Automatic transmission position indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator

light

Intelligent Key warning light Cruise control/Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system main switch indicator light (Green)

CHECKING BULBS

Apply the parking brake and push the igni-tion switch to the ON position withoutstarting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , , ,, , ,

The following lights come on briefly andthen go off (if so equipped):

, or , , , ,, , ,

If any light does not come on, it may indi-cate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit inthe electrical system. Have the systemchecked by an INFINITI dealer.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-11

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 78: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING LIGHTS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)warning light (AWD models)

The warning light comes on whenthe ignition switch is pushed to ON. Itturns off soon after the engine is started.

If the AWD system malfunctions, or thediameter of the front and the rear wheelsare different, the warning light will eitherremain illuminated or blink. See “All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” in the “5. Startingand driving” section.

CAUTION

O If the warning light comes on whiledriving there may be a malfunction inthe AWD system. Reduce the vehiclespeed and have your vehicle checkedby an INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible.

O If the AWD warning light blinks onwhen you are driving:

- blinks rapidly (about twice a second):Pull off the road in a safe area, and

idle the engine. The driving modewill change to 2WD to prevent theAWD system from malfunctioning. Ifthe warning light turns off, you candrive again.

- blinks slowly (about once every 2seconds):Pull off the road in a safe area, andidle the engine. Check that all tiresizes are the same, tire pressure iscorrect and tires are not worn.

O If the warning light is still on after theabove operations, have your vehiclechecked by an INFINITI dealer as soonas possible.

or Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS)warning light

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the anti-lockbrake system is not functioning properly.Have the system checked by an INFINITIdealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

anti-lock function will cease but the ordi-nary brakes will continue to operate nor-mally.

If the light comes on while you aredriving, contact an INFINITI dealer forrepair.

Automatic transmissioncheck warning light

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, the light comes on for 2 sec-onds. If the light comes on at any othertime, it may indicate the transmission isnot functioning properly. Have yourINFINITI dealer check and repair thetransmission.

or Brake warninglight

This light functions for both the parkingbrake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition, the light comes on when the park-ing brake is applied.

2-12 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 79: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion, the light warns of a low brake fluidlevel. If the light comes on while the en-gine is running with the parking brake notapplied, stop the vehicle and perform thefollowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brakefluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid” inthe “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, havethe warning system checked by anINFINITI dealer.

WARNING

O Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on.Driving could be dangerous. If you judgeit to be safe, drive carefully to thenearest service station for repairs. Other-wise, have your vehicle towed becausedriving it could be dangerous.

O Pressing the brake pedal with the enginestopped and/or low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

O If the brake fluid level is below the mini-mum or MIN mark on the brake fluid res-ervoir, do not drive until the brakesystem has been checked at an INFINITIdealer.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the chargingsystem is not functioning properly. Turnthe engine off and check the alternatorbelt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing orif the light remains on, see an INFINITIdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alternator beltis loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors

are not closed securely while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure.If the light flickers or comes on during nor-mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,stop the engine immediately and call anINFINITI dealer or other authorized repairshop.

The engine oil pressure warning light isnot designed to indicate a low oil level.Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pres-sure warning light on could cause seriousdamage to the engine almost immediately.Such damage is not covered by warranty.Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to doso.

Instruments and controls 2-13

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 80: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Intelligent Cruise Control(ICC) system/PreviewFunction warning light(Orange) (if so equipped)

This light comes on if there is a malfunc-tion in the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system or the Preview Function of thebrake system. (ICC system equippedmodel)

See “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system” in the “5. Starting and driving”section.

Intelligent Key warninglight

After the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, this light comes on for about2 seconds and then turns off.

This light warns of a malfunction with theelectrical steering lock system or the In-telligent Key system.

If the light comes on while the engine isstopped, it may be impossible to free thesteering lock or to start the engine. If thelight comes on while the engine is run-ning, you can drive the vehicle. Howeverin these cases, contact an INFINITIdealer for repair as soon as possible.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel in thetank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it isconvenient, preferably before the fuelgauge reaches “E” (Empty).

There will be a small reserve of fuel re-maining in the tank when the fuel gaugeneedle reaches “E” (Empty).

Low tire pressure warninglight

After the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, this light comes on for about1 second and turns off.

This light warns of low tire pressure and atire pressure warning system malfunction.

INFINITI’s low tire pressure warningsystem is a tire pressure monitoringsystem. It monitors tire pressure of alltires except the spare. When the tire pres-sure monitoring system warning light islit, one or more of your tires is signifi-cantly under-inflated. You should stopand check your tires as soon as possible,and inflate them to the proper pressureas indicated on the Tire and Loading In-formation label. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-ciency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle’s handling and stoppingability. Each tire, including the spare,should be checked monthly when coldand set to the recommended inflationpressure as specified in the vehicleplacard and owner’s manual.

The recommended inflation pressure mayalso be found on the Tire and Loading In-formation label.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure (lower than 27 psi, 190 kPa), thelight will illuminate and the chime willsound for about 10 seconds. If you selectthe tire pressure information in the dis-play, the LOW PRESSURE informationmessage will be displayed.

For additional information, see “Low tirepressure warning system” in the“5. Starting and driving” section and “Flattire” in the “6. In case of emergency”section. Also, you can check the pressureof all 4 tires on the monitor display. See“Vehicle information and settings” in the“4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems” section.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 81: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

O If the light does not come on with the ig-nition switch pushed to the ON position,have the vehicle checked by an INFINITIdealer as soon as possible.

O If the light comes on while driving, avoidsudden steering maneuvers or abruptbraking, reduce vehicle speed, pull offthe road to a safe location and stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Serious ve-hicle damage could occur and may leadto an accident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If the light still comeson while driving after adjusting the tirepressure, a tire may be flat. If you have aflat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible.

O If your vehicle is equipped with run-flat

tires, you can continue driving after youhave a flat tire. However, remember thatvehicle handling stability is reduced,which could lead to an accident and per-sonal injury. See “Wheels and tires” inthe “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section for more details and make sure toobserve the cautions about run-flat tires.Failure to do so may result in a seriousaccident.

O Immediately after a spare tire ismounted, a wheel is replaced or tire rota-tion is performed, tire pressure will notbe indicated on the display and the lowtire pressure warning system will notfunction. Reset the system by driving thevehicle at over 25 MPH (40 km/h) for ap-proximately 10 minutes. If tire pressureis not indicated after performing the re-setting procedure above, contact an IN-FINITI dealer as soon as possible.

O Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by INFINITI could affect theproper operation of the low tire pressurewarning system.

CAUTION

O The low tire pressure warning system isnot a substitute for the regular tire pres-sure check. Be sure to check the tirepressure regularly.

O If the vehicle is being driven at speeds ofless than 20 MPH (32 km/h), the low tirepressure warning system may not op-erate correctly.

O Be sure to correctly install tires whichmatch INFINITI’s specified size andspeed ratings. See “Wheel and tires” inthe “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

Low washer fluid warninglight

This light comes on when the washer tankfluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid asnecessary. See “Window washer fluid” inthe “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

Instruments and controls 2-15

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 82: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Rear Active Steer (RAS)warning light (if soequipped)

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that there is amalfunction with the Rear Active Steer(RAS) portion of the steering system. Havethe system checked by an INFINITIdealer.

For further information about the RAS sys-tem, see “Rear Active Steer (RAS) system”in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theRAS function will cease but driving can becontinued.

If the light comes on while you aredriving, contact an INFINITI dealer forrepair.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fastenthe driver’s seat belt. The light illuminateswhenever the ignition switch is pushed tothe ON position, and will remain illumi-nated until the driver’s seat belt is fas-tened. At the same time, the chime willsound for about 6 seconds unless the

driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illu-minate if the front passenger’s seat belt isnot fastened when the front passenger’sseat is occupied. For 5 seconds after theignition switch is pushed to the ON posi-tion, the system does not activate thewarning light for the front passenger.

If the light blinks or illuminates even ifthe driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelts are fastened, it may indicate thatthe pre-crash seat belt system (if soequipped) has a malfunction. Have anINFINITI dealer check and repair the sys-tem.

See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety —Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-straint system” section for precautions onseat belt usage.

Supplemental air bagwarning light

After pushing the ignition switch to theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light will illuminate. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the supplementalfront air bag and supplemental side airbag, curtain side-impact air bag systems

and/or pre-tensioner seat belt are opera-tional.

If any of the following conditions occur,the supplemental front air bag, supple-mental side air bag, supplemental curtainside-impact air bag and pre-tensionerseat belt needs servicing and your vehiclemust be taken to your nearest INFINITIdealer.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight remains on after approximately 7seconds.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight flashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supple-mental Restraint Systems and/or the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function prop-erly.

For additional information, see “Supple-mental restraint system” in the “1. Safety— Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-straint system” section.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 83: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light ison, it could mean that the supplemental frontair bag, supplemental side air bag, curtainside-impact air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt will not operate in an ac-cident. To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have your vehicle checked by a dealeras soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Adaptive Front lightingSystem (AFS) indicator light(if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, the Adaptive Front lightingSystem (AFS) indicator light will illuminate.The light will turn off in about 1 second ifthe AFS is operational.

This light also comes on when the AFS isturned off by pushing the AFS OFF switch.

If the AFS indicator light blinks, it may indi-cate the AFS is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by an INFINITIdealer.

See “Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)”later in this section.

Automatic transmissionposition indicator light

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, the indicator shows the auto-matic selector shift position. See “Drivingwith automatic transmission” in the “5.Starting and driving” section.

Cruise control/IntelligentCruise Control (ICC) systemMAIN switch indicator light(Green)

The light comes on when the cruise controlor the intelligent cruise control systemMAIN switch is pushed. The light goes outwhen the MAIN switch is pushed again.While the cruise control or the intelligentcruise control system MAIN switch indi-cator light is on, the cruise control systemis operational.

Cruise control set indicatorlight (if so equipped)

The light comes on while the vehicle speed

is controlled by the cruise control system.If the light blinks while the engine is run-ning, it may indicate the cruise control sys-tem is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked by an INFINITI dealer.

Front passenger air bagstatus light

The front passenger air bag status light( ) will be lit and the passenger frontair bag will be OFF depending on how thefront passenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light op-eration, see “INFINITI advanced air bagsystem” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system”section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This light comes on when the headlighthigh beam is on and goes out when the lowbeam is selected.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) system indicator light(Orange) (if so equipped)

The light will blink and a warning tone willsound if the vehicle is traveling close to ei-

Instruments and controls 2-17

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 84: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

ther the left or the right of the travelinglane with detectable lane markers.

The light also illuminates if there is a mal-function in the Lane Departure Warning(LDW) system.

See “Lane departure warning system” inthe “5. Starting and driving” section.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes onsteady or blinks while the engine is run-ning, it may indicate a potential emissioncontrol malfunction.

The malfunction indicator lamp may alsocome on steady if the fuel-filler cap is looseor missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel.Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is in-stalled and closed tightly, and that the ve-hicle has at least 3 US gallons (14 liters) offuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the lampshould turn off if no other potential emis-sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator lamp remains on for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 secondswhen the engine is not running, it indi-cates that the vehicle is not ready for an

emission control system inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness forinspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“9. Technical and consumer information”section of this manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator lamp will comeon in one of two ways:

O Malfunction indicator lamp on steady —An emission control system malfunc-tion has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle. The

lamp should turn off after a fewdriving trips. If the lamp does notturn off after a few driving trips, havethe vehicle inspected by an INFINITIdealer. You do not need to have your ve-hicle towed to the dealer.

O Malfunction indicator lamp blinking —An engine misfire has been detectedwhich may damage the emission con-trol system.

To reduce or avoid emission controlsystem damage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45MPH (72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or decelera-tion.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.d) If possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator lamp maystop blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected by anINFINITI dealer. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without havingthe emission control system checked and re-paired as necessary could lead to poor drive-ability, reduced fuel economy, and possibledamage to the emission control system.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDCsystem or the traction control system is op-erating, thus alerting the driver to the factthat the road surface is slippery and the ve-hicle is nearing its traction limits.

2-18 Instruments and controls

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 85: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The light flashes when the turn signalswitch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) off indicator light

The light comes on when the vehicle dy-namic control off switch is pushed to OFF.This indicates that the vehicle dynamiccontrol system and traction control systemare not operating. When the vehicle dy-namic control off indicator light and slip in-dicator light come on with the vehicle dy-namic control system turned on, this lightalerts the driver to the fact that the vehicledynamic control system’s fail-safe mode isoperating, for example the vehicle dynamiccontrol system may not be functioningproperly. Have the system checked by anINFINITI dealer. If an abnormality occursin the system, the vehicle dynamic controlsystem function will be canceled but thevehicle is still driveable. For additional in-formation, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver side door isopened while the ignition switch is pushedto the ACC position or pushed to the LOCKposition with the Intelligent Key left in theIntelligent Key port. Make sure the ignitionswitch is pushed to the LOCK position, andtake the Intelligent Key with you whenleaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

A chime will sound when the driver sidedoor is opened with the light switch in the

or position, and the ignitionswitch is pushed to the ACC or LOCK posi-tion.

Turn the light switch off when you leave thevehicle.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a brake pad requires re-placement, it will make a high pitched scrap-ing sound. Have the brakes checked as soonas possible if the warning sound is heard.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)chime (if so equipped)

If the vehicle is traveling close to either theleft or the right of a traveling lane with de-tectable lane markers, the LDW system willblink the LDW indicator light and sound achime.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 86: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The dot matrix liquid crystal display j1 islocated under the tachometer to displaythe automatic transmission position indi-cator, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system (if so equipped) information andthe Intelligent Key operation information.

For details about the automatic transmis-sion position indicator, see “Indicatorlights” earlier in this section. For detailsabout the ICC system, see “Intelligentcruise control system” in the “5. Startingand driving” section. For the details aboutthe Intelligent Key system, see “Intelli-gent Key system” in the “3. Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.

SIC2764

SIC2765

DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

2-20 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 87: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

INDICATORS FOR OPERATION

1. Engine start operation indicator(ignition switch in the LOCK orACC position)

This indicator appears when the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK or ACC position withthe selector lever in the “P” position.

This indicator means that the engine willstart by pushing the ignition switch withthe brake pedal depressed.

2. Engine start operation indicator(ignition switch in the ONposition)

This indicator appears when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position with the se-lector lever in the “P” position.

This indicator means that the engine willstart by pushing the ignition switch withthe brake pedal depressed.

3. Steering lock releasemalfunction indicator

This indicator appears when the steeringwheel cannot be released from the LOCKposition.

If this indicator appears, push the push-button ignition switch while lightlyturning the steering wheel right and left.

4. Intelligent Key insertionindicator

This indicator appears when the Intelli-gent Key needs to be inserted into the In-telligent Key port. (For example, the Intel-ligent Key battery is discharged.)

If this indicator appears, insert the Intel-ligent Key into the Intelligent Key port inthe correct direction. See “Push-button ig-nition switch” in the “5. Starting and driv-ing” section.

5. Intelligent Key removalindicator

This indicator appears when the driver’sdoor is opened with the ignition switch inthe LOCK position and the Intelligent Keyplaced in the Intelligent Key port. A keyreminder chime also sounds.

If this indicator appears, remove the In-telligent Key from the Intelligent Key portand take it with you when leaving the ve-hicle.

6. NO KEY warning

This warning appears when the door isclosed with the Intelligent Key left out-side the vehicle and the ignition switch inthe ACC or ON position.

If this warning appears, make sure theIntelligent Key is returned to the inside ofthe vehicle.

When all the doors are closed, an outsidechime and inside warning chime will alsosound. See “Intelligent Key system” inthe “3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section.

7. SHIFT “P” warning

This warning appears when the ignitionswitch is pushed to stop the engine withthe selector lever in any position exceptthe P position.

If this warning appears, the ignitionswitch is in the ACC position instead ofthe LOCK position. Move the selectorlever to the “P” position or push the igni-tion switch to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound.See “Intelligent Key system” in the“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”section.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 88: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

8. “LOCK” warning

This warning appears when the selectorlever is moved to the “P” position withthe ignition switch in the ACC position af-ter the SHIFT “P” warning appears.

To push the ignition switch to the LOCKposition, perform the following procedure:

SHIFT “P” warning → (Move the se-lector lever to “P”) → LOCK warning→ (Push the ignition switch → igni-tion switch position is turned to ON)→ LOCK warning → (Push the ignitionswitch → ignition switch position isturned to LOCK)

9. NO KEY ID indicator

This indicator appears when the ignitionswitch is pushed and the Intelligent Keycannot be recognized by the system withthe ignition switch in the LOCK position.

If this indicator appears, you cannot startthe engine. Check for the followingcauses and perform remedies:

O The battery of the Intelligent Key car-ried with you is discharged com-pletely. Replace the battery with a newone.

O The Intelligent Key carried with you isnot registered to the system. Use theregistered Intelligent Key.

O You do not have an Intelligent Keywith you. Carry an Intelligent Key withyou.

10. Intelligent Key batterydischarge indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelli-gent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the bat-tery with a new one. See “Intelligent Keybattery replacement” in the “8. Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section. Your vehicle has two types of security

systems, as follows:

O Vehicle security

O INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown bythe security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides vi-sual and audio alarm signals if someoneopens the doors, hood, or trunk lid whenthe system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that acti-

SIC2132

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-22 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 89: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

vates when a vehicle is moved or when a vi-bration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft butcannot prevent it, nor can it prevent thetheft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-nents in all situations. Always secure yourvehicle even if parking for a brief period.Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) in thevehicle, and always lock it when unat-tended. Be aware of your surroundings,and park in secure, well-lit areas wheneverpossible.

Many devices offering additional protec-tion, such as component locks, identifica-tion markers, and tracking systems, areavailable at auto supply stores and spe-cialty shops. Your INFINITI dealer mayalso offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eli-gible for discounts for various theft protec-tion features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the win-dows are open.

2. Push the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the ve-hicle.

4. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lockall doors. The doors can be locked withthe Intelligent Key, door handle re-

quest switch, power door lock switch ormechanical key.

5. Confirm that the security indicator lightjA comes on. The security indicatorlight glows for about 30 seconds andthen blinks. The system is now armed.If, during this 30 second time period,the door is unlocked, or the ignitionswitch is pushed to ACC or ON, thesystem will not be armed.

Even when the driver and/or passengersare in the vehicle, the system will activatewith all doors, hood, and trunk lid lockedwith the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion. When pushing the ignition switch tothe ACC or ON position, the system will bereleased.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give thefollowing alarm:

O The headlights blink and the hornsounds intermittently.

O The alarm automatically turns off afterapproximately 1 minute. However, thealarm reactivates if the vehicle is tam-pered with again.

SIC2766

Instruments and controls 2-23

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 90: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The alarm is activated by:

O Unlocking the door or opening the trunklid without using the button on the In-telligent Key, the door handle requestswitch or the mechanical key. (Even ifthe door is opened by releasing thedoor inside lock knob, the alarm will ac-tivate.)

O Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop by unlocking a door bypushing the unlock button on the IntelligentKey, the door handle request switch or usingthe mechanical key. The alarm will not stopif the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC orON position.

If the system does not operate as de-scribed above, have it checked by anINFINITI dealer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of the registered Intelligent Key.

Statement related to section 15 of FCCrules for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer

System (CONT ASSY - CARD SLOT)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATETHE EQUIPMENT. Security indicator light

This light jA blinks after the ignition switchwas pushed to the LOCK position. Thisfunction indicates the security systemsequipped on the vehicle are operational.

If the INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem is malfunctioning, this light will re-main on while the ignition switch is in theON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see an INFINITI dealerfor INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer

SIC2766

2-24 Instruments and controls

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 91: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

System service as soon as possible.Please bring all Intelligent Keys that youhave when visiting an INFINITI dealer forservice.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield and ob-scure your vision which may lead to an ac-cident. Warm windshield with the defrosterbefore you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

The following could damage the washersystem:

O Do not operate the washer continuouslyfor more than 30 seconds.

O Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

The windshield wiper and washer oper-ates when the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

Push the lever down to operate the wiperat the following speed:

j1 Intermittent — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knobtoward jA (Slower) or jB (Faster). Also,the intermittent operation speed variesin accordance with the vehicle speed.(For example, when the vehicle speedis high, the intermittent operationspeed will be faster.) You can switchthis function on and off manually. See

SIC2821

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-25

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 92: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

“How to use SETTING button” in the“4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems” section.

j2 Low — continuous low speed opera-tion

j3 High — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up j4 to have one sweepoperation of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you j5 to operatethe washer. Then the wiper will also oper-ate several times.

To defog/defrost the rear window glassand outside mirrors, start the engine andpush the switch jA on. The indicator lightjB will come on. Push the switch again toturn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approxi-mately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window defroster.

XENON HEADLIGHTS (if soequipped)

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

O When xenon headlights are on, theyproduce a high voltage. To prevent anelectric shock, never attempt to modifyor disassemble. Always have yourxenon headlights replaced at anINFINITI dealer.

O Xenon headlights provide considerablymore light than conventional head-lights. If they are not correctly aimed,they might temporarily blind an oncom-ing driver or the driver ahead of youand cause a serious accident. If head-lights are not aimed correctly, immedi-ately take your vehicle to an INFINITIdealer and have the headlights ad-justed correctly.

When the xenon headlight is initiallyturned on, its brightness or color varies

SIC2767

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRRORDEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

2-26 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 93: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

slightly. However, the color and bright-ness will soon stabilize.

O The life of xenon headlights will beshortened by frequent on-off opera-tion. It is generally desirable not toturn off the headlights for short inter-vals (for example, when the vehiclestops at a traffic signal). Even whenthe daytime running lights are active(Canada only), the xenon headlightsdo not turn on. This way the life of thexenon headlights is not reduced.

O If the xenon headlight bulb is close toburning out, the brightness will dras-tically decrease, the light will startblinking, or the color of the light willbecome reddish. If one or more of theabove signs appear, contact anINFINITI dealer.

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

j1 Turn the switch to the position:

The front park, side marker, tail, li-cense plate and instrument lights willcome on.

j2 Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all theother lights remain on.

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the head-lights to be set so they turn on and offautomatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is inthe AUTO position j1 .

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition.

3. The autolight system automaticallyturns the headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

SIC2411 SIC2412

Instruments and controls 2-27

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 94: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

switch to the OFF, , or position.

The autolight system can turn on theheadlights automatically when it is dark,turn off the headlights when it is light,and keep the headlights on for up to 180seconds after you push the ignitionswitch to LOCK and open any door thenclose all the doors.

If the ignition switch is pushed to theLOCK position and one of the doors isopened and this condition is continued,the headlights remain on for 5 minutes.

Automatic headlights off delay

You can adjust the period of the auto-matic headlights off delay from 0 seconds(OFF) to 180 seconds.

For automatic headlights off delay setting,see “Automatic headlights off delay” inthe “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phoneand voice recognition systems” section.

Be sure not to put anything on top of thephoto sensor jA located on the top of theinstrument panel. The photo sensor con-trols the autolight; if it is covered, thephoto sensor reacts as if it is dark andthe headlights will illuminate.

Headlight beam select

j1 To select the low beam, put the leverin the neutral position as shown.

j2 To select the high beam, push thelever forward while the switch is in the

position. Pull it back to selectthe low beam.

j3 Pulling the lever toward you will flashthe headlight high beam even whenthe headlight switch is in the OFF po-sition.

SAA0642A SIC2413

2-28 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 95: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Battery saver system

O When the headlight switch is in theor position while the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position, thelights will automatically turn off 5 min-utes after the ignition switch has beenpushed to the LOCK position.

O When the headlight switch remains inthe or position after thelights automatically turn off, the lightswill turn on when the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position.

CAUTION

O When you turn on the headlight switchagain after the lights automatically turnoff, the lights will not turn off automati-cally. Be sure to turn the light switch tothe OFF position when you leave the ve-hicle for extended periods of time, oth-erwise the battery will be discharged.

O Never leave the light switch on whenthe engine is not running for extendedperiods of time even if the headlightsturn off automatically.

Daytime running light system(Canada only)

The daytime running lights automaticallyilluminate at a reduced intensity when theengine is started with the parking brakereleased. The daytime running lights op-erate with the headlight switch in the OFFposition or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position forfull illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the daytime runninglights do not illuminate. The daytime run-ning lights illuminate once the parkingbrake is released. The daytime runninglights will remain on until the ignitionswitch is pushed to the LOCK position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could cause anaccident injuring yourself and others.

Adaptive Front lighting System(AFS) (if so equipped)

The Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)will automatically adjust the headlights(low beam) toward the turning direction toimprove the driver’s view. When the head-light switch is ON and the driver operatesthe steering wheel in a turn, the AFS sys-tem will be activated.

The AFS will operate:

O when the headlight switch is ON.

O when the selector lever is in any posi-tion other than P (Park) or R (Reverse).

O when the vehicle is driven at above 16MPH (25 km/h) for the driver’s sideheadlight. The AFS for the front pas-senger’s side headlight will operate atany vehicle speed.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 96: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

To turn the AFS off, push the OFF side ofthe AFS OFF switch. (The AFS OFF indi-cator light will illuminate.) Push the ONside of the switch to turn the system onagain.

AFS will also adjust the headlight to aproper axis automatically, depending onthe number of occupants in the vehicle,the load the vehicle is carrying and theroad conditions.

If the AFS OFF indicator light blinks afterthe ignition switch has been pushed tothe ON position, this may indicate thatthe AFS is not functioning properly. Have

the system checked by an INFINITIdealer.

When the engine is started, the head-lights will vibrate to check the systemcondition. This is not a malfunction.

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control oper-ates when the light switch is in the AUTO(when lighting), or positionwith the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

Turn the control to the darkening direc-tion jA or the brightening direction jB toadjust the brightness of instrument panellights.

When the control is turned to the upperend, the light intensity will be atmaximum. When the control is turned to

SIC2645 SIC2566

2-30 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 97: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

the lower end, the light will be turned off.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

j1 Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automati-cally.

j2 Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the leverup or down to the point where lightsbegin flashing.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the head-light switch to the position, thenturn the switch to the position. Toturn them off, turn the switch to the OFFposition.

The headlights must be on for the foglights to operate.

SIC2231 SIC2465

Instruments and controls 2-31

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 98: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Push the switch on to warn other driverswhen you must stop or park under emer-gency conditions. All turn signal lights willflash.

WARNING

O If stopping for an emergency, be sureto move the vehicle well off the road.

O Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

O Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the igni-tion switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

To sound the horn, push the center padarea of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of the supple-mental front air bag system. Tamperingwith the supplemental front air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.

SIC2574 SIC2769

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH HORN

2-32 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 99: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

O The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

O Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

O Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket,cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, theseat may become overheated.

O Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or simi-lar object. This may result in damage tothe heater.

O Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

O When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, thinner, or any similarmaterials.

O If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby an INFINITI dealer.

The rear outboard seats are warmed bybuilt-in heaters. The switches, located onthe inside of the rear center armrest, canbe operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

j1 For high heat, push the HI (High)side of the switch.

j2 For low heat, push the LO (Low)side of the switch.

The indicator light in the switch j3 will

SIC2770

HEATED SEATS (Rear seats) (if soequipped)

Instruments and controls 2-33

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 100: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

illuminate when low or high is se-lected.

3. To turn off the heater, return theswitch to the level position. Make surethe indicator light goes off.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-stat, automatically turning the heateron and off. The indicator light will re-main on as long as the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,or before you leave the vehicle, besure to turn off the switch.

The climate controlled seat warms up orcools down the front seats by blowingwarm or cool air from the surface of theseat. The switches located on the centerconsole can be operated independently ofeach other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob jA to the H(Heat) side j1 or to the C (Cool) sidej2 . The indicator light jB on the con-trol knob will illuminate.

3. Adjust the desired amount of the airusing the control knob jA .

The climate controlled seat blower re-mains on low speed for approximately60 seconds after turning the switch onor selecting the desired temperature.

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmedor cooled, and/or before you leave thevehicle, be sure to turn the controlknob to the OFF position (center). Theindicator light jB on the control knobgoes off at the OFF position.To check the air filter for the climatecontrolled seat, contact an INFINITIdealer.

CAUTION

O The battery could run down if the cli-mate controlled seat is operated whilethe engine is not running.

O Do not use the climate controlled seatfor extended periods or when no one isusing the seat.

O Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket,cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, theseat may become overheated.

SIC2771

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (Frontseats) (if so equipped)

2-34 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 101: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or simi-lar object. This may result in damage tothe climate controlled seat.

O Any liquid spilled on the seat should beremoved immediately with a dry cloth.

O The climate controlled seat has an airfilter. Do not operate climate controlledseat without an air filter. This may re-sult in damage to the system.

O When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, thinner, or any similar materi-als.

O If any malfunctions are found or the cli-mate controlled seat does not operate,turn the switch off and have the systemchecked by an INFINITI dealer.

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW)system will blink an indicator light on theinstrument panel and sound a chime toalert the driver if the vehicle is travelingclose to either the left or the right of atraveling lane with detectable lanemarkers.

The system comes on automatically in itsautomatic mode when the ignition switchis pushed to the ON position. The LDWsystem ON indicator j2 will illuminate.

To cancel the LDW system, push the LDWswitch j1 to turn off the system. The LDWsystem ON indicator j2 will go off.

Push the LDW switch again or restart theengine to turn the system on. Modes canbe changed to automatic mode or manualmode by pushing and holding the LDWswitch for more than 4 seconds while theLDW system ON indicator is off. See “Lanedeparture warning (LDW) system” in the“5. Starting and driving” section.

SIC2554

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-35

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 102: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

For driving or starting the vehicle on snowyroads or slippery areas, turn on the SNOWmode switch and the indicator light on theswitch will illuminate. When the SNOWmode is activated, engine output is con-trolled to avoid wheel spin.

The vehicle should be driven with the Ve-hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on formost driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, theVDC system reduces the engine output toreduce wheel spin. The engine speed willbe reduced even if the accelerator is de-pressed to the floor. If maximum enginepower is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDCOFF switch. The indicator will illumi-nate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine to turn on the system. See “Ve-hicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the“5. Starting and driving” section.

SSD0351 SIC1881

SNOW MODE SWITCH (if so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFFSWITCH

2-36 Instruments and controls

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 103: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

If the power supply is disconnected, theclock will not indicate the correct time.Readjust the time.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

1. To set the clock forward, push thebutton j1 .

2. To set the clock backward, push thebutton j2 .

3. To move forward or backward faster,push and hold the button more than 5seconds.

For details about display clock adjustment

(if so equipped), see “How to use SET-TING button” in the “4. Monitor, climate,audio, phone and voice recognition sys-tems” section.

Power outlet is located on the back of thecenter console (Model with DVD drive) orin the center console (Model without DVDdrive).

CAUTION

O The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

O Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) powerdraw. Do not use double adapters ormore than one electrical accessory.

SIC2772 SIC2773Model with DVD drive

CLOCK POWER OUTLET

Instruments and controls 2-37

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 104: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Use power outlet with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

O Avoid using power outlet when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

O This power outlet is not designed foruse with a cigarette lighter unit.

O Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may blow.

O Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

O When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

FRONT

WARNING

The cigarette lighter should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

To open the ashtray lid, push the liddown and release it jA .

The cigarette lighter operates when theignition switch is in the ON position.

SIC2774Model without DVD drive

SIC2775

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAYS

2-38 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 105: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Push the lighter in all the way jB , then re-lease it. When the lighter is heated, it willspring out. Return the lighter to itsoriginal position after use.

To empty the ashtray, pinch the ashtraycase and pull it up slowly jC .

CAUTION

O The cigarette lighter socket is a powersource for the cigarette lighter elementonly. The use of the cigarette lightersocket as a power source for any otheraccessory is not recommended.

O Do not use any other power outlet foran accessory lighter.

REAR

To open the ashtray lid, pull up the lid jA

as illustrated.

To empty the ashtray, pinch the ashtraycase and pull it up slowly jB .

CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

CAUTION

O Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

O Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in an acci-dent.

SIC2776

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-39

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 106: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Front:

To open the cup holder lid, push the liddown and release it jA .

The front cup holder inner case can be re-moved as illustrated jB to hold biggerbottles or for cleaning.

Rear:

Push the button jA as illustrated (Type A)or open the lid of the rear center armrest(Type B) to use the cup holder.

SIC2777Front

SIC2778Rear — Type A

SIC2875Rear — Type B

2-40 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 107: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

WARNING

O The sunglasses holder should not beused while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

O Keep the sunglasses holder closedwhile driving to prevent an accident.

The sunglasses holder can be opened bypushing the button jA .

CAUTION

O Do not use for anything other thanglasses.

O Do not leave glasses in the sunglassesholder while parking in direct sunlight.The heat may damage the glasses.

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or a sud-den stop.

To open the glove box, push the glovebox lid release button jA .

To close, push the lid in until the locklatches.

SIC2779 SIC2780

Instruments and controls 2-41

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 108: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

To lock jB /unlock jC the glove box, usethe mechanical key or wallet key. For themechanical key usage, see “Keys (Intelli-gent Key)” in the “3. Pre-driving checksand adjustments” section.

CONSOLE BOX

WARNING

The center console box should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

To open the console box lid, pull the leverjA (Model with DVD drive), jB or jC

(Model without DVD drive).

SIC2781Model with DVD drive

2-42 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 109: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When the lever jB (driver’s seat side) ispulled, the upper case is available forstoring some small items. When the leverjC (front passenger’s seat side) is pulled,the bottom case is available for storingsome larger ones.

CARGO NET (if so equipped)

The cargo net helps keep packages in thecargo area from moving around while yourvehicle is driven.

To install the cargo net, attach the hooksto the retainers jA .

CAUTION

Avoid keeping heavy objects in the net.

SIC2782Model without DVD drive

SIC2784

Instruments and controls 2-43

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 110: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

O Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehiclewhile it is in motion and before closingthe windows. Use the window lockswitch to prevent unexpected use ofthe power windows.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in the window. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

The power windows operate when the ig-nition switch is in the ON position orwhile the power window switches illumi-nate (for about 45 seconds) after the igni-tion switch is pushed to the LOCK posi-tion. If the driver’s or front passenger’sdoor is opened during this period ofabout 45 seconds, power to the windowsis cancelled.

Main power window switch(driver’s side)

1. Driver side window2. Front passenger side window3. Rear left passenger side window4. Rear right passenger side window5. Window lock button

To open or close the window, push downjA or pull up jB the switch and hold it.The main switch (driver side switches) willopen or close all the windows.

Locking passenger’s windows

When the lock button jC is pushed in,only the driver side window can beopened or closed. Push it in again to can-cel.

SIC2576

WINDOWS

2-44 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 111: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Passenger side power windowswitch

The passenger side switch will open orclose only the corresponding window. Toopen or close the window, push down orpull up the switch and hold it.

Automatic operation (for all doorwindows)

To fully open or close the window, com-pletely push down or pull up the switchand release it; it need not be held. Thewindow will automatically open or closeall the way. To stop the window, just pushor lift the switch in the opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch willcause the window to open or close untilthe switch is released.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position which can-not be detected. Make sure that all passen-gers have their hands, etc., inside the ve-hicle before closing the window.

If the control unit detects somethingcaught in the window as it is closing, thewindow will be immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be acti-vated when the window is closed by auto-matic operation when the ignition switchis in the ON position or for 45 seconds af-ter the ignition switch is pushed to theLOCK position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similarto something being caught in the windowoccurs.

SIC1892E SIC2578

Instruments and controls 2-45

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 112: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

If the windows do not closeautomatically

If the power window automatic function(closing only) does not operate properly,perform the following procedure to initial-ize the power window system.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition.

2. Open the window more than halfwayby operating the power windowswitch.

3. Pull the power window switch andhold it to close the window, and thenhold the switch more than 3 secondsafter the window is closed completely.

4. Release the power window switch. Op-erate the window by the automaticfunction to confirm the initialization iscomplete.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above forother windows.

If the power window automatic functiondoes not operate properly after per-forming the procedure above, have yourvehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

O In an accident you could be thrownfrom the vehicle through an open sun-roof. Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

O Do not allow anyone to stand up or ex-tend any portion of their body out ofthe sunroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the sunroof isclosing.

CAUTION

O Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the sunroof before opening.

O Do not place any heavy object on thesunroof or surrounding area.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof operates when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position, or for about45 seconds after the ignition switch ispushed to the LOCK position.

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automaticallywhen the sunroof is opened. However, itmust be closed manually.

Tilting the sunroof

Tilting up the sunroof is available when itis in the closed position. To tilt up, pushthe OPEN side jA of the sunroof switchfor less than 1 second. To tilt the sunroofdown, push the CLOSE side jB of the sun-roof switch.

SIC2785

SUNROOF

2-46 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 113: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Sliding the sunroof

Full open/close:

To fully open the sunroof from the tilting upposition, push the OPEN side jA of the sun-roof switch.

To fully open the sunroof from the closedposition, push and hold the OPEN side ofthe sunroof switch until the sunroof comesto a tilt-down motion after tilting up.

To fully close the sunroof, push the CLOSEside jB of the sunroof switch.

Half open/close:

To open or close the sunroof halfway, pushthe OPEN jA or CLOSE jB side of the sun-roof switch again while the sunroof is in theopening or closing motion.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediatelybefore the closed position which cannot bedetected. Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc., inside the vehicle beforeclosing the sunroof.

If the control unit detects somethingcaught in the sunroof when it is closing,the sunroof will be immediately opened.

The auto reverse function can be activatedwhen the sunroof is closed by automaticoperation when the ignition switch is in theON position or for about 45 seconds afterthe ignition switch is pushed to the LOCKposition.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the sunroof oc-curs.

If the sunroof does not operate

If the sunroof does not operate properly,perform the following procedure to ini-tialize the sunroof operation system.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

2. Close the sunroof completely bypushing the CLOSE side jB of the sun-roof switch. If the sunroof stopsmoving, push the switch again.

3. Push the CLOSE side jB of the sunroofswitch and hold it for more than 1

second after the sunroof is completelyclosed.

4. Release the sunroof switch. Push theOPEN side jA of the sunroof switch toconfirm the initialization is complete.

If the sunroof does not operate properly af-ter performing the procedure above, haveyour vehicle checked by an INFINITIdealer.

Instruments and controls 2-47

Z 04.12.21/Y50-D X

Page 114: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The rear control cancel switch is locatedon the center console.

Pushing the rear control cancel switch tothe cancel side will deactivate the follow-ing switches in the rear center armrest.

O Automatic climate control

O Audio

CAUTION

O To avoid personal injury, keep yourhands, fingers and head away from thesunshade arm, arm rail and screen inletport.

O Do not allow children near the rear sun-shade system. They could be injured.

O Do not place objects on or near the rearsunshade. This could cause improperoperation or damage it.

O Do not pull or push the rear sunshade.This could cause improper operation ordamage it.

The rear sunshade operates when the ig-nition switch is in the ON position.

The rear sunshade switches are locatedon the center console and inside the reararmrest.

To raise the screen, push the UP side ofthe switch j1 .

To lower the screen, push the DOWN sideof the switch j2 . The switch need not beheld.

SIC2786 SIC2787

REAR CONTROL CANCEL SWITCH (if soequipped)

REAR SUNSHADE (if so equipped)

2-48 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 115: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

O Do not place objects (such as newspa-pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screeninlet port. Doing so may entangle theseobjects in the screen when it is extend-ing or retracting, causing improper op-eration or damage to the screen.

O Do not push the sunshade arm withyour hands, etc., as this may deform it.Improper operation or damage to thescreen may result.

O Do not put any object into the screeninlet port as this may result in improperoperation or damage the screen.

O Do not hang any object on the arm railas this may result in improper opera-tion or damage the screen.

O Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doingso may elongate the screen. Improperoperation or damage to the screen mayresult.

MAP LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn thelight on or off.

REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn thelight on or off.

SIC2788 SIC2789

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-49

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 116: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

The interior light control switch has twopositions: DOOR and OFF.

DOOR position

While the switch is in the DOOR positionj1 , the map lights and rear personallights will illuminate under the followingconditions:

O doors are unlocked by pushing theUNLOCK button on the Intelligent Keyor door handle request switch with the

ignition switch in the LOCK position.

—remain on for about 15 seconds.

O any door is opened with the ignitionswitch in the LOCK position

—remain on for about 15 secondsafter driver’s door is closed.

O any door is opened with the ignitionswitch in the ACC or ON position

—remain on while the door is opened.When the door is closed, the lightsgo off.

The lights will also turn off after 30 min-utes when the lights remain illuminatedto prevent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

The interior light control switch can be setto remain inactive. See “Vehicle informa-tion and settings” in the “4. Monitor, cli-mate, audio, phone and voice recognitionsystems” section.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF positionj2 , the lights will not illuminate, regard-less of the condition.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

SIC2790

2-50 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 117: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The light on the vanity mirror will turn onwhen the cover on the vanity mirror jA isopened.

When the cover is closed, the light willturn off.

The lights will also turn off after 30 min-utes when the lights remain illuminatedto prevent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid isopened. When the trunk lid is closed, thelight will turn off.

The light will also turn off after 30 min-utes when the light remains illuminatedto prevent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver providesa convenient way to consolidate the func-tions of up to three individual hand-heldtransmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver:

O Will operate most Radio Frequency(RF) devices such as garage doors,gates, home and office lighting, entrydoor locks and security systems.

O Is powered by your vehicle’s battery.No separate batteries are required. Ifthe vehicle’s battery is discharged oris disconnected, HomeLink will retainall programming.

Once HomeLink Universal Transceiver isprogrammed, retain the original transmit-ter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLink Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes.For additional information, refer to “Pro-gramming HomeLink ” later in this sec-tion.

SIC2555

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS TRUNK LIGHT HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (ifso equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-51

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 118: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

O Do not use HomeLink Universal Trans-ceiver with any garage door opener thatlacks safety stop and reverse featuresas required by federal safety standards.(These standards became effective foropener models manufactured after April1, 1982). A garage door opener whichcannot detect an object in the path of aclosing garage door and then automati-cally stop and reverse, does not meetcurrent federal safety standards. Usinga garage door opener without thesefeatures increases the risk of seriousinjury or death.

O During programming procedure, yourgarage door or security gate may openor close. Make sure that people and ob-jects are clear of the garage door, gate,etc. that you are programming.

O Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming HomeLink Uni-versal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

To program your HomeLink Transceiverto operate a garage door, gate, or entrydoor opener, home or office lighting, youneed to be at the same location as thedevice. Note: Garage door openers (manu-factured after 1996) have “rolling codeprotection”. To program a garage dooropener equipped with “rolling code pro-tection”; you will need to use a ladder toget up to the garage door opener motor tobe able to access the “smart or learn”program button.

1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outerHomeLink buttons (to clear thememory) until the indicator light jA

blinks (after 20 seconds). Releaseboth buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-heldtransmitter 1-3 inches away from theHomeLink surface.

SIC2071C

2-52 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 119: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

3. Using both hands, simultaneouslypush and hold both the HomeLinkbutton you want to program and thehand-held transmitter button.DO NOT release the buttons until step4 has been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indi-cator light on HomeLink flashes,changing from a “slow blink” to a“rapid blink”. This could take up to 90seconds. When the indicator lightblinks rapidly, both buttons may bereleased. The rapidly flashing light in-dicates successful programming. Toactivate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, push and hold theprogrammed HomeLink button - re-leasing when the device begins to ac-tivate.

5. If the indicator light on HomeLinkblinks rapidly for two seconds andthen turns solid, HomeLink haspicked up a “rolling code” garagedoor opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to trainHomeLink , completing the program-ming may require a ladder and an-other person for convenience.

6. Push and release the program buttonlocated on the garage door opener’smotor to activate the “training mode”.This button is usually located near theantenna wire that hangs down fromthe motor. If the wire originates fromunder a light lens, you will need to re-move the lens to access the trainingbutton.

NOTE:

Once you have pushed and released thetraining button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit,you have 30 seconds in which to performstep 7. For convenience, use the help of a

second person to assist when performingthis step.

7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushingand releasing the garage door openertraining button) and firmly push andrelease the HomeLink button you’vejust programmed. Push and releasethe HomeLink button up to threetimes to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink button should now beprogrammed. To program the re-maining HomeLink buttons for addi-tional door or gate openers, followsteps 2 through 8 only.

NOTE:

Do not repeat step one unless you wantto “clear” all previously programmedHomeLink buttons).

If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLinkbuttons, please refer to the HomeLinkweb site at: www.homelink.com or call1-800-355-3515.

SIC2072

Instruments and controls 2-53

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 120: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations requiredhand-held transmitters to stop transmit-ting after 2 seconds. To program yourhand-held transmitter to HomeLink , con-tinue to push and hold the HomeLinkbutton (note steps 2 through 4 under“Programming HomeLink ”) while youpush and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until theindicator light flashes rapidly (indicatingsuccessful programming).

NOTE:

If programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the deviceduring the “cycling” process to preventpossible damage to the garage dooropener components.

OPERATING HomeLinkUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

HomeLink Universal Transceiver (onceprogrammed) may now be used to acti-vate the garage door, etc. To operate,simply push the appropriate programmedHomeLink Universal Transceiver button.The red indicator light will illuminate

while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS

If HomeLink does not quickly learn thehand-held transmitter information:

O replace the hand-held transmitter bat-teries with new batteries.

O position the hand-held transmitterwith its battery area facing away fromthe HomeLink surface.

O push and hold both the HomeLinkand hand-held transmitter buttonswithout interruption.

O position the hand-held transmitter 2to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away fromthe HomeLink surface. Hold thetransmitter in that position for up to15 seconds. If HomeLink is not pro-grammed within that time, try holdingthe transmitter in another position -keeping the indicator light in view atall times.

If you continue to have programming dif-ficulties, please contact the INFINITI Con-sumer Affairs Department. The phonenumbers are located in the Foreword ofthis Owner’s Manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared,however to clear all programming, pushand hold the two outside buttons and re-lease when the indicator light begins toflash (in approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink UniversalTransceiver button, complete the fol-lowing.

1. Push and hold the desired HomeLinkbutton. Do not release the button untilstep 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins toflash slowly (after 20 seconds), posi-tion the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5inches (50 to 127 mm) away from theHomeLink surface.

3. Push and hold the hand-held trans-mitter button.

4. The HomeLink indicator light willflash, first slowly and then rapidly.When the indicator light begins toflash rapidly, release both buttons.

2-54 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 121: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver but-ton has now been reprogrammed. Thenew device can be activated by pushingthe HomeLink button that was just pro-grammed. This procedure will not affectany other programmed HomeLink but-tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you shouldchange the codes of any non-rolling codedevice that has been programmed intoHomeLink . Consult the Owner’s Manualof each device or call the manufacturer ordealer of those devices for additional in-formation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink Uni-versal Transceiver with your new trans-mitter information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) Thisdevice must accept any interference thatmay be received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s au-thority to operate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

Instruments and controls 2-55

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 122: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

MEMO

2-56 Instruments and controls

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 123: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys (Intelligent Key) ....................................... 3-2Removing the mechanical key .................... 3-4How to use the mechanical key ................. 3-4Valet hand-off ............................................ 3-4

Doors ............................................................... 3-5Locking with metal key ............................... 3-5Opening and closing windows with themetal key.................................................... 3-6Locking with inside lock knob..................... 3-6Locking with power door lock switch .......... 3-7Child safety rear door lock.......................... 3-7

Intelligent Key system...................................... 3-8Intelligent Key operating range .................. 3-8Door locks/unlocks precaution ................... 3-9Intelligent Key operation........................... 3-10Warning signals ........................................ 3-11Troubleshooting guide .............................. 3-13

Remote keyless entry system ......................... 3-14How to use remote keyless entrysystem ...................................................... 3-16

Hood .............................................................. 3-18Trunk lid......................................................... 3-18

Trunk lid release switch ............................ 3-19Opening with metal key ............................ 3-19Trunk release power cancel switch............ 3-19Interior trunk lid release........................... 3-20

Fuel-filler door................................................ 3-21Opening the fuel-filler door....................... 3-21Fuel filler cap ............................................ 3-21

Tilting telescopic steering column .................. 3-22Tilt or telescopic operation........................ 3-23

Sun visors ...................................................... 3-23Mirrors .......................................................... 3-24

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ............. 3-24Outside mirrors......................................... 3-25

Automatic drive positioner.............................. 3-26Entry/exit function .................................... 3-26Memory storage ........................................ 3-27System operation...................................... 3-28

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 124: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The Intelligent Key uses coded radio sig-nals to communicate with the vehicle.When the Intelligent Key is near the ve-hicle, such as in your pocket or bag, it al-lows the vehicle to be locked, unlocked,or started. It is also possible to use theremote control entry function.

CAUTION

O Be sure to carry the Intelligent Keywith you.

O Do not leave the vehicle with the Intel-ligent Key inside.

O The Intelligent Key may not functioncorrectly depending on the environ-ment or operating conditions. It couldalso malfunction if you do not use itcorrectly.

O The Intelligent Key transmits faint ra-dio waves.

In the following situations, the Intel-ligent Key and remote control entryfunctions may not operate correctly,and you may have to use the metalkey (mechanical key or wallet key):

— when there are strong signalscoming from a television tower,power station or broadcasting sta-tion.

— when you have wireless equipmentor a cellular phone with you.

— when the Intelligent Key is in con-tact with or covered by a metallicmaterial.

— when radio wave-type remote con-trol entry is used nearby.

— when the Intelligent Key is placednear an electric appliance such asa personal computer.

O The Intelligent Key continually con-sumes battery power as the key re-ceives a signal to communicate withthe vehicle. Battery life is about 2years, although it varies dependingon the operating conditions.

O If the Intelligent Key receives strongsignal over an extended period oftime, the battery could quickly rundown. Do not place the IntelligentKey near an electric appliance such asa television set or personal computer.

O When the Intelligent Key battery is al-most discharged, insert the Intelli-gent Key into the Intelligent Key portand start the engine. Replace the dis-charged battery with a new one assoon as possible. For more details,see “Push- button ignition switch” inthe “5. Starting and driving” section.

O Because the steering wheel is lockedelectrically, unlocking the steeringwheel with the ignition switch in theLOCK position is impossible when thevehicle battery is completely dis-charged. Unlocking the steeringwheel is also impossible if the Intelli-gent Key is inserted into the Intelli-gent Key port. Pay special attentionthat the vehicle battery is not com-pletely discharged.

O If the vehicle battery is completelydischarged, make sure to rechargethe battery immediately.

KEYS (INTELLIGENT KEY)

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 125: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Intelligent Key 2 sets2. Mechanical key (metal key) 2 sets3. Wallet key and key case (card type)

(metal key) 1 set4. Key number plate 1 set

WARNING

O The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves that can adversely affect medicalelectric equipment.

O If you have a pacemaker, you shouldcontact the medical equipment manu-facturer to ask if it will be affected bythe Intelligent Key signal.

Record the key number on the keynumber plate/metal tag and keep it in asafe place (such as your wallet), NOT INTHE VEHICLE. A key number plate is sup-plied with your key. Keep the plate in asafe place. INFINITI does not record keynumbers so it is very important to keeptrack of your key number plate.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can beused with one vehicle. For informationconcerning the purchase and use of addi-tional Intelligent Keys, contact anINFINITI dealer.

It is possible that the Intelligent Keyfunctions become cancelled. Contact anINFINITI dealer.

CAUTION

O Be sure to carry the Intelligent Keywith you when driving. The IntelligentKey is a precision device with a built-intransmitter. To avoid damaging it,please note the following.

— The Intelligent Key is water resis-tant; however, wetting may damagethe Intelligent Key. If the Intelli-gent Key gets wet, immediately wipeuntil it is completely dry.

— Do not bend, drop or strike itagainst another object.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key foran extended period in a place wheretemperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

— Do not change or modify the Intelli-gent Key.

— Do not use a magnet key holder.

— Do not place the Intelligent Keynear an electric appliance such as atelevision set or personal computer.

SPA1998

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 126: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

— Do not allow the Intelligent Key tocome into contact with water or saltwater, and do not wash it in a wash-ing machine. This could affect thesystem function.

O If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,INFINITI recommends erasing the IDcode of that Intelligent Key. This willprevent the Intelligent Key from unau-thorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing pro-cedure, please contact an INFINITIdealer.

REMOVING THE MECHANICAL KEY

O Release the lock knob at the back ofthe Intelligent Key and remove themechanical key as illustrated.

O Reinsert the mechanical key into theIntelligent Key by pressing it firmlyback into place. Make sure the lockknob has properly latched, and themechanical key cannot move.

HOW TO USE THE MECHANICALKEY

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock

the doors, trunk lid, glove box and trunkpass-through lid.

See “Doors” and “Trunk lid” later in thissection, “Storage” in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section and “Seats” in the“1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section.

VALET HAND-OFF

When you have to leave a key with avalet, give them the Intelligent Key itselfand keep the mechanical key with you toprotect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box and the trunkfrom being opened during valet hand-off,follow the procedures below.

1. Push the trunk release power cancelswitch to the CANCEL side.

2. Remove the mechanical key from theIntelligent Key.

3. Lock the glove box and the trunk pass-through with the mechanical key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet,keeping the mechanical key in yourpocket or bag for insertion into the In-telligent Key when you retrieve yourvehicle.

SPA2033

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 127: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

See “Trunk lid” later in this section,“Storage” in the “2. Instruments and con-trols” section and “Seats” in the “1.Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section.

WARNING

O Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seatbelts, this provides greater safety inthe event of an accident by helping toprevent persons from being thrownfrom the vehicle. This also helps keepchildren and others from unintention-ally opening the doors, and will helpkeep out intruders.

O Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

LOCKING WITH METAL KEY

The power door lock system allows you tolock or unlock all doors simultaneouslyusing the metal (mechanical or wallet)key.

O Turning the driver’s door key cylinderto the front of the vehicle j1 will lockall doors.

O Turning the driver’s door key cylinderonce to the rear of the vehicle j2 willunlock the driver’s door. After re-turning the key to the neutral positionj3 , turning it to the rear again within

SPA1999

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 128: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

5 seconds will unlock all doors.

O You can switch the lock system to themode that allows you to open all thedoors when the key is turned once. See“How to use SETTING button” in the “4.Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems” section.

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWSWITH THE METAL KEY

The driver’s door key operation also allowsyou to open and close all door windows.

To open the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey cylinder to the rear of the vehicle forlonger than 1 second. The door is unlockedand the window keeps opening whileturning the key.

This function can also be performed bypushing and holding the door UNLOCK but-ton of the Intelligent Key. Refer to “Intelli-gent remote keyless entry system” later inthis section.

To close the windows, turn the driver’sdoor key cylinder to the front of the vehiclefor longer than 1 second. The door islocked and the window keeps closing whileturning the key.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door individually, move the in-side lock knob to the lock position j1 thenclose the door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to theunlock position j2 .

When locking the door without an Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the Intelli-gent Key inside the vehicle.

SPA2000

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.12.21/Y50-D X

Page 129: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHOperating the power door lock switch willlock or unlock all the doors. The switchesare located on the driver’s and front pas-senger’s door armrests.

To lock the doors, push the power doorlock switch to the lock position j1 withthe driver’s or front passenger’s dooropen, then close the door.

When locking the door this way, be cer-tain not to leave the Intelligent Key in-side the vehicle.

To unlock, push the power door lockswitch to the unlock position j2 .

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driveror front passenger) is moved to the lockposition with the Intelligent Key in theport and any door open, all doors willlock and unlock automatically. With theIntelligent Key left in the vehicle (not inthe Intelligent Key port) and any dooropen, all doors will unlock automaticallyand a chime will sound after the door isclosed.

These functions help to prevent the Intel-ligent Key from being accidentally lockedinside the vehicle.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

The child safety rear door lock helps pre-vent doors from being opened acciden-tally, especially when small children arein the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock positionj1 , the rear doors can be opened onlyfrom the outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the un-lock position j2 .

SPA2001 SPA2002

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 130: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATINGRANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can be usedonly when you carry the key with you andoperate it as specified within the inside oroutside operating ranges described as fol-lows.

When the Intelligent Key battery runsdown or where there are strong radiowaves or noise, the operating range maybe narrower or the key may be inopera-tive.

Operating range of the door ortrunk lock/unlock function

The outside sensors are located in thefront outside door handles and the trunk.

The operating ranges of the door or trunk

lock/unlock functions are shown in the il-lustration.

Front door:

j1 31.5 in (80 cm) from the door handlerequest switch

Trunk:

j2 31.5 in (80 cm) from the trunk openrequest switch

O If you are too close to the outsidedoor handles or rear bumper, the In-telligent Key may not operate.

O If the Intelligent Key is in the oper-ating range, it is possible for anyonewho does not carry the Intelligent Keyto lock/unlock the doors by pushingthe door handle request switch.

SPA2008

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 131: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Operating range for engine startfunction

The operating range for starting the en-gine inside the vehicle is shown in the il-lustration.

O If the Intelligent Key is on the instru-ment panel, rear parcel shelf, insidethe glove box or door pocket, or thecorner of interior compartment, it maynot be possible to start the engine.

O If the Intelligent Key is near the dooror door glass outside the vehicle, itmay be possible to start the engine.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

O Do not push the door handle requestswitch with the Intelligent Key held inyour hand as illustrated. The close dis-tance to the door handle will causethe Intelligent Key system to have dif-ficulty recognizing that the IntelligentKey is outside the vehicle.

O After locking with the door handle re-quest switch, verify the doors are se-curely locked by testing them.

O To prevent the Intelligent Key from

being left inside the vehicle, makesure you carry the key with you andthen lock the doors.

O To prevent the Intelligent Key frombeing left inside the trunk, make sureyou carry the key with you and thenclose the trunk.

O Do not pull the door handle beforepushing the door handle requestswitch. The door will be unlocked butwill not open. Release the door handleonce and pull it again to open thedoor.

O The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing doors with the door handle re-quest switch) can be set to remain in-active. See “Vehicle information andsettings” in the “4. Monitor, climate,audio, phone and voice recognitionsystems” section.

SPA2009 SPA2003

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 132: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors withouttaking the key out from your pocket orbag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key withyou, you can lock or unlock all doors bypushing the door handle request switchjA within the range of operation.

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Move the selector lever to the “P” po-sition, push the ignition switch to theLOCK position and make sure youcarry the Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push any door handle request switchwhile carrying the Intelligent Key withyou.*3

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door willlock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice andthe outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will lock with the IntelligentKey while the ignition switch is in theACC or ON position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelli-gent Key while any door is open.

*3: Doors will not lock by pushing thedoor handle request switch with theIntelligent Key inside the vehicle.However, when an Intelligent Key isinside the vehicle, doors can belocked with another registered Intelli-gent Key.

Unlocking doors and fuel-fillerdoor

1. Push the driver’s or front passenger’sdoor handle request switch once whilecarrying the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once andoutside chime sounds once. The corre-sponding door and the fuel-filler doorwill unlock.

3. Push the door handle request switchagain within 5 seconds.

SPA2004 SPA2005

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 133: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

4. The hazard indicator flashes once andoutside chime sounds once again. Allthe doors will unlock.

Any door should be opened within 1minute after the door is unlocked. Other-wise, all the doors will be locked againautomatically.

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the trunk open request switch jA

for more than 1 second.

2. The trunk will unlatch. An outsidechime will sound four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection:

To prevent the Intelligent Key from beingaccidentally locked in the trunk, lockoutprotection is equipped with the Intelli-gent Key system.When the trunk lid is closed with the In-telligent Key inside the trunk, the outsidebuzzer will sound and the trunk will open.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from movingunexpectedly by erroneous operation ofthe Intelligent Key or to help prevent thevehicle from being stolen, chime or beepsounds inside and outside the vehicleand a warning displays in the dot matrixliquid crystal display.

When a chime or beep sounds or thewarning displays, be sure to check the ve-hicle and Intelligent Key.

See the troubleshooting guide on the next

SPA2006

SPA2007

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 134: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

page and “Dot matrix liquid crystal dis-play” in the “2. Instruments and control”section.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 135: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDESymptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch tostop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on thedisplay and the inside warning chimesounds continuously.

The selector lever is not in the P posi-tion.

Shift the selector lever to the P posi-tion.

When opening the driver’s door to getout of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds con-tinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC posi-tion.

Push the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

The Intelligent Key is in the IntelligentKey port.

Remove the Intelligent Key from theIntelligent Key port.

When closing the door after getting outof the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on thedisplay, the outside chime sounds 3times and the inside warning chimesounds for approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Push the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

When closing the door with the insidelock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approxi-mately 3 seconds and all the doorsunlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicleor trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle requestswitch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approxi-mately 2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicleor trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

The door handle request switch ispushed before the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switchafter the door is closed.

When closing the trunk lidThe outside chime sounds for approxi-mately 10 seconds and the trunk lidopens.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 136: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors,fuel-filler door, activate the panic alarmand open the windows by pushing thebuttons on the Intelligent Key from out-side the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure theIntelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelli-gent Key can operate at a distance of ap-proximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.(The effective distance depends upon theconditions around the vehicle.)As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can beused with one vehicle. For informationconcerning the purchase and use of addi-tional Intelligent Keys, contact anINFINITI dealer.

The lock and unlock buttons on the Intel-ligent Key will not operate when:

O the distance between the IntelligentKey and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10m).

O the Intelligent Key battery runs down.

After locking with the remote keylessentry function, pull the door handle tomake sure the doors are securely locked.

The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies

depending on the environment. To se-curely operate the lock and unlock but-tons, approach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1m) from the door.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 137: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

SPA2011

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 138: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Setting hazard indicator and hornmode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator andhorn mode when you first receive the ve-hicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, whenthe LOCK button j1 is pushed, the hazardindicator flashes twice and the hornchirps once. When the UNLOCK button j2is pushed, the hazard indicator flashesonce.

If horns are not necessary, the system canbe switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCKbutton is pushed, the hazard indicatorflashes twice. When the UNLOCK button ispushed, neither the hazard indicator northe horn operates.

Switching procedure:

Push the LOCK j1 and UNLOCK j2 but-tons on the Intelligent Key simulta-neously for more than 2 seconds toswitch from one mode to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set hazardindicator mode, the hazard indicatorflashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set hazardindicator and horn mode, the hazard indi-cator flashes once and the horn chirpsonce.

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Move the selector lever to the “P” po-sition, push the ignition switch to theLOCK position and make sure youcarry the Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the LOCK button j1 on the Intel-ligent Key.

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door willlock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice andthe horn chirps once.

*1: Doors will lock with the IntelligentKey while the ignition switch is in theACC or ON position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelli-gent Key while any door is open.

Unlocking doors and fuel-fillerdoor

1. Push the UNLOCK button j2 on the In-telligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. Thedriver’s door and fuel-filler door willunlock.

3. Push the UNLOCK button on the Intel-ligent Key again within 5 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes onceagain. All the doors will unlock.

Any door should be opened within 1minute after the door is unlocked. Other-wise all the doors will be locked again au-tomatically.

SPA2010

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 139: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Opening windows

To open the windows, push the door UN-LOCK button on the Intelligent Key forabout 3 seconds after the door is un-locked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK but-ton.

Window cannot be closed using the Intel-ligent Key.

The door windows can be opened orclosed by turning the metal key in a doorlock. See “Doors” earlier in this section.

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the TRUNK button j3 on the In-telligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The trunk will unlatch.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feelthreatened, you may activate the alarm tocall attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC button j4 on the In-telligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and head-

lights will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

O It has run for 25 seconds, or

O Any of the buttons on the IntelligentKey are pushed. (Note: Panic buttonshould be pushed for more than 1second.)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 140: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Pull the hood lock release handle j1located below the instrument panel;the hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever j2 at the front of thehood with your fingertips and raisethe hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly closethe hood and make sure it locks intoplace.

WARNING

O Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving.Failure to do so could cause the hoodto fly open and result in an accident.

O If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid in-jury do not open the hood.

WARNING

O Do not drive with the trunk lid open.This could allow dangerous exhaustgases to be drawn into the vehicle. See“Exhaust gas” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

O Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with thetrunk closed, when not in use, and pre-vent children’s access to IntelligentKeys.

SPA2012

HOOD TRUNK LID

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 141: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH

The trunk lid release switch is located onthe instrument panel.

To open the trunk lid, push the releaseswitch down as illustrated. To close, pushthe trunk lid down.

You can open the trunk lid with IntelligentKey. Refer to “Intelligent Key system” or“Intelligent remote control system” earlierin this section.

OPENING WITH METAL KEY

To open the trunk lid, insert the metal (me-chanical or wallet) key to the trunk key cyl-inder and turn the key to the right side ofthe vehicle. To close, remove the key andpush the trunk lid down.

TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCELSWITCH

When the switch located inside the glovebox is in the CANCEL position jA , the powerto the trunk lid will be cancelled and thetrunk lid cannot be opened by the trunk lidrelease switch, the trunk open requestswitch with the Intelligent Key carried withyou or the TRUNK button on the IntelligentKey. It can be opened only with the me-chanical key or wallet key.

When you have to leave the vehicle with avalet and want to keep your belongingssafe in the glove box and the trunk, push

SPA2013 SPA2014 SPA2015

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 142: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

this switch to CANCEL and lock the glovebox with the mechanical key. Then leavethe vehicle and the Intelligent Key with thevalet and keep the mechanical key withyou.

See “Keys (Intelligent Key)” earlier in thissection.

To connect the power to the trunk lid, pushthe switch to the ON the jB position.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they arearound cars to prevent them from playingand becoming locked in the trunk where theycould be seriously injured. Keep the carlocked, with the trunk lid securely latched,when not in use, and prevent children’s ac-cess to Intelligent Keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism

provides a means of escape for childrenand adults in the event they become lockedinside the trunk.

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pullthe release handle jA until the lock re-leases and push up on the trunk lid. The re-lease lever is made of a material that glowsin the dark after a brief exposure to am-bient light.

The handle is located on the back of thetrunk lid as illustrated.

SPA2016

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 143: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock thefuel-filler door by using one of the follow-ing operations, then push the left side ofthe door.

O Push the door handle request switchwith the Intelligent Key carried withyou.

O Push the UNLOCK button on the Intel-ligent Key.

O Insert the mechanical key into thedoor lock cylinder and turn it to therear of the vehicle.

O Push the power door lock switch tothe UNLOCK position.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.

FUEL FILLER CAP

WARNING

O Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop engine and do not smokeor allow open flames or sparks near thevehicle when refueling.

O Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury. Then remove the cap.

O Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts off au-tomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

O Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It hasa built-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator lamp to come on.

O Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyto attempt to start your vehicle.

O Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of serious in-jury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

— Always place the container on theground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact withthe container while you are filling it.

SPA2017

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 144: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

— Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

O If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

O Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel-filler capproperly may cause the malfunc-tion indicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate.If the lamp illuminates becausethe fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,tighten or install the cap and continueto drive the vehicle. The lampshould turn off after a few driving trips.If the lamp does not turn off aftera few driving trips, have the vehicle in-spected by an INFINITI dealer.

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type.Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove.To tighten, turn the cap clockwise untilratcheting clicks are heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holderjA while refueling.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of your ve-hicle and cause an accident.

SPA1428B

TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 145: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

TILT OR TELESCOPIC OPERATION

Move the lever to adjust the steeringwheel up or down, forward or rearward tothe desired position.

Entry/Exit function

The automatic drive positioner system willmake the steering wheel move upautomatically when the driver’s door isopened with the ignition switch in theLOCK position. This lets the driver get intoand out of the seat more easily.

For more information, see “Automaticdrive positioner” later in this section.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel anycloser to you than is necessary forproper steering operation and comfort.The driver’s air bag inflates with greatforce. If you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from theair bag if you are up against it when itinflates. Always sit back against theseatback and as far away as practicalfrom the steering wheel. Always use theseat belts.

SPA2018

SPA2057

SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 146: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

O Store the main sun visor after storingthe sub-sun visor and the extensionsun visor.

O Do not pull the sub-sun visor and theextension sun visor forcefully down-ward.

1. To block out glare from the front,swing down the main sun visor j1 .

2. To block glare from the side, removethe main sun visor from the centermount and swing it to the side j2 .

3. Then, to block glare from the front too,swing down the sub-sun visor j3 .

4. Slide the extension sun visor j4 ifnecessary.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDEMIRROR

The inside mirror is designed so that itautomatically changes reflection ac-cording to the intensity of the headlightsof the following vehicle.

When the inside mirror AUTO switch jA ispushed while the ignition switch is in theON position, the indicator light jB will il-luminate and excessive glare from theheadlights of the vehicle behind you will

be reduced. Push the OFF switch jC tomake the inside mirror operate normally.The indicator light will turn off.

Do not allow any object to cover the sen-sor jD or apply glass cleaner on it. Doingso will reduce the sensitivity of thesensor, resulting in improper operation.

For HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if soequipped), see “HomeLink UniversalTransceiver” in the “2. Instruments andcontrols” section.

SPA2031Model with HomeLink

SPA2019Model without HomeLink

MIRRORS

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 147: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on thepassenger side are closer than they ap-pear. Be careful when moving to the right.Using only this mirror could cause an acci-dent. Use the inside mirror or glance overyour shoulder to properly judge distancesto other objects.

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is lo-cated at the button of the instrumentpanel.

The outside mirror will operate only whenthe ignition switch is in the ACC or ON po-sition.

Move the switch right or left to select theright or left side mirror, then adjust usingthe control switch.

Defrosting outside mirrors

The outside mirrors will be heated whenthe rear window defroster switch is oper-ated. Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it to-ward the rear of the vehicle.

Reverse tilt-down feature

When backing up the vehicle, the right orleft outside mirror will turn downward au-tomatically to provide better rear vis-ibility.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition.

2. Move the selector lever to the R (Re-verse) position.

SPA1449 SPA1829

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 148: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

3. Choose the right or left outside mirrorby operating the outside mirror controlswitch.

4. The selected outside mirror surfacemoves downward.

5. When one of the following conditionshas occurred, the selected outsidemirror surface will return to its originalposition.

O The selector lever is moved to any po-sition other than R (Reverse).

O The outside mirror control switch isset to the center position.

O The ignition switch is pushed to theLOCK position.

For more information regarding this fea-ture and how to save the R (Reverse) mir-ror tilt-down adjustment in the “Automaticdrive positioner” memory, refer to “Auto-matic drive positioner” later in this sec-tion.

The automatic drive positioner systemhas two features:

O Entry/exit function

O Memory storage

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driv-er’s seat and steering column will auto-matically move when the automatic trans-mission selector lever is in the P (Park)position. This allows the driver to get intoand out of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward andthe steering wheel will move up when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionswitch in the LOCK position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel willreturn to the previous positions when oneof the following is operated:

O When the ignition switch is pushed tothe ACC position after the driver’sdoor is closed.

O When the ignition switch is pushed tothe ON position.

Cancel or activate entry/exitfunction

The entry/exit function can be activatedor cancelled by pressing and holding theSET switch for more than 10 secondswhile the ignition switch is in the LOCKposition.

The indicator light will blink once whenthe function is cancelled, and the indi-cator light will blink twice when the func-tion is activated.

The entry/exit function can also be acti-vated or cancelled from the setting dis-play. See “Vehicle information and set-tings” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,phone and voice recognition systems”section.

Initialize entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or ifthe fuse opens, the entry/exit functionwill not work though this function was seton before. In such a case, after con-necting the battery or replacing with anew fuse, open and close the driver’sdoor more than two times after the igni-tion switch is pushed to the ON positiononce, then pushed to the LOCK position.The entry/exit function will be activated.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 149: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

MEMORY STORAGE

Two positions for the driver’s seat,steering column and outside mirrors canbe stored in the automatic drive posi-tioner memory. Follow these proceduresto use the memory system.

1. Set the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steeringcolumn and outside mirrors to the de-sired positions by manually operatingeach adjusting switch. For additionalinformation, see “Seats” in the

“1. Safety — Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” sec-tion and “Tilting telescopic steeringcolumn” and “Outside mirrors” earlierin this section.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2)fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushedmemory switch will come on and stayon for approximately 5 seconds afterpushing the switch. After the indicatorlight goes off, the selected positionsare stored in the selected memory (1or 2).

If memory is stored in the samememory switch, the previous memorywill be deleted.

Procedure for storing the outsidemirror positions for best visibilityat reverse tilt-down feature

Two outside mirror positions for backingup can be stored in the automatic drivepositioner memory.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition. (Do not start the engine.)

3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fullyfor at least 1 second to operate theautomatic drive positioner.

4. Turn the outside mirror control switchto L (left).

5. Depress the brake pedal.

6. Move the automatic transmission se-lector lever to R (Reverse).

7. Adjust the mirror to the desiredviewing position for backing up by op-erating the outside mirror controlswitch.

8. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-onds, push the memory switch 1 or 2selected in step 3 fully for at least 1second.

O The indicator light for the pushedmemory switch will come on and stayon for approximately 5 seconds afterpushing the switch. After the indicatorlight goes off, the selected mirror po-sition is stored in the selectedmemory (1 or 2).

9. Turn the outside mirror control switchto R (right).

SPA2020

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 150: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Repeat the above procedure to adjustthe right mirror position and store inthe selected memory.

O When the driver’s seat, outside mirrorand steering column are not in thememorized position, the outsidemirror will move with the initial tilt-down angle, if the reverse tilt-downposition is stored.

Linking Intelligent Key to a storedmemory position

The Intelligent Key can be linked to astored memory position with the followingprocedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memoryposition.

2. While the indicator light for thememory switch being set is illumi-nated for 5 seconds, push the

button on the Intelligent Key.The indicator light will blink. After theindicator light goes off, the IntelligentKey is linked to that memory setting.

Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion and press the button on the In-telligent Key. The driver’s seat, steeringwheel and outside mirrors will move to

the memorized position.

Confirming memory storage

O Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition and push the SET switch. If themain memory has not been stored, theindicator light will come on for ap-proximately 0.5 seconds. When thememory has stored in position, the in-dicator light will stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds.

O If the battery cable is disconnected, orif the fuse opens, the memory will becanceled. In this case, reset the de-sired position using the previous pro-cedure.

O If optional Intelligent Keys are addedto your vehicle, the memory storageprocedure to switch 1 or 2 and linkingIntelligent Key procedure to a storedmemory position should be performedagain for each Intelligent Key. For ad-ditional Intelligent Key information,see “Key (Intelligent Key)” earlier inthis section.

Selecting the memorized position

1. Set the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition.

3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fullyfor at least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, steering column andoutside mirrors will move to thememorized position with the indicatorlight flashing, and then the light willstay on for approximately 5 seconds.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system willnot work or will stop operating under thefollowing conditions:

O When the vehicle speed is above 4MPH (7 km/h).

O When the adjusting switch for the driv-er’s seat and steering column isturned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

O When the memory switch 1 or 2 is notpushed for at least 1 second.

O When the seat has already beenmoved to the memorized position.

O When no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

O When the engine is started while mov-

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 151: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

ing the automatic drive positioner.

O When the AT selector lever is movedfrom the P (Park) position to any otherposition. (However, it will not be can-celled if the switch is pushed whilethe seat and steering column are re-turning to the previous positions(entry/exit function).)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 152: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems

Safety note ....................................................... 4-2Center multi-function control panel ................... 4-3

How to use INFINITI controller..................... 4-4Start-up screen (model with Navigationsystem) ....................................................... 4-5Start menu .................................................. 4-6How to select menus on the screen .............. 4-6

Vehicle information and settings ....................... 4-7How to use “STATUS” button........................ 4-7How to use “BRIGHTNESS CONTROL ANDDISPLAY ON/OFF” button............................. 4-7How to use “TRIP” / “fuel econ” button ........ 4-7How to use “INFO” button............................ 4-7Warning display ........................................ 4-12How to use “SETTING” button .................... 4-12

Rear view monitor (if so equipped)................... 4-20How to read the displayed lines ................. 4-20How to park with predicted courselines ......................................................... 4-21How to adjust the screen............................ 4-22Operating tips ........................................... 4-22

Ventilators...................................................... 4-23Automatic climate control................................ 4-25

Automatic operation .................................. 4-26

Manual operation ...................................... 4-27Ambient temperature................................. 4-28Rear control switches for temperature(if so equipped) ......................................... 4-29Operating tips ........................................... 4-29In-cabin microfilter.................................... 4-29Servicing climate control............................ 4-29

Audio system.................................................. 4-30Audio operation precautions ...................... 4-30FM-AM-Satellite radio with compact disc(CD) changer ............................................. 4-37CD care and cleaning ................................. 4-42Steering-wheel-mounted controls foraudio ........................................................ 4-42Rear control switches for audio (if soequipped) ................................................. 4-44INFINITI mobile entertainment system(MES) (if so equipped)................................ 4-45Antenna .................................................... 4-58Car phone or CB radio................................ 4-58

Bluetooth hands-free phone system .............. 4-59Pairing procedure ...................................... 4-62Phonebook registration ............................. 4-63Making a call ............................................. 4-64

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 153: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Receiving a call.......................................... 4-65During a call .............................................. 4-65Phone setting ............................................ 4-66

INFINITI Voice Recognition system (if soequipped)....................................................... 4-67

Using the system....................................... 4-67System features ........................................ 4-68List of voice commands.............................. 4-69Troubleshooting guide............................... 4-73

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 154: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

O Positioning of the heating or air condi-tioning controls and display controlsshould not be done while driving, in or-der that full attention may be given todriving operation.

O Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in acci-dents, fire, or electric shock.

O Do not use this system if you noticeany abnormality, such as a frozenscreen or lack of sound. Continued useof the system may result in accident,fire or electric shock.

O In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest INFINITIdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire, or electricshock.

O Park the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking brake to view the im-ages on the front center display screenusing the DVD drive or other devicesconnected to the auxiliary input jacks(if so equipped).

SAFETY NOTE

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 155: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-7)

2, 6, 7, 8, 9. For navigation system con-trol buttons (Refer to theseparate Navigation Own-er’s Manual.)

3. INFINITI controller (P.4-4)

4. “PHONE” hands-free phone systembutton (P.4-59)

5. “ ” brightness control and displayON/OFF button (P.4-7)

10. “INFO” vehicle and navigation infor-mation button (P.4-7)

11. “SETTING” button (P.4-12)

12. “RADIO” AM/FM/SAT(XM/SIRIUS)band selector button (P.4-30)

13. “DISC” CD/DVD (if so equipped) se-lector button (P.4-32)

SAA1095With Navigation system

CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROLPANEL

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

Z 05.7.29/Y50-D X

Page 156: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-7)

2. “RADIO” AM/FM/SAT(XM/SIRIUS)band selector button (P.4-30)

3. INFINITI controller (P.4-4)

4. “PHONE” hands-free phone systembutton (P.4-59)

5. “ ” brightness control and displayON/OFF button (P.4-7)

6. “TRIP” drive computer button (P.4-7)

7. “FUEL ECON” button (P.4-7)

8. “DISC” CD/DVD (if so equipped) se-

lector button (P.4-32)

9. “AUDIO TEXT” display button (P.4-30)

10. “INFO” vehicle information button(P.4-7)

11. “SETTING” button (P.4-12)

When you use this system, make sure theengine is running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

HOW TO USE INFINITICONTROLLER

Choose an item on the display using themain directional buttons j2 (or additionaldirectional buttons j6 with Navigation sys-tem) or center dial j3 , and push the ENTER“ ” button j1 for operation.

If you push the BACK “ ” button j4 be-fore the setup is completed, the setup willbe canceled and/or the display will returnto the previous screen.

After the setup is completed, push the

SAA1096Without Navigation system

SAA1097With Navigation system

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.7.29/Y50-D X

Page 157: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

BACK “ ” button j4 and return to theprevious screen.

For the “VOICE” button j5 functions,refer to the separate Navigation Owner’sManual.

START-UP SCREEN (model withNavigation system)

When you push the ignition switch to theACC or ON position, the SYSTEMSTART-UP warning is displayed on thescreen. When you read and agree with thewarning, push the ENTER “ ”button.

If you do not push the ENTER “ ”button, you will not be able to use theNAVI system.

To proceed to the NAVI system, refer to

the separate Navigation system Owner’sManual.

SAA1098Without Navigation system

SAA1072

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 158: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

START MENU

The start menu can be displayed usingthe ENTER switch on the steering-wheel-mounted controls.

1. Push and hold the ENTER switch untilthe “Menu Options” screen appears.

2. Highlight the preferred item and pushthe ENTER switch.

The ENTER switch on the steering-wheel-mounted controls can be used to displaythe start menu only when the map or sta-tus screen is displayed on the monitor.

Available items

Destination/Route:

These items are for the navigationsystem. If your vehicle is equipped withthe navigation system, see the separatenavigation system Owner’s Manual for de-tails.

Information:

Displays the information screen. It is thesame screen that appears when you pushthe INFO “ ” button.

Settings:

Displays the settings screen. It is thesame screen that appears when you pushthe SETTING “ ” button.

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THESCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on thecenter display screen in menus. Whenevera menu selection is made or menu item ishighlighted, different areas on the screenprovide you with important information.See the following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the cur-rent screen. (i.e. press SETTING but-ton > choose “Comfort & Conve-nience” menu item.)

SAA1189 SAA1184

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 159: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose withinthat menu screen. (i.e. Selective DoorUnlock “ON”, etc.)

3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:

Shows that the INFINITI controller maybe used to move UP/DOWN on thescreen and select more options.

4. Screen Count:

Shows the number of menu selectionsavailable for that screen (i.e. 5/9).

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available)about the menu selection currentlyhighlighted. (i.e. OFF will activateall doors with one click.)

HOW TO USE “STATUS” BUTTON

To display the status of the audio, climatecontrol system, fuel consumption and navi-gation system (if so equipped), push the“STATUS” button. The following informa-tion will appear when the “STATUS” buttonis pushed.

Audio → Audio and Climate control system→ Audio and fuel consumption → Audioand Navigation system (if so equipped) →Audio

HOW TO USE “BRIGHTNESSCONTROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF”BUTTON

Push the “ ” button to switch the dis-play brightness to the daytime mode or thenighttime mode, and to adjust the displaybrightness using the INFINITI controllerwhile the indicator is displayed at thebottom of the screen.

The display brightness can also be ad-justed using the brightness UP button (+)or brightness DOWN button (−) (modelwithout navigation system).

Push the “ ” button for more than 2seconds to turn the display off. Push the

button again for more than 2 seconds toturn the display on.

HOW TO USE “TRIP” / “FUEL ECON”BUTTON

Push the “TRIP” or “FUEL ECON” button tocheck trip computer information or fueleconomy information (model without Navi-gation system).

For more details, see “How to use INFObutton” later in this section.

HOW TO USE “INFO” BUTTON

The display screen shows vehicle and navi-gation (if so equipped) information for yourconvenience.

The information shown on the screenshould be a guide to determine the condi-tion of the vehicle. See the following for de-tails.

VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Z 05.1.17/Y50-D X

Page 160: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Vehicle information display

1. Push the INFO “ ” button on thecontrol panel.The screens as illustrated will appear.

2. Choose an item using the INFINITI con-troller and push the ENTER “ ”button.

3. After viewing or adjusting the informa-tion on the following screens, push theBACK “ ” button to return to the IN-FORMATION menu.

For the items “Where am I?”, “GPS Satel-lite Info” and “Navigation Versions”, refer

to the separate Navigation Owner’sManual.

“FUEL ECONOMY” information

The distance to empty, average fueleconomy and current fuel economy (shownon the right side bar) will be displayed forreference.

To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use theINFINITI controller to highlight the“Reset” key and push the ENTER“ ” button.

If the “View” key is highlighted with theINFINITI controller and the ENTER“ ” button is pushed, the average

SAA1073 SAA1074 SAA1075

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.1.17/Y50-D X

Page 161: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

fuel consumption history will be displayedin graph form along with the average forthe previous Reset-to-Reset period.

The unit can be converted between “US”and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTINGbutton” later in this section.

“TIRE PRESSURE” information

The pressure indication “** psi” on thescreen means that the pressure is beingmeasured. After a few driving trips, thepressures for all 4 tires will be displayed.The indication “**psi” will be displayed onthe screen for a while.

In case of low tire pressure, LOW PRES-SURE information will be displayed on thescreen:

Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe vehicle’s traveling condition and am-bient temperature.

WARNING

O When the low tire pressure warning lightis on and/or a WARNING is displayed onthe screen, check all tire pressures.Please refer to the “6. In case of emer-gency” section for repairing.

O When the LOW PRESSURE information isdisplayed on the screen, check all tirepressures. Refer to the “6. In case ofemergency” section for repairing.

O Immediately after a spare tire is mounted, awheel is replaced or tire rotation is per-formed, tire pressure will not be indicatedon the display and the low tire pressurewarning system will not function. Reset thesystem by driving the vehicle at over 25MPH (40 km/h) for approximately 10 min-utes. If tire pressure is not indicated afterperforming the resetting procedure above,contact an INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible.

O Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by INFINITI could affect theproper operation of the low tire pressurewarning system.

SAA1076 SAA1077

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

Z 05.7.29/Y50-D X

Page 162: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

“TRIP COMPUTER” information

Elapsed Time, Driving Distance and Av-erage Speed will be displayed.

To reset, use the INFINITI controller tohighlight the “Reset” key and push the EN-TER “ ” button immediately beforedriving the vehicle.

The unit can be converted between “US”and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTINGbutton” later in this section.

“MAINTENANCE” information

To set the maintenance interval for the En-gine Oil, Oil Filter, Tire or Other Reminder,choose an item using the INFINITI control-ler and push the ENTER “ ” button.

You can also set to display a message to re-mind you that the maintenance needs to beperformed.

The following example shows how to setthe engine oil change interval. Use thesame steps to set the other maintenanceinformation.

1. Reset the driving distance to the newmaintenance schedule.

2. Set the interval (mileage) of the mainte-nance schedule. To determine the rec-ommended maintenance interval, referto your “INFINITI Service and Mainte-nance Guide”.

3. To display the MAINTENANCE INFOR-MATION automatically when the settrip distance is reached, highlight the“Interval Reminder” key with theINFINITI controller and push the ENTER“ ” button.

SAA1078 SAA1079 SAA1080

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 163: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

4. To return the display to MAINTENANCEINFO., push the BACK “ ” button.

Maintenance information display cannotbe operated when the vehicle is moving.Stop the vehicle in a safe place to see theinformation.

The unit can be converted between “US”and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTINGbutton” later in this section.

MAINTENANCE NOTICE:

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen (“En-gine oil” j1 , “Oil Filter” j2 , “Tire” j3 or“Other Reminder” j4 ) will be automaticallydisplayed as shown when both of the fol-lowing conditions are met:

O the vehicle is driven the set distanceand the ignition switch is pushed to theLOCK position.

O the ignition switch is pushed to the ACCor ON position the next time you drivethe vehicle after the set value wasachieved.

To return to the previous display after the“MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is dis-played, push the BACK “ ” button.

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is dis-played each time the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

O “Reset Distance” is selected.

O “Interval Reminder” is set to OFF.

O the maintenance interval is set again.

SAA1185 SAA1186

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 164: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING DISPLAY

These displays will appear when one of thefollowing occurs while driving over 3 MPH(5 km/h).

O Any door is not securely closed. (Thecorresponding door will be indicated onthe display.)

O The trunk lid is not securely closed.

O Any door and the trunk lid are not se-curely closed.

These displays will disappear when the ve-hicle speed slows down under 3 MPH (5

km/h) even if a door or trunk lid is not se-curely closed yet.

Make sure to stop the vehicle and close adoor or trunk lid securely.

HOW TO USE “SETTING” BUTTON

The display as illustrated will appear whenthe SETTING “ ” button is pushed.

For navigation settings, refer to the sepa-rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

To show the “Comfort & Convenience”item, push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition.

SAA1187 SAA1188 SAA1081

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 165: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

“REAR DISPLAY” settings (if soequipped)

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING “ ” button, se-lecting the “Rear Display” key with theINFINITI controller and pushing the ENTER“ ” button.

Rear Display Open:

When this item is turned to ON, the reardisplay opens. When the ignition switch ispushed to the ACC or ON position, the reardisplay is flipped down automatically.When the ignition switch is pushed to the

LOCK position, the rear display is closedautomatically if ON is selected.

The rear display will open or close usingthe remote controller. See “INFINITI Mo-bile Entertainment System (MES)” later inthis section.

Headphone Mode:

To allow the use of the wireless head-phones originally equipped with the ve-hicle, turn this item to the ON position. Formore details, see “INFINITI Mobile Enter-tainment System (MES)” later in this sec-tion.

Rear Display:

The following screens are able to be se-lected for the rear display.

DVD→← AUX

→← Map

SAA1082 SAA1083

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 166: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

“DISPLAY” settings

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING “ ” button, se-lecting “Display” key with the INFINITIcontroller and pushing the ENTER “ ”button.

Display:

To turn off the screen, push the ENTER“ ” button and turn the “Display” in-dicator off. The other method is to push the“ ” button for more than 2 seconds.

When any mode button is pushed with thescreen off, the screen turns on for further

operation. The screen will turn off auto-matically 5 seconds after the operation isfinished.

To turn on the screen, set this item to theON position, or push the “ ” button formore than 2 seconds.

Brightness/Contrast/Background Color:

To adjust the brightness, contrast andbackground color of the screen, select theappropriate “Brightness”, “Contrast” or“Background Color” key and push theENTER “ ” button.

Then, you can adjust the brightness to“Darker” or “Brighter”, and the contrast to“Lower” or “Higher” using the multi-function controller. Switch the backgroundcolor to the daytime mode or the nighttimemode by pushing the ENTER“ ” button.

For the display mode adjusting procedureswhile the DVD image or the rear view is dis-played, see “INFINITI mobile entertain-ment system (MES)” or “Rear viewmonitor” later in this section.

“AUDIO” settings

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING “ ” button, se-lecting the “AUDIO” key with the multi-function controller and pushing the ENTER“ ” button.

Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade:

To adjust the speaker tone quality andsound balance, select the “Bass”,“Treble”, “Balance” or “Fade” key and ad-just it with the INFINITI controller.

These items can also be adjusted bypushing and turning the AUDIO knob.

SAA1084Navigation equipped model

SAA1085

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 167: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

BOSE Centerpoint (if so equipped):

When this item is turned to ON, an ex-citing surround sound is generated from atraditional stereo recording.

BOSE AudioPilot (if so equipped):

When this item is turned to ON,AudioPilot monitors noise in the passen-ger compartment with a microphone andcompensates for any unpleasant noise.

Surround Volume (if so equipped):

To adjust the surround sound volume, se-lect “Surround Volume” and adjust it with

the INFINITI controller.

Precision Phased Audio (if so equipped):

When this item is turned to ON, superhigh pitch sound and super low pitchsound are emphasized and midrangesound is played naturally.

Speed Sensitive Vol (if so equipped):

Sound volume is increased according tothe vehicle speed. Choose the effect levelfrom OFF (0) to 5.

“Navigation” settings (if soequipped)

For the details of “Navigation” settings,refer to the separate Navigation Owner’sManual.

SAA1086 SAA1087

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 168: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

“Volume and Beeps” settings

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING “ ” button, se-lecting the “Volume and Beeps” key withthe INFINITI controller and pushing theENTER “ ” button.

Guidance Volume:

To adjust the guidance voice volumelouder or softer, select the “Guidance Vol-ume” and adjust it with the INFINITI con-troller.

You can also adjust the guidance voicevolume by turning the VOLUME control

knob while voice guidance is being an-nounced.

Guidance Voice:

When this item is turned to ON, you willhear voice guidance in the navigation (ifso equipped) operation or in other opera-tions.

Phone Ringer Vol/Phone Incoming Vol/Phone Outgoing Vol:

For the details of these Items, refer to“Hands-free phone system” later in thissection.

Button Beeps:

When this item is turned to ON, you willhear a beep sound when you use abutton.

“Phone” settings

For the details of “Phone” settings, referto “Hands-free phone system” later inthis section.

SAA1088 SAA1089

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 169: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

“Voice Recognition” settings

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING “ ” button, se-lecting the “Voice Recognition” key withthe INFINITI controller and pushing theENTER “ ” button.

Minimize Voice Feedback:

When this item is turned to ON, vocal feed-back is reduced if the voice recognitionsystem is activated.

“Clock” settings (if so equipped)

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING “ ” button, se-lecting the “Clock” key with the INFINITIcontroller and pushing the ENTER “ ”button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is turned to ON, a clock isalways displayed in the upper right cornerof the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost ex-actly because it is always adjusted by theGPS system.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12-hour clock display orthe 24-hour clock display.

Offset Adjust:

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasingper minute.

Daylight Saving Time:

Turn this item to ON for daylight savingtime application.

Time Zone:

Choose the time zone from the following

O Pacific

O Mountain

O Central

O Eastern

O Atlantic

O Newfoundland

SAA1090 SAA1091

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 170: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

“Language/Units” settings

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING “ ” button, se-lecting the “Language/Units” key with theINFINITI controller and pushing theENTER “ ” button.

Select Language:

Choose the “Select Language” key andpush the ENTER “ ” button. Fromthe following display, select “English” or“Français” for your favorite display ap-pearance.

Select Units:

Choose the “Select Units” key and pushthe ENTER “ ” button. From the fol-lowing display, select “US” (Mile, °F,MPG) or “Metric” (km, °C, L/100 km) foryour favorite display appearance.

“Comfort and Convenience”settings

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING “ ” button, se-lecting the Comfort and Convenience” keywith the INFINITI controller and pushingthe ENTER “ ” button. This key doesnot appear on the display until the igni-tion switch is pushed to the ON position.

Auto Interior Illumination:

When this item is turned to ON, the

SAA1092 SAA1093

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 171: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

interior lights will illuminate if any door isunlocked.

Auto Headlights Sensitivity:

Adjust the sensitivity of the automaticheadlights higher (right) or lower (left).

Auto Headlights Off Delay:

Choose the duration of the automaticheadlight off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90,120, 150 and 180 second periods.

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval:

When this item is turned to ON, the wiperinterval is adjusted automatically ac-

cording to the vehicle speed.

Selective Door Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, only thedriver’s door is unlocked first after thedoor unlock operation. When the doorhandle request switch on the driver’s orfront passenger’s side door is pushed tobe unlocked, only the corresponding dooris unlocked first. All the doors can be un-locked if the door unlock operation is per-formed again within 5 seconds.

When this item is turned to OFF, all thedoors will be unlocked after the door un-lock operation is performed once.

Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, doorlock/unlock function by pushing the doorhandle request switch will be activated.

Lift Steering Wheel on Exit:

When this item is turned to ON, the steer-ing wheel moves upward for easy exit ifthe ignition switch is in the LOCK positionand the driver’s door is opened. After get-ting into the vehicle and pushing the igni-tion switch to the ACC position, the steer-ing wheel moves to the previous position.

Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit:

When this item is turned to ON, the driv-er’s seat moves backward for easy exit ifthe ignition switch is in the LOCK positionand the driver’s door is opened. After get-ting into the vehicle and pushing the igni-tion switch to the ACC position, the driv-er’s seat moves to the previous position.

Return All Settings to Default:

Select this item, push the ENTER “ ”button and choose “YES” if you want toreturn all settings to default.

SAA1094

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 172: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When the selector lever is shifted into the R(Reverse) position, the monitor displayshows view to the rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary objectsto help avoid damaging the vehicle. Thesystem will not detect small objects belowthe bumper and may not detect objectsclose to the bumper or on the ground.

WARNING

O The rear view camera is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for properbacking up. Always turn and check that itis safe to do so before backing up. Al-ways back up slowly.

O Objects viewed in the rear view monitordiffer from actual distance because awide-angle lens is used. Objects in therear view monitor will appear visually op-posite than when viewed in the rear viewand outside mirrors.

O Make sure that the trunk is securelyclosed when backing up.

O Do not put anything on the rear viewcamera. The rear view camera is installedabove the license plate.

O When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causing watercondensation on the lens, a malfunction,fire or an electric shock.

O Do not strike the camera. It is a precisioninstrument. Otherwise, it may malfunc-tion or cause damage resulting in a fireor an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera. Donot scratch the cover when cleaning dirt orsnow from the cover.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehiclewidth and distances to objects with refer-ence to the bumper line jA are displayedon the monitor.

They are indicated as reference distancesto objects. Displayed lines indicate dis-tances 1.5 feet (red) j1 , 3 feet (yellow) j2 ,7 feet (green) j3 and 10 feet (green) j4[0.5 m (red), 1 m (yellow), 2 m (green) and 3m (green)] from the lower part of thebumper line jA .

SAA1099

REAR VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 173: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When the steering wheel is turned with theselector lever in the R (Reverse) position,the predicted course line jB is displayedon the monitor.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTEDCOURSE LINES

WARNING

O Always turn and check that it is safe to doso before backing up. Always back upslowly.

O Use the displayed lines as a reference.The lines are highly affected by the num-ber of occupants, fuel level, vehicle posi-tion, road condition and road grade.

O If the tires are replaced with differentsized tires, the predicted course line maybe displayed incorrectly.

O On a snow-covered or slippery road,there may be a difference between thepredicted course line and the actualcourse line.

O If the battery is disconnected or be-comes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed incor-rectly. If this occurs, please performthe following procedures:

—Turn the steering wheel from lock tolock while the engine is running.

—Drive the vehicle on a straight roadfor more than 5 minutes.

O When the steering wheel is turned withthe ignition switch in the ACC position,the predicted course lines may be dis-played incorrectly.

O The displayed lines will appear slightlyoff to the right because the monitoringcamera is not installed in the center po-sition.

O The distance guide line and the vehiclewidth line should be used as a refer-ence only when the vehicle is on a levelpaved surface. The distance viewed onthe monitor is for reference only andmay be different than the actual dis-tance between the vehicle and dis-played objects.

O When backing-up the vehicle up ahill objects viewed in the monitor arefurther than they appear. Whenbacking-up the vehicle down a hillobjects viewed in the monitor arecloser than they appear. Use the in-side mirror or glance over yourshoulder to properly judge distancesto other objects.

The vehicle width and predicted courselines are wider than the actual width andcourse.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 174: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Visually check that the parking space issafe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayedon the screen as illustrated when theselector lever is moved to the R posi-tion. The predicted course lines jB will

appear when the steering wheel isturned to the right or left.

3. Back up the vehicle to the parkingspace jC while referring to the pre-dicted course lines. Do not rely com-pletely on the information displayed on

the screen. Confirm the safety of the ve-hicle by visually checking around thevehicle.

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to makethe vehicle width lines jD parallel to theparking space jC while referring to thepredicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the spacecompletely, move the selector lever tothe P position and apply the parkingbrake.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,Tint, Color and Contrast of the rear viewmonitor, push the SETTING “ ” buttonwith the rear view monitor on, select theitem key and adjust the level using theINFINITI controller.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tintand Color of the rear view monitor while thevehicle is moving. Make sure the parkingbrake is firmly applied and the engine isnot running.

OPERATING TIPS

O When the selector lever is shifted to R,the monitor screen automaticallychanges to the rear view monitor

SAA1137

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 175: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

mode. However, the radio can be heard.

O It may take some time until the rearview monitor is displayed after the se-lector lever has been shifted to R fromanother position or to another positionfrom R. Objects may be distorted mo-mentarily until the rear view monitorscreen is displayed completely.

O When the temperature is extremelyhigh or low, the screen may not clearlydisplay objects. This is not a malfunc-tion.

O When strong light directly enters thecamera, objects may not be displayedclearly. This is not a malfunction.

O Vertical lines may be seen in objects onthe screen. This is due to strong re-flected light from the bumper. This isnot a malfunction.

O The screen may flicker under fluores-cent light. This is not a malfunction.

O The colors of objects on the rear viewmonitor may differ somewhat fromthose of the actual object.

O Objects on the monitor may not be clearin a dark place or at night. This is not amalfunction.

O If dirt, rain or snow attaches to thecamera, the rear view monitor may notclearly display objects. Clean thecamera.

O Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinnerto clean the camera. This will cause dis-coloration. To clean the camera, wipewith a cloth dampened with dilutedmild cleaning agent and then wipe witha dry cloth.

O Do not damage the camera as the moni-tor screen may be adversely affected.

O Do not use wax on the camera window.Wipe off any wax with a clean clothdampened with mild detergent dilutedwith water.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direc-tion of ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that thevents are closed.

: This symbol indicates that thevents are open.

SAA1100Front

VENTILATORS

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 176: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

SAA1101Rear

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 177: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. “MODE” manual air flow controlbutton (driver side)

2. “TEMP” temperature control button

3. “AUTO” automatic climate control ONbutton

4. “ ” front defroster button

5. “ ” automatic upper vent systemON/OFF button

6. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button

7. “ +” fan speed increase button

8. “TEMP” temperature control button

(available for passenger side when theDUAL mode is on)

9. “MODE” manual air flow controlbutton (available for passenger sidewhen the DUAL mode is on)

10. “OFF” button for climate controlsystem

11. “ ” rear window defroster button

12. “ ” intake air controlbutton

13. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF buttonfor passenger side temperature and

manual air flow mode

14. “ 2” fan speed decrease button

WARNING

O The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

O Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the support ofothers alone in your vehicle. Petsshould not be left alone either. On hot,sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become highenough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals.

O Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the inte-rior air to become stale and the win-dows to fog up.

O Positioning of the heater and/or airconditioner controls should not be donewhile driving, so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the auto-matic climate control system.

SSI0095

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 178: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When the “STATUS” button is pushed, theautomatic climate control status screenwill appear. See “How to use STATUS but-ton” earlier in this section.

You can individually set driver and frontpassenger side temperature and air flowusing each temperature control buttonand manual air flow control button.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidifiedheating (AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round.The system works automatically to controlthe inside temperature, air flowdistribution and fan speed after thepreferred temperature is set manually.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indi-cator on the button will illuminate andAUTO will be displayed.)

2. Use the temperature control buttonsto set the desired temperature.

Adjust the temperature to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

O The temperature of the passengercompartment will be maintained auto-matically. Air flow distribution and fanspeed will also be controlled auto-matically.

3. You can individually set driver andfront passenger side temperatureusing each temperature controlbutton. When the “DUAL” button ispushed or the passenger side tem-perature control button is turned, theDUAL indicator will come on. To turnoff the passenger side temperaturecontrol, push the “DUAL” button.

4. To turn off the climate control system,push the “OFF” button.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate inthis mode. When you need to heat only,use this mode.

SAA1102

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 179: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indi-cator will turn off.)

2. Push the temperature control buttonto set the desired temperature.

O The temperature of the passengercompartment will be maintained auto-matically. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automati-cally.

O Do not set the temperature lower thanthe outside air temperature. Otherwisethe system may not work properly.

O Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting ordefogging

1. Push the “ ” front defrosterbutton. (The indicator light on the but-ton will come on.)

2. Push the temperature control buttonto set the desired temperature.

O To quickly remove ice from the outsideof the windows, push the fan speedincrease button “ +” and set it tothe maximum position.

O As soon as possible after the wind-shield is clean, push the “AUTO”

button to return to the auto mode.

O When the “ ” front defrosterbutton is pushed, the air conditionerwill automatically be turned on at out-side temperatures above 23°F (−5°C)to defog the windshield, and the airrecirculate mode will automatically beturned off.

Outside air is drawn into the pas-senger compartment to improve thedefogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Push the fan speed increase “ +” ordecrease “ 2” buttons to manually con-trol the fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to return to auto-matic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the intake air control button “” to recirculate interior air inside the

vehicle. The indicator light on the “ ”side will come on.

The air recirculation mode cannot beactivated when the air conditioner is in thefront defrosting mode “ ”.

Outside air circulation

Push the intake air control button “” to draw outside air into the pas-

senger compartment. The indicator lighton the “ ” side will come on.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will becontrolled automatically. To manually con-trol the intake air, push the intake aircontrol button “ ”. To return tothe automatic control mode, push the in-take air control button “ ” forabout 2 seconds. The indicator lights(both air recirculation and outside air cir-culation sides) will flash twice, and thenthe intake air will be controlled automati-cally.

Air flow control

Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow con-trol button selects the air outlet to:

: Air flows from center and sideventilators.

: Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 180: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

: Air flows from defroster and footoutlets.

Automatic upper vent system

When the “ ” automatic upper ventbutton is pushed, the air flow against thedriver’s or passenger’s upper body be-comes gentle. The indicator light on thebutton will come on.

In this mode, air from the center ventila-tors flows both straight and upward in or-der to control the cabin temperature with-out blowing air directly on the occupants.

Distribution between straight and upwardflows will be determined automatically bythe A/C unit.

If you want strong air flow against yourupper body, push the “ ” button toturn the indicator light off.

To turn the system off

Push the OFF button.

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

The ambient temperature will be dis-played.

The ambient temperature sensor is lo-cated in front of the radiator. The sensor

may be affected by road or engine heat,wind direction and other driving condi-tions. The display may differ from the ac-tual ambient temperature or the tempera-ture displayed on various signs or bill-boards.

1. Auto button2. Fan speed control button3. Temperature control button

SAA1103

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 181: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

REAR CONTROL SWITCHES FORTEMPERATURE (if so equipped)

The rear seat passengers can adjust theclimate control system using the climatecontrols in the rear armrest panel.

“AUTO” button: automatic climate controlmode on

“ ” button: Fan speed control up(Max fan speed → return to Low fanspeed)

“ ” button: Temperature controlup/down

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature andoutside air temperature are low, the airflow from the foot outlets may not operatefor a maximum of 150 seconds. This isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tem-perature warms up, air will flow normallyfrom the foot outlets.

The sunload sensor jA on the instrumentpanel helps maintain a constant tempera-ture. Do not put anything on or aroundthis sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The climate control system is equippedwith an in-cabin microfilter which collectsdirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure theair conditioner heats, defogs, and venti-lates efficiently, replace the filter in accor-dance with the maintenance schedule inthe INFINITI Service and MaintenanceGuide. To replace the filter, contact anINFINITI dealer.

The filter should be replaced if air flow isextremely decreased or when windowsfog up easily when operating heater orair conditioning system.

SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL

The climate control system in yourINFINITI is charged with a refrigerant de-signed with the environment in mind. Thisrefrigerant will not harm the earth’sozone layer. However, special chargingequipment and lubricant are requiredwhen servicing your INFINITI air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lu-bricants will cause severe damage to yourclimate control system. See “Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants” in the“9. Technical and consumer information”for climate control system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations.

Your INFINITI dealer will be able to ser-vice your environmentally friendly climatecontrol system.

SIC2768

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 182: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant under highpressure. To avoid personal injury, any airconditioner service should be done only byan experienced technician with the properequipment.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Radio

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition and push the “RADIO” button toturn on the radio. If you listen to theradio with the engine not running, the ig-nition switch should be pushed to theACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station sig-nal strength, distance from radio trans-mitter, buildings, bridges, mountains andother external influences. Intermittentchanges in reception quality normally arecaused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio receptionquality.

Radio reception:

Your INFINITI radio system is equippedwith state-of-the-art electronic circuits toenhance radio reception. These circuitsare designed to extend reception range,and to enhance the quality of that recep-tion.

However there are some general charac-teristics of both FM and AM radio signalsthat can affect radio reception quality in a

moving vehicle, even when the finestequipment is used. These characteristicsare completely normal in a given recep-tion area, and do not indicate any mal-function in your INFINITI radio system.

Reception conditions will constantlychange because of vehicle movement.Buildings, terrain, signal distance and in-terference from other vehicles can workagainst ideal reception. Described beloware some of the factors that can affectyour radio reception.

AUDIO SYSTEM

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 183: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

FM radio reception:

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural(single channel) FM having slightly morerange than stereo FM. External influencesmay sometimes interfere with FM stationreception even if the FM station is within25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distancebetween the transmitter and receiver. FMsignals follow a line-of-sight path, exhib-iting many of the same characteristics aslight. For example they will reflect off ob-jects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle movesaway from a station transmitter, the sig-nals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-ence from buildings, large hills or due toantenna position, usually in conjunctionwith increased distance from the stationtransmitter, static or flutter can be heard.This can be reduced by lowering thetreble setting to reduce the treble re-sponse.

Multipath reception: Because of the re-flective characteristics of FM signals, di-rect and reflected signals reach the re-ceiver at the same time. The signals maycancel each other, resulting in momentaryflutter or loss of sound.

AM radio reception:

AM signals, because of their low fre-quency, can bend around objects andskip along the ground. In addition, thesignals can be bounced off the iono-sphere and bent back to earth. Becauseof these characteristics. AM signals arealso subject to interference as they travelfrom transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle ispassing through freeway underpasses or

in areas with many tall buildings. It canalso occur for several seconds duringionospheric turbulence even in areaswhere no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, elec-trical power lines, electric signs and eventraffic lights.

Satellite radio reception:

When the satellite radio (if so equipped)is first installed or the battery has beenreplaced, the satellite radio may not workproperly. This is not a malfunction. Waitmore than 10 minutes with satellite radioON for satellite radio to receive all of thenecessary data.

The satellite radio mode will be skippedunless an optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed, and an XM orSIRIUSTM satellite radio service subscrip-tion is active.

Satellite radio performance may be af-fected if cargo carried on the roof blocksthe satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the sat-ellite antenna.

SAA0306

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 184: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Compact Disc (CD) playerO During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

O The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

O The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the passenger compartmenttemperature is extremely high. De-crease the temperature before use.

O Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12cm) round discs that have the “COM-PACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo onthe disc or packaging.

O Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

O CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,scratched, covered with fingerprints,or that have pin holes may not workproperly.

O The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

- Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

- Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

- Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

O Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion.

- 8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an adapter

- CDs that are not round

- CDs with a paper label

- CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

O This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capabilities torecord or burn CDs.

O If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

- Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

- Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is an error due to the tempera-ture inside the player is too high. Re-move the CD by pushing the EJECTbutton, and after a short time reinsertthe CD. The CD can be played whenthe temperature of the player returnsto normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio

SAA0480

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 185: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

system (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms:

O MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well known compressed digitalaudio file format. This format allows fornear “CD quality” sound, but at a frac-tion of the size of normal audio files.MP3 conversion of an audio track fromCD can reduce the file size by approxi-mately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz,Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no per-ceptible loss in quality. MP3 compres-sion removes the redundant and irrel-evant parts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

O WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) isa compressed audio format created byMicrosoft as an alternative to MP3. TheWMA codec offers greater file compres-sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor-age of more digital audio tracks in thesame amount of space when comparedto MP3s at the same level of quality.

O Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the numberof bits per second used by a digital mu-sic files. The size and quality of a com-

pressed digital audio file is determinedby the bit rate used when encoding thefile.

O Sampling frequency — The rate atwhich the samples of a signal are con-verted from analog to digital (A/D con-version) per second.

O Multisession — Multisession is one ofthe methods for writing data to media.Writing data once to the media is calleda single session, and writing more thanonce is called a multisession.

O ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag isthe part of the encoded MP3 or WMAfile that contains information about thedigital music file such as song title, art-ist, encording bit rate, track time dura-tion, etc. ID3 tag information is dis-played on the Artist/song title line onthe display.

* Windows and Windows Media areregistered trademarks and trademarksin the United States of America andother countries of Microsoft Corpora-tion of the USA.

Playback order:

Music playback order of the CD with MP3 orWMA is as illustrated above.

O The folder names of folders not con-

SAA1025

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 186: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

taining MP3/WMA files are not shownin the display.

O If there is a file in the top level of thedisc, “Root Folder” is displayed.

O The playback order is the order inwhich the files were written by thewriting software, so the files might notplay in the desired order.

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systemsISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not sup-ported.

Supported ver-sions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information (Song title and Artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levelsFolder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including routefolder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOMBig Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE(Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit ratecannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are goingto be displayed.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 187: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before us-ing the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will beplayed.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes andnumber of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting ofMP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time be-fore the music starts playing.

If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required beforethe music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., mightnot match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the nextsong when playing.

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited bycopyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in thedesired order.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the de-sired order.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 188: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. ONzOFF/VOLUME control knob

2. Radio station and CD selector buttons

3. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA folder selec-tor / AUDIO control knob

4. CD LOAD button

5. Radio PRESET A-B-C selector button

6. Radio CAT (category) / CD RPT (repeat)play button

7. REW (rewind) button for SEEK/TRACK

8. FF (fast forward) button forSEEK/TRACK

9. CD EJECT button

SSI0096

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 189: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

FM-AM-SATELLITE RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER

The satellite radio mode will be skipped un-less an optional satellite receiver and antennaare installed, and an XM or SIRIUSTM satel-lite radio service subscription is active.

It may take some time to receive the activa-tion signal after subscribing to the XMT orSIRIUS™ satellite radio provider. After re-ceiving the activation signal, an availablechannel list will be automatically updated inthe radio. For XMT, push the ignition switchfrom LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.

Satellite radio is not available in Hawaiiand Alaska.

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The radio has an FM diversity receptionsystem, which employs two antennasprinted on the rear window. This systemautomatically switches to the antennawhich is receiving less interference.

The auto loudness circuit enhances the lowfrequency range automatically in bothradio reception and CD playback.

ONzOFF/Volume control:

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition, and then push theONzOFF/VOLUME control knob while thesystem is off to call up the mode (radio, CD,DVD or AUX — if so equipped) which wasplaying immediately before the system wasturned off. While the system is on, pushingthe ONzOFF/VOLUME control knob turns thesystem off.

Turn the ONzOFF/VOLUME control knob toadjust the volume.

Adjusting tone quality and speakerbalance:

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade,push the Audio control knob. When the dis-play shows the setting you want to change(Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade), rotate theAudio control knob to set the desired set-ting. For the other setting methods, refer to“How to use SETTING button” earlier in thissection.

This vehicle has some sound effect func-tions as follows (if so equipped):

O BOSE Centerpoint

O BOSE AudioPilot

O Precision Phased Audio

O Speed sensitive Volume

For more details, see “Vehicle informationand settings” earlier in this section.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

RADIO (FM/AM/SAT) band select:

Pushing the RADIO band select button willchange the band as follows:

AM → FM → SAT (XM/SR) → AM

When the RADIO band select button ispushed while the ignition switch is in theACC or ON position, the radio will come onat the station last played.

The last station/channel played will alsocome on when the ONzOFF/VOL controlknob is pushed to ON.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped un-less an optional satellite receiver and antennaare installed, and an XM or SIRIUSTM satel-lite radio service subscription is active.

If another audio source is playing when theRADIO band select button is turned to ON,the other audio source will automaticallybe turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,the radio will automatically change fromstereo to monaural reception.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 190: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

TUNE (Tuning):

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned while drivingso full attention may be given to vehicle op-eration.

O For AM and FM radio

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob for manualtuning.

O For satellite radio

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to seekchannels from all of the categorieswhen any CAT is not selected.

SEEK/SCAN tuning:

O For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK/TRACK button orfor less than 1.5 seconds to tune

from high to low or low to high frequen-cies and to stop at each broadcastingstation for 5 seconds. Pushing thebutton again during this 5 second pe-riod will stop SCAN turning and theradio will remain tuned to that station.Push the SEEK/TRACK button or

for more than 1.5 seconds to tune

from high to low or low to high frequen-cies and to stop at each broadcastingstation for 5 seconds. Pushing thebutton again during this 5 second pe-riod will stop SCAN tuning and the radiowill remain tuned to that station.

O For satellite radio

After selecting a CAT name, push theSEEK/TRACK button or toseek the next or previous channel in theselected category. To seek the firstchannels listed in each category, pushthe SEEK/TRACK button or

before selecting a CAT name.

To cancel the CAT mode, push the BACK“ ” button on the INFINITI con-troller.

PRESET select:

Push the PRESET select button to go to thenext PRESET. After choosing from thePRESET A, B or C, you can select the desiredchannel using the INFINITI controller orpushing the station preset buttons to

.

to Station memoryoperations:

Six stations/channels can be set for

PRESET A, B and C. The PRESET A, B and Cfunction allows you to store a combinationof FM, AM and SAT (if so equipped) stationsfor easy access.

1. Choose preset channel A, B or C usingthe preset select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using theSEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.

3. Select the desired station/channel andkeep pushing any of the desired stationpreset buttons to until abeep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pushed.)

4. The channel indicator will then come onand the sound will resume. Memorizingis now complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the samemanner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or ifthe fuse blows, the radio memory will beerased. In that case, reset the desired sta-tions.

Audio Text:

When the “Audio Text” key is selected withthe INFINITI controller on the display andthen the ENTER “ ” button is pushed

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.2.14/Y50-D X

Page 191: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

while the satellite radio is being played,the text information will be displayed onthe screen.

O CH Name

O Category

O Name

O Title

O Other

If your vehicle is equipped with the AUDIOTEXT “ ” button on the center multi-function control panel, push this buttonwhile the satellite programming is selectedto show the text information.

CATEGORY (CAT):

When the button is pressed during FMmode, the PTY name of the current tunedstation is displayed. During this time if thePTY data code is zero, or the data is un-readable; the display will show NONE.

When the button is pressed duringthe satellite radio mode, the categoryname of the current channel is displayed.

When the button is pressed while theNAVI, STATUS or Menu screen is displayed,the CAT or PTY name of the present channel

will be displayed on the bottom of thescreen.

When the button is pressed while theAudio setting screen is displayed, the CATor PTY list will be displayed.

1. CAT selection mode

CAT name selection can be done byturning the TUNE/FOLDER knob in theCAT selection mode or by using themulti-function switch when the CAT listis displayed on the screen.

Pushing the button can alsochange the CAT name upward.

2. CAT SEEK tuning mode

After selecting a CAT name, push theSEEK/TRACK button or toseek the next or previous channel in theselected category.

To seek the first channels listed in each

category, push the SEEK/TRACK buttonor before entering the CAT

select mode.

To cancel the CAT mode, push the BACK“ ” button on the INFINITI con-troller.

3. CAT SCAN tuning mode

After selecting a CAT name, push theSEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5seconds to scan channels in the se-lected category, and stop at each chan-nel for 5 seconds. Pushing the buttonagain during this 5 second period willstop SCAN tuning and the radio will re-main tuned to that station.

To scan the first channels listed in eachcategory, push the SEEK/TRACK button

or for more than 1.5 secondsbefore entering the CAT select mode.

4. Information screen

The following notices will be displayedunder certain conditions.

O NO SIGNAL (No signal is received whilethe SAT tuner is connected.)

O OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Z 05.2.14/Y50-D X

Page 192: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O ANTENNA ERROR (Antenna connectionerror)

O LOADING(XM)/ACQUIRING(SR) (Whenthe initial setting is performed)

O UPDATING(XM)/CALL XXXX(SR) (Whenthe satellite radio subscription is notactive)

O INVALID CH (Invalid channel is re-ceived.)

Compact disc (CD) changeroperation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition, push the LOAD button and insertthe compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc willbe guided automatically into the slot andstart playing.

After loading the disc, the number of trackson the disc and the play time will appear onthe display.

If the radio is already operating, it will au-tomatically turn off and the compact discwill play.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into the slot.This could damage the player.

If the system has been turned off while thecompact disc was playing, pushing theONzOFF/VOL control knob will start thecompact disc.

CD LOAD:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push theLOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Se-lect the loading position by pushing the CDinsert select button to , then in-sert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in suc-cession, push the LOAD button for morethan 1.5 seconds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminateon the display.

DISC PLAY:

When the DISC (CD play) button is pushedwith the system off and the compact discloaded, the system will turn on and thecompact disc will start to play.

When the DISC button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded and the radio playing,the radio will automatically be turned offand the compact disc will start to play.

Audio Text:

When the “Audio Text” key is selected inthe screen using the INFINITI controllerand then the ENTER button is pushed whilethe CD is being played, the music informa-tion below will be displayed on the screen.

If your vehicle is equipped with the AUDIOTEXT “ ” button on the center multi-function control panel, push this buttonwhile the CD is being played to show themusic information below.

CD:

O Disc title

O Track title

CD with MP3 or WMA:

O Folder title

O File title

O Track title

O Artist

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.2.14/Y50-D X

Page 193: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

FF (Fast Forward), REW(Rewind)/APS (AutomaticProgram Search) FF, APSREW:

When the (rewind) or (fast for-ward) button is pushed for more than 1.5seconds while the compact disc is beingplayed, the compact disc will play whilefast forwarding or rewinding. When thebutton is released, the compact disc will re-turn to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushedfor less than 1.5 seconds while the com-pact disc is being played, the next track orthe beginning of the current track on the CDwill be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used toselect tracks when a CD is being played.

CD PLAY selection:

To change to another CD already loadedinto the player, push the CD play select

buttons to or choose a disc dis-played on the screen using the INFINITIcontroller.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while thecompact disc is played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:(CD)

(CD with MP3 or WMA)

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed withthe compact disc loaded, the compact discwill be ejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD selectbutton, push the EJECT button for less than1.5 seconds.

To eject all the discs, push the EJECT buttonfor more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while the com-pact disc is being played, the compact discwill come out and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is notremoved, it will be pulled back into the slotto protect it. (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diametercompact discs)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 194: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CD CARE AND CLEANING

O Handle a CD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc. Do not bendthe disc.

O Always place the discs in the storagecase when they are not being used.

O To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.Do not use a conventional recordcleaner or alcohol intended for indus-trial use.

O A new disc may be rough on the innerand outer edges. Remove the roughedges by rubbing the inner and outeredges with the side of a pen or pencilas illustrated.

1. ENTER switch2. BACK switch3. Volume control switches4. Source select switch

STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTEDCONTROLS FOR AUDIO

ENTER switch

Push the switch upward or downward toselect a channel, track, CD or folder whenthey are listed on the display. You canalso use the ENTER switch to select theitems on the usual setting menu screen.

SAA0451 SAA1107

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.11.19/Y50-D X

Page 195: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

After selecting an MP3 folder or Audio Textusing the up and down switch, push theENTER switch to complete the selection.

While the display is in the NAVI, STATUS orAudio setting screen, some audio functionscan also be controlled using the ENTERswitch. The function varies depending on ifyou push the switch shorter (less than 1.5seconds) or longer (more than 1.5 sec-onds).

RADIO:

O Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ”shorter

Next or previous preset channel

O Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ”longer

Next or previous station/channel

CD:

O Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ”shorter

Next track or the beginning of the cur-rent track

O Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ”longer

Disc change

CD with MP3/WMA:

O Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ”shorter

Next track or the beginning of the cur-rent track

O Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ”longer

Folder change (When the last folder ona disc is playing, the next disc will beselected.)

DVD (if so equipped):

O Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ”shorter

Next track/chapter or the beginning ofthe current track/chapter

O Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ”longer

Next group/title or the beginning of thecurrent group/title

BACK switch

Push this switch to go back to the previousscreen or cancel the selection if it is notcompleted.

Volume control switches

Push the upper (+) or lower (2) side switchto increase or decrease the volume.

“SOURCE” select switch

Push the source select switch to changethe mode in the sequence of radio PRESETA, PRESET B, PRESET C, CD changer andDVD drive/AUX (if so equipped).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

Z 05.2.14/Y50-D X

Page 196: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Volume control switch2. Tune/Track switch3. ON/OFF switch4. Source (SRC) select switch5. Display

REAR CONTROL SWITCHES FORAUDIO (if so equipped)

The audio system can also be operatedusing the rear controls.

Volume control switch

Push the “ ” (front) side or “ ”(rear) side of the switch to adjust thevolume.

“ ” Front side: Volume increases

“ ” Rear side: Volume decreases

Tune/Track switch

The function varies depending on if youpush the switch shorter (less than 1.5 sec-onds) or longer (more than 1.5 seconds).

RADIO:

O Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)“ ” shorter

Next or previous preset channel

O Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)“ ” longer

Next or previous station/channel

CD:

O Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)“ ” shorter

Next track or the beginning of the cur-rent track

O Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)“ ” longer

Disc change

CD with MP3/WMA:

O Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)“ ” shorter

Next track or the beginning of the cur-rent track

O Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)“ ” longer

Folder change (When the last folder ona disc is playing, the next disc will beselected.)

DVD (if so equipped):

O Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)“ ” shorter

Next track/chapter or the beginning ofthe current track/chapter

SAA1108

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 197: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Pushing DOWN (rear) “ ”/UP (front)“ ” longer

Next group/title or the beginning of thecurrent group/title

“ON/OFF” switch

With the ignition switch pushed to the ACCor ON position, push the “ON/OFF” switchto turn the audio system ON or OFF.

Source select switch

Push the “SRC” select switch to change themode in the sequence of radio PRESET A, B,C and CD changer. If your vehicle isequipped with a DVD drive, you can alsochoose them by pushing the “SRC” switch.When the CD changer is loaded, the modechanges to CD changer.

INFINITI MOBILE ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with the mobileentertainment system, which enables youto play a Digital Versatile Disc (DVD), pro-viding the images and sounds both in thefront and rear display screens.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate theDVD entertainment system while driving sofull attention may be given to vehicle opera-tion.

CAUTION

O Do not attempt to use the system in ex-tremely high or low temperature condi-tion [below −4°F (−20°C) or above 158°F(70°C)].

O To avoid draining the vehicle battery, donot operate the system for more than 15minutes without starting the engine.

The front display is designed not to show

the images while driving, as the driver’sattention must be given to vehicle opera-tion for safety. Sounds are available. Toshow the images in the front display, stopthe vehicle in a safe location, move the se-lector lever to the P (Park) position and ap-ply the parking brake.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

Z 05.2.1/Y50-D X

Page 198: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) systemcomponents

DVD drive:

The DVD slot is located inside of the centerconsole. Insert a DVD into the slot with thelabel side facing the front passenger’s seatside. The DVD will be guided automaticallyinto the slot.

When ejecting the DVD, push the EJECT but-ton j1 .

CAUTION

O Do not force a DVD into the slot. Thiscould cause damage the player.

O Do not use 8 cm (3.1 in) discs.

Displays:

WARNING

Park the vehicle in a safe location and applythe parking brake to view the images on thefront center display screen using the DVDdrive or other devices connected to the auxil-iary input jacks (if so equipped).

CAUTION

O The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass breaks, do nottouch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin,

wash immediately with soap and water.

O Use soft, damp cloth when cleaning theMobile Entertainment System compo-nents. Do not use solvents or cleaningsolutions.

O Be sure to stow the rear display when itis not used.

SAA1109

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 199: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Use the remote controller to operate theflip-down rear display screen.

1. Push the REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSEbutton on the remote controller to openor close the display.

2. Adjust the display angle by pushing theDISPLAY TILT button or .

The screen can also be opened using theINFINITI controller. See “How to use SET-TING button” earlier in this section.

Do not block the range of the wireless re-mote controller receiver and wireless head-phones transmitter j1 .

CAUTION

Do not touch the display when it is openingor closing.

Headphones:

Headphones are a wireless type and nocables are necessary. You can use them inalmost all the ranges in the rear seat for lis-tening to the sound from DVD or AUX. (It isnot possible to use the headphones in thefront seat.)

O Power ON/OFF

Push the POWER button to turn theheadphones on or off.

SAA0719BFlip-down screen

SAA0720

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 200: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Volume control

Turn the volume control knob to adjustthe volume.

The headphones will automatically beturned off in about 5 minutes if there is nosound during that period. To prevent thebattery from being discharged, keep thepower turned off when not in use.

If the sound from the headphones is notclear it may be because:

O of an infrared communication device orcellular phone, turn down the head-

phone volume or stop using the head-phones, or

O the headphones maybe out of the rangeof the transmitter installed in the rearflip-down display screen. This is not amalfunction, or

O the sound may be interrupted tempo-rarily when there is an obstacle be-tween the headphones and the trans-mitter. Remove the obstacle, such asopaque materials, hands, hair, etc.

SAA0721

SAA1110Type A

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 201: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Remote controller:

The remote controller has the followingcontrols:

1. REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSE button

2. Joystick

3. ENTER button

4. DVD button

5. DISP button

6. VOLUME CONTROL button( or )

7. Headphones button

8. TRACK/CHANNEL button( or )

9. RADIO button

10. DISPLAY TILT button( or )

11. BACK button

12. AUX button

13. ASPECT button

14. SOUND button

15. Keypad

16. CD button

For each function of the buttons, see page4-55 later in this section.

Remote controller and headphonesbattery replacement

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid.

2. Replace both batteries with new ones.

O Size AA (remote control)

O Size AAA (headphones)

SAA1251Type B

SAA0978

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 202: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Make sure that the ! and @ ends on thebatteries match the markings inside thecompartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 3above.

O If you will not be using the remote con-trol for long periods of time, removethe batteries.

O Replacement of the batteries is neededwhen the remote control only functions

at extremely close distances to theMES or not at all.

O Be careful not to touch the battery ter-minal.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

O When changing batteries, do not letdust or oil get on the remote controland headphones.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of thedevice.

Before operating the DVDentertainment system

Precautions:

Start the engine when using the DVD enter-tainment system.

WARNING

O The driver must not attempt to operate theDVD system or wear the headphones whilethe vehicle is in motion so that full atten-tion may be given to vehicle operation.

CAUTION

O Only operate the DVD while the vehicleengine is running. Operating the DVD forextended periods of time with the engineOFF can discharge the vehicle battery.

O Do not allow the system to get wet. Ex-cessive moisture such as spilled liquidsmay cause the system to malfunction.

O While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVDplayer does not guarantee completefunctionality of all VIDEO-CD formats.

Copyright and trademark:

O The technology protected by the U.S.patent and other intellectual property

SAA0723

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 203: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

rights owned by Macrovision Corpora-tion and other right holders is adoptedfor this system.

O This copyright protected technologycannot be used without a permit fromMacrovision Corporation. It is limitedto be personal use, etc., as long as thepermit from Macrovision Corporation isnot issued.

O Modifying or disassembling is prohib-ited.

O Dolby digital is manufactured under li-cense from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

O Dolby and the double D mark “ ”are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories,Inc.

O DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ”are registered trademarks of DigitalTheater Systems, Inc.

Parental level (parental control):

DVDs with the parental control setting canbe played with this system. Please useyour own judgement to set the parentalcontrol with the system.

Disc selection:

You can play the following disc formatswith the DVD drive:

O DVD-VIDEO

O DVD-AUDIO

O VIDEO-CD

O CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CDwith MP3/WMA cannot be played.)

Use DVDs with a region code “1”, “ALL” or “1included” for your DVD entertainment system.(The region code is displayed as a smallsymbol printed on the top of the DVD.) Thisvehicle-installed DVD player cannot play DVDswith a region code other than “1” or “ALL”.

Display settings:

O Front display

To adjust the front display mode, pushthe SETTING “ ” button while theDVD is being played, select the “Dis-play” key with the INFINITI controller,and then push the ENTER“ ” button.

To adjust the display ON/OFF, bright-ness, tint, color and contrast, selecteach key using the INFINITI controllerand push the ENTER “ ” button.

Then you can adjust each item usingthe INFINITI controller.

O Rear display

To adjust the rear display mode, pushthe “DISP” (Display) button on the re-mote controller.

To adjust the display brightness, tint,color and contrast, select each key usingthe joystick on the remote controller andtilt the joystick to right or left.

Push the BACK button to apply the set-tings and return to the previous display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 204: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Playing a Digital Versatile Disc(DVD)

Park the vehicle in a safe location for thefront seat occupants to operate the DVDdrive while watching the images.

Push the “DISC” button on the instrumentpanel and turn the display to the DVDmode.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayedautomatically.

The operation screen will be turned onwhen the “DISC” button located on the in-strument panel is pushed while a DVD is

being played, and it will turn off automati-cally after a period of time. To turn it onagain, push the “DISC” button once more.

To operate the DVD drive, select the pre-ferred key displayed on the operationscreen using the INFINITI controller.

PAUSE:

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER“ ” button to pause the DVD. To re-sume playing the DVD, use the “PLAY” key.

To pause the DVD, it is also possible topush the “jA ” (Type A) or (Type B) but-ton on the keypad of the remote controller.

PLAY:

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER“ ” button to start playing the DVD,for example, after pausing the DVD.

To start playing the DVD, it is also possibleto push the “jA ” (Type A) or (Type B)button on the keypad of the remote con-troller.

STOP:

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER“ ” button to stop playing the DVD.

To stop playing the DVD, it is also possibleto push the “jD ” (Type A) or (Type B)

button on the keypad of the remote con-troller.

SKIP (FORWARD):

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER“ ” button to skip the chapter(s) ofthe disc forward. The chapters will advancethe number of times the ENTER “ ”button is pushed.

To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is alsopossible to push the “jB ” (Type A) or

(Type B) button on the keypad of theremote controller.

SKIP (REWIND):

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER“ ” button to skip the chapter(s) ofthe disc backward. The chapters will goback the number of times the ENTER“ ” button is pushed.

To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is alsopossible to push the “jE ” (Type A) or

(Type B) button on the keypad of theremote controller.

NEXT:

This function is only for DVD-AUDIO.

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER“ ” button to advance the still image.

SAA1112Operation screen — DVD AUDIO

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 205: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The still image will advance the number oftimes the ENTER “ ” button ispushed.

To advance the still image(s) forward, it isalso possible to push the “jC ” (Type A) or

(Type B) button on the keypad of theremote controller.

PREV:

This function is only for DVD-AUDIO.

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER“ ” button to rewind the still image.The still image will go back the number oftimes the ENTER “ ” button ispushed.

To rewind the still image(s), it is also pos-sible to push the “jF ” (Type A) or

(Type B) button on the keypad of theremote controller.

Settings/AUX:

Select the “Settings/AUX” key with theINFINITI controller and push the ENTER“ ” button to adjust the followingsettings.

The items indicated with “*” can also beset from the rear display. Push the “DVD”button on the remote controller while aDVD is being played. Select the preferreditem using the joystick “ ” on the re-mote controller and push the ENTER“ ” button.

O AUX

Switch the output source from the DVDdrive to another device connected tothe auxiliary input jacks.

O Menu* (DVD-VIDEO)

Some menus specific to each disc willbe shown. For details, see the instruc-tions attached to the disc.

O Top Menu* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)

Each title menu in the disc will beshown. For details, see the instructionsattached to the disc.

SAA1190Settings (front) — DVD VIDEO

SAA1191Settings (front) — DVD VIDEO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 206: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Audio* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO,VIDEO-CD) / Subtitle* (DVD-VIDEO,DVD-AUDIO)

Choose the preferred language usingthe INFINITI controller and push theENTER “ ” button.

To turn off the subtitle, push and holdthe ENTER “ ” button until a beepsounds.

O Surround Information* (DVD-VIDEO,DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO-CD, CD-DA)(Models equipped with BOSE Sur-round Sound System)

Select the “Surround Information” keyand push the ENTER “ ” button.The surround information screen willappear.

Push the BACK “ ” button to returnto the previous screen.

O Display Mode* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO-CD)

Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”,“Normal” or “Cinema” mode using theINFINITI controller and push the ENTER“ ” button again.

O Angle* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)

If the DVD contains different angles(such as moving images), the currentimage angle can be switched to anotherone.

Select the “Angle” key and push theENTER “ ” button. When the “+”side or “−” side is selected, the anglewill change.

O Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)

When this item is turned on, an anglemark will be shown on the bottom of

SAA1192Settings (front) — DVD VIDEO

SAA1193Settings (rear) — DVD VIDEO

SAA1194Settings (rear) — DVD VIDEO

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 207: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

the screen if the scene can be seen froma different angle.

O 10 Key Search* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO-CD, CD-DA)

Select the “10 Key Search” key andpush the ENTER “ ” button toopen the number entry screen.

Input the number you want to searchfor and select the “OK” key with theINFINITI controller. Then push theENTER “ ” button. The specifiedTitle/Chapter or Group/Track will beplayed.

O Title Search* (DVD-VIDEO)

The scene with the specified title will bedisplayed the number of times the “+”side or “−” side is selected.

O Group Search* (DVD-AUDIO)

The scene with the specified group willbe displayed the number of times the“+” side or “−” side is selected.

O Select No.* (VIDEO-CD)

Select the “Select No.” key and pushthe ENTER “ ” button to open thenumber entry screen.

Input the number you want to searchfor and select the “OK” key with theINFINITI controller. Then push theENTER “ ” button. The specifiedscene will be played.

O Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)

DVD menus are automatically config-ured and the contents will be played di-rectly when the “Menu Skip” key isturned on. Note that some discs maynot be played directly even if this itemis turned on.

O DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO-CD)

Select the “DVD Language” key andpush the ENTER “ ” button toopen the number entry screen.

Input the number corresponding to thepreferred language and select the “OK”key with the INFINITI controller. Thenpush the ENTER “ ” button. TheDVD top menu language will bechanged to the one specified.

O DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) al-lows you to tune the dynamic range ofthe sound recorded in the Dolby Digitalformat.

O DOWN MIX (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)

Convert a multi-channel recording to atraditional two-channel (stereo) re-cording.

Remote controller operation

Use the remote controller to adjust the fol-lowing items.

Rear display open/close:

To open or close the flip-down rear display,push the “ ” button on the remote con-troller.

SAA1195Settings (rear) — DVD VIDEO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 208: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Joystick:

Use the joystick “ ” to select the itemsdisplayed on the rear screen.

ENTER button:

Push the ENTER “ ” button to make theselected item complete on the rear screen.

BACK button:

Press to go back to the previous screen orcancel the selection.

Display tilt:

Adjust the display angle by pushing the“DISPLAY TILT” button or .

DVD/AUX/RADIO/CD mode:

To select the DVD, AUX (Auxiliary inputjacks), radio or CD mode, push the desiredbutton.

Volume:

To control the volume level, push the “VOL”button or .

Display:

Press to adjust the rear display screenbrightness, tint, contrast, etc.

Aspect:

To change the display size, push the “AS-PECT” button. Each time the button ispushed, the display size will change to“Cinema”, “Wide”, “Full” or “Normal”.

Sound:

To change the language, push the“SOUND” button. Each time the button ispushed, the language will change to eachlanguage stored in the DVD.

Headphones:

When the HEADPHONES MODE is selected,the DVD sound can be heard through theheadphones.

Push the “ ” button. Each time thebutton is pushed the mode will switch toON or OFF.

To control the volume of sound from theheadphones, use the VOLUME CONTROLknob attached to the headphones.

Track/Channel:

Press to skip to the previous or next radiostation, CD track or DVD scene selection.

Keypad:

jA : PLAY/PAUSE button

jD : STOP button

jB : FORWARD button

jE : REWIND button

jC : FORWARD button for still images(for DVD-AUDIO)

jF : REWIND button for still images (forDVD-AUDIO)

Care and maintenance

Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth toclean the surfaces of your Mobile Entertain-ment System. (DVD player face, screen, re-mote controller, etc.)

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 209: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

O Do not use any solvents or cleaning solu-tions when cleaning the video system.

O Do not use excessive force on themonitor screen.

O Avoid touching or scratching the monitorscreen as it may become dirty or dam-aged.

O Do not attempt to operate the system inextreme temperature conditions [below−4°F (−20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)].

O Do not attempt to operate the system inextreme humidity conditions (less than10% or more than 75%).

How to handle the DVD

CAUTION

O Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc.

O To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean,soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using acircular motion.

O Do not use a conventional record

cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-tended for industrial use.

O A new disc may be rough on its inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edgesusing the side of a pen or pencil as illus-trated.

O Never attempt to use a DVD that hasbeen cracked, deformed, or repairedusing adhesive. Doing so may causedamage to the equipment.

O Handle the DVD carefully to avoid con-tamination or flaws. Otherwise, signalsmay not be read properly.

O Do not write, draw or attach anythingon any side of the DVD.

O Do not store the DVD in locations withdirect sunlight or in high temperaturesor humidity.

O Always place discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

O Do not put on any sticker or write any-thing on either surface of the DVD.

SAA0451

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 210: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Auxiliary input jacks (if soequipped)

The auxiliary input jacks are located on therear side of the center console. NTSC com-patible devices such as video games, cam-corders and portable video players can beconnected to the auxiliary jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for iden-tification purposes.

O Yellow - video input

O White - left channel audio input

O Red - right channel audio input

Before connecting a device to a jack, poweroff the portable device and turn off the DVDplayer.

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside therear window.

CAUTION

O Do not place metalized film near the rearwindow glass or attach any metal partsto it. This may cause poor reception ornoise.

O When cleaning the inside of the rear win-dow, be careful not to scratch or damagethe rear window antenna. Lightly wipealong the antenna with a dampened softcloth.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a car phone or a CB radio inyour INFINITI, be sure to observe the fol-lowing cautions, otherwise the new equip-ment may adversely affect the electronic

control modules and electronic control sys-tem harness.

WARNING

O A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

O If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands-free cellularphone operational mode (if so equipped)is highly recommended. Exercise ex-treme caution at all times so full atten-tion may be given to vehicle operation.

O If a conversation in a moving vehicle re-quires you to take notes, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop your vehiclebefore doing so.

SIC2773

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 211: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

O Keep the antenna as far away as possiblefrom the electronic control modules.

O Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20cm) away from the electronic control sys-tem harness. Do not route the antennawire next to any harness.

O Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

O Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

O For details, consult an INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

O Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

O If a conversation in a moving vehicle re-quires you to take notes, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop your vehiclebefore doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use aphone after starting the engine.

BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

Z 05.2.1/Y50-D X

Page 212: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Your INFINITI is equipped with theBluetooth Hands-Free Phone system. Ifyou are an owner of a Bluetooth enabledcellular phone, you can set up the wirelessconnection between your cellular phoneand the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth wireless technology, you canmake or receive a telephone call with yourcellular phone in your pocket.

Once your cellular phone is paired to thein-vehicle phone module, no phone con-necting procedure is required anymore.

Your phone is automatically connectedwith the in-vehicle phone module when theignition switch is pushed to the ON posi-tion with the registered cellular phoneturned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 differentBluetooth cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module. However, you cantalk on only one cellular phone at a time.

INFINITI Voice Recognition system (if soequipped) supports the phone commands,so dialing a phone number using your voiceis possible. For more details, see INFINITIVoice Recognition System later in this sec-tion.

INFINITI Voice Recognition will be acti-vated when the system language is set toEnglish. If French is selected, INFINITIVoice Recognition will not operate whenthe TALK switch on the steeringwheelmounted controls is pushed. See 9How touse SETTING button9 earlier in this section.

Before using the Bluetooth hands-freephone system, refer to the following notes.

O Set up the wireless connection betweena cellular phone and the in-vehiclephone module before using the hands-free phone system.

SAA1120

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 213: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Some Bluetooth enabled cellularphones may not be recognized by thein-vehicle phone module. Please visitwww.infiniti.com/bluetooth for a rec-ommended phone list.

O You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

- Your vehicle is outside of the tele-phone service area.

- Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive radio waves; suchas in a tunnel, in an undergroundparking garage, behind a tall buildingor in a mountainous area.

- Your cellular phone is locked in ordernot to be dialed.

O When the radio wave condition is toobad or ambient sound is too loud, itmay be difficult to hear the other per-son’s voice during a call.

O Immediately after the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position or theDVD-ROM for the navigation system isinserted into the player (if soequipped), it may be impossible to re-ceive a call for a short period of time.

O Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far awayfrom the in-vehicle phone module toprevent tone quality degradation andwireless connection disruption.

O While a cellular phone is connectedthrough the Bluetooth wireless connec-tion, the battery power of the cellularphone may discharge quicker than usual.

O If the hands-free phone system seemsto be malfunctioning, please visitwww.infiniti.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

O Refer to the cellular phone Owner’sManual regarding the telephonecharges, cellular phone antenna andbody, etc.

O The antenna display on the monitor willnot coincide with the antenna displayof some cellular phones.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) this device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-trolled environment. This equipmentshould be installed and operated withminimum distance 8 inch (20 cm) betweenthe radiator and your body. This Trans-mitter must not be co-located or operatingin conjunction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

Z 05.7.29/Y50-D X

Page 214: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

PAIRING PROCEDURE

1. Push the SETTING “ ” button, andselect the “PHONE” key on the displayusing the INFINITI controller. Thenpush the ENTER “ ” button.

2. Select the “Bluetooth Setup” key, andpush the ENTER “ ” button.

3. Select the “Pair Phone” key, and pushthe ENTER “ ” button.

4. When a PIN code appears on thescreen, operate the Bluetooth cellularphone to enter the PIN code. The pair-

ing procedure of the cellular phone var-ies according to each cellular phonemanufacturer. See the cellular phoneOwner’s Manual for the details.

5. When the pairing is completed, thescreen will return to the Bluetoothsetup display.

SAA1114 SAA1115 SAA1116

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.7.29/Y50-D X

Page 215: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION

Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored inthe phonebook.

1. Push the SETTING “ ” button, andselect the “PHONE” key on the displayusing the INFINITI controller. Thenpush the ENTER “ ” button.

2. Select the “Phonebook” key, and pushthe ENTER “ ” button.

3. Select the “None (Add New)” key fromthe name list of the phonebook, andpush the ENTER “ ” button.

4. Select the “Bluetooth” key, and pushthe ENTER “ ” button in order toregister your cellular phone memory inthe phonebook.

5. Operate the cellular phone to send aperson’s name and phone number fromthe memory of the cellular phone. Thememory sending procedure from thecellular phone varies according to eachcellular phone manufacturer. See thecellular phone Owner’s Manual formore details.

6. If you want to add a voice tag, select“YES” on the “Add a voice tag?”

screen. For example, if the partner’sname is David, speak “David” whilethe “Store voice tag” screen is on thedisplay. The “David” voice tag is storedin the phonebook. Voice tag is a usefulfunction for easy dialing supported bythe voice recognition system. See“INFINITI Voice Recognition system”later in this section.

7. When the phonebook registration iscompleted, the screen will return to thename list of the phonebook.

There are different methods to input aphone number. Select one of the following

SAA1117 SAA1118 SAA1119

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 216: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

options instead of “Bluetooth” in step 4above.

Keypad:

Input the name and phone number manually.

Outgoing Calls:

Store the name and phone number fromthe outgoing call list.

Incoming Calls:

Store the name and phone number fromthe incoming call list.

To delete an item, Select the “Delete item”key and push the ENTER “ ” button.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the proceduresbelow.

1. Push the PHONE “ ” button on the in-strument panel or the “ ” button onthe steering-wheel-mounted controlsfor more than 1 second. The “PHONE”screen will appear on the display.

2. Select the “Phonebook” key on the“PHONE” menu, and push the ENTER“ ” button.

3. Select the registered person’s namefrom the list, and push the ENTER

“ ” button. Dialing will start.

4. After the call is over, perform one of thefollowing to finish the call.

a.Select the “Hang up” key and pushthe ENTER “ ” button.

b.Push and hold the “ ” button onthe steering-wheel-mounted controlsfor 1.5 seconds.

c. Push the PHONE “ ” button on theinstrument panel.

There are different methods to make a call.Select one of the following options insteadof “Phonebook” in step 2 above.

Redial:

Dial the previously dialed number again.

Call Logs - Outgoing Calls:

Select the name and phone number fromthe outgoing call logs.

Call Logs - Incoming Calls:

Select the name and phone number fromthe incoming call logs.

Dial Keypad:

Input the phone number manually.

SAA1121

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.7.29/Y50-D X

Page 217: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the displaywill change to the ON HOLD mode. To re-ceive a call, follow the three procedureslisted below.

a. Select the “Answer” key on the displayand push the ENTER “ ” button.

b. Push the PHONE “ ” button on the in-strument panel.

c. Push the “ ” button on thesteering-wheel-mounted controls.

There are some options available when re-

ceiving a call. Select one of the followingdisplayed on the screen.

Answer:

Accept an incoming call to talk.

Hang up:

Reject an incoming call.

Handset:

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

To finish the call, follow the three proce-dures listed below.

a. Select the “Hang up” key on the displayand push the ENTER “ ” button.

b. Push the PHONE “ ” button on the in-strument panel.

c. Push and hold the “ ” button onthe steering-wheel-mounted controlsfor 1.5 seconds.

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during acall. Select one of the following displayedon the screen if necessary.

Hang up:

Finish the call.

Handset:

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Mute:

Mute your voice to the person.

SAA1122 SAA1123

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

Z 05.7.29/Y50-D X

Page 218: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Cancel Mute:

This will appear after “Mute” is selected.Mute will be cancelled.

Dial:

Input specific numbers related to theperson.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder orquieter, push the volume control switch lo-cated on the steering-wheel-mounted con-trols or turn the volume control knob on theinstrument panel while talking on thephone. This adjustment is also available inthe SETTING mode.

PHONE SETTING

To set up the hands-free phone system toyour preferred settings, push the SETTING“ ” button on the instrument panel andselect the “PHONE” key on the display, andthen push the ENTER“ ” button.

Phonebook:

See “Phonebook registration” in this sec-tion.

Delete Call Logs:

Delete all the outgoing or incoming calllogs from the list

Phone Ringer Vol:

Adjust the ring volume to be louder (+) orquieter (2).

Phone Incoming Vol:

Adjust the phone incoming volume to belouder (+) or quieter (2).

Phone Outgoing Vol:

Adjust the phone outgoing volume to belouder (+) or quieter (2).

Automatic Hold:

If this item is turned on, an incoming callwill be placed on hold automatically afterseveral rings.

Use Vehicle Ringtone:

If this item is turned on, a specific ringtonethat is different from the cellular phone’swill sound when receiving a call.

Bluetooth Setup:

See the following information for eachitem.

O Bluetooth Handsfree

If this item is turned off, the connectionbetween the cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module will be canceled.

O Paired Phone List

Up to 5 registered cellular phones areshown on the list.

O Pair Phone

See “Pairing Procedure” in this section.

O Remove Paired Phone

Delete a registered cellular phone fromthe paired list.

O Bluetooth Info

Check information about the devicename, device address and device PIN.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 219: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The INFINITI Voice Recognition system al-lows hands-free operation of the systemsequipped on this vehicle, such as the dis-play, audio, climate control, phone and op-tional navigation systems.

INFINITI Voice Recognition will be acti-vated when the system language is set toEnglish. If French is selected, INFINITIVoice Recognition will not operate whenthe TALK switch on the steering-wheel-mounted controls is pushed. See “How touse SETTING button” earlier in this section.

To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition,push and release the TALK “ ” switchlocated on the steering wheel. Then speakthe command for the system you wish toactivate. The command given is picked upby the microphone, and it is performedwhen it is properly recognized. At this timeINFINITI Voice Recognition will provide avoice and message (in the center display)to inform you of the command results.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition isinitialized, which takes a few seconds.When completed, the system is ready to ac-

cept voice commands. If the TALK switch ispushed before the initialization completes,the display will show the message: “Pho-netic data downloaded. Please wait.”

Giving voice commands

1. Push and release the TALK switch lo-cated on the steering-wheel-mountedcontrols.

2. The system announces, “Please say acommand after a tone.”

3. After the tone sounds and the face iconof the display changes, speak a com-mand. (Refer to “List of voice com-mands” later in this section for thecommands available.)

4. Voice and message feedback will be

SAA1113

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM(if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 220: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

provided when the command is ac-cepted.

O If the command is not recognized, thesystem announces, “Please say again.”Repeat the command in a clear voice.

O If you want to cancel the command,push and hold the TALK switch for 2seconds during feedback. The systemwill announce “Voice canceled”.

O If you want to adjust the volume of thevoice feedback, push the volume con-trol switches (+ or −) on the steeringwheel while being provided with thefeedback.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out ofINFINITI Voice Recognition, observe thefollowing:

O Keep the interior of the vehicle as quietas possible. Close the windows toeliminate the surrounding noises(traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),which may prevent the system from rec-ognizing the voice commands correctly.

O When the climate control is in the“AUTO” mode, the fan speed decreasesautomatically for easy recognition.

O Wait until a tone sounds beforespeaking a command. Otherwise, thecommand will not be received properly.

O Start speaking a command within 8seconds after the tone sounds.

O Speak in a natural voice withoutpausing between words.

SYSTEM FEATURES

INFINITI Voice Recognition can activatethe following systems:

O Hands-free phone

O Navigation (if so equipped)

O Audio (radio, CD and DVD — if soequipped)

O Automatic climate control

O Vehicle information display

For the detailed operations, refer to eachdescription in this Owner’s Manual. For thenavigation system, see a separate Naviga-tion System Owner’s Manual.

How to say numbers

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer-tain way to speak numbers in voice com-mands. Refer to the following examples.

(General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can beused for “0”).

Radio frequencies:

Speak radio frequencies according to thefollowing examples:

O “Tune nine thirty AM” or “Tune ninethirty” (930 kHz).

O “Tune one thousand” (1000 kHz).

O “Tune ten forty” (1040 kHz).

O “Tune seventeen ten” (1710 kHz).

O “Tune ninety seven point nine” (97.9MHz).

O “Tune one hundred point five” (100.5MHz).

O “Tune one oh one point one FM” (101.1MHz).

Temperatures (climate control):

Speak temperatures according to the fol-lowing examples:

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 221: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O “Temperature seventy four” (74°F).

O “Temperature twenty one point five” or“Temperature twenty one and a half”(21.5°C).

O “Temperature nineteen point zero”,“Temperature nineteen point oh” or“Temperature nineteen” (19.0°C).

Phone numbers:

Speak phone numbers according to the fol-lowing examples:

O 1-800-662-6200

- “Dial one eight oh oh six six two sixtwo oh oh”,

- “Dial one eight hundred six six twosix two oh oh”, or

- “Dial one eight zero zero six six twooh oh”.

Note 1: For the best voice recognitionphone dialing results, say phone numbersas single digits.

Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “fivefive five six thousands”.

Personal vocabulary (voicetags)

INFINITI Voice Recognition provides thefunction called “voicetags,” which can be

associated with the phone and the naviga-tion system (if so equipped). Using yourown voice, 40 voicetags can be registeredin the “Phonebook” (phone) and 10 loca-tions can be registered in the “AddressBook” (navigation system).

See “Bluetooth hands-free phonesystem” earlier in this section and/or theseparate Navigation System Owner’sManual (if so equipped) for the method of“voicetag” registration.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Depending on the commands, some dif-ferent phrases are available. Optionalwords are shown in brackets [ ]. A fewwords, identified with a slash /, indicatethe alternate words that you can selectwhen speaking the command. Data itemsthat you need to enter, such as phone num-bers, are indicated in italics with brackets< >.

How to say commands

Example 1: “[CLIMATE/CLIMATE CONTROL]TEMPERATURE DOWN/COOLER” stands forthe following commands.

1. TEMPERATURE DOWN

2. TEMPERATURE COOLER

3. CLIMATE TEMPERATURE DOWN

4. CLIMATE TEMPERATURE COOLER

5. CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATUREDOWN

6. CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURECOOLER

Example 2: “[PHONE] DIAL/CALL <phonenumber digits>” stands for the followingcommands.

1. DIAL <1 to 16 phone number digits>

2. CALL <1 to 16 phone number digits>

3. PHONE DIAL <1 to 16 phone numberdigits>

4. PHONE CALL <1 to 16 phone numberdigits>

Help commands

O “[SHOW] VOICE COMMANDS”, “VOICEHELP” or “[SHOW] [VOICE] COMMANDLIST”

Gives spoken information aboutINFINITI Voice Recognition and dis-plays the list of help commands.

O “AUDIO HELP”

Gives spoken information about the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 222: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

general audio system voice commandsand displays the list of them.

O “(CD/MP3) [CHANGER/DJ] HELP”

Gives spoken information about the CDchanger voice commands and displaysthe list of them.

O “DVD HELP”

Gives spoken information about theDVD player voice commands and dis-plays the list of them (if so equipped).

O “RADIO HELP”

Gives spoken information about theradio voice commands and displays thelist of them.

O “CLIMATE [CONTROL] HELP”

Gives spoken information about the cli-mate control voice commands and dis-plays the list of them.

O “(INFO/INFORMATION) HELP”

Gives spoken information about the ve-hicle information voice commands anddisplays the list of them.

O “(PHONE/TELEPHONE) HELP”

Gives spoken information about the

phone voice commands and displaysthe list of them.

O “NAVIGATION HELP”

Gives spoken information about thenavigation system voice commandsand displays the list of them (if soequipped).

Audio system commands

CD changer:

General: Say numbers where the followingwords are placed.

<disc number> 1 to 6

<track number> 1 to 512

<folder number> 1 to 255

O “CD/MP3 [ON/PLAY/PLAYER]”

Starts to play the CD changer.

O “[CD/MP3] [PLAY/SELECT] DISC <discnumber>”

Switches to the specified disc.

O “[CD/MP3] [PLAY/SELECT] DISC <discnumber> TRACK <track number>”

Switches to the specified track on thespecified disc.

O “[CD/MP3] [PLAY/SELECT] FOLDER<folder number>”

Selects the specified MP3 folder andplays the first file.

O “[CD/MP3] [PLAY/SELECT] TRACK<track number>”

Switches to the specified track.

DVD player (if so equipped):

General: Say numbers where the followingwords are placed.

<title number> 1 to 99 (DVD-VIDEO)

<group number> 1 to 9 (DVD-AUDIO)

<chapter number> 1 to 999 (DVD-VIDEO)

<track number> 1 to 99 (VIDEO-CD,CD-DA)

O “DVD [ON/PLAY/PLAYER]”

Turns the DVD player on, selecting thetrack last played.

O “DVD STOP”

Stops playing the DVD (DVD systemstays on).

O “[DVD] [PLAY/SELECT] TITLE <titlenumber>”

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 223: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Switches to the specified DVD title.

O “[DVD] [PLAY/SELECT] GROUP <groupnumber>”

Switches to the specified DVD group.

O “[DVD] [PLAY/SELECT] TITLE <titlenumber> CHAPTER <chapter num-ber>”

Switches to the specified DVD title onthe specified chapter.

O “[DVD] [PLAY/SELECT] GROUP <groupnumber> TRACK <track number>”

Switches to the specified DVD group onthe specified track.

O “DVD [PLAY/SELECT] TRACK <tracknumber>”

Switches to the specified DVD track.

O “[DVD] [PLAY/SELECT] CHAPTER<chapter number>”

Switches to the specified DVD chapter.

Note: DVD commands are available while aDVD is being played. “DVD [ON/PLAY/PLAYER]” and “DVD HELP” are available anytime.

Radio commands

O “RADIO PLAY”

Turns the radio on, selecting the stationand band last played.

O “[RADIO] [TUNE [TO]] AM/FM”

Turns to the band given in the com-mand, selecting the station last played.

O “[RADIO] [TUNE [TO]] SAT/SATELLITE”

Turns to the SAT radio, selecting thestation last played.

O “[RADIO] [TUNE [TO]] [SATELLITE/SAT]CHANNEL <channel number (1 to255)> [SAT]”

Tunes to the specified SAT radiochannel.

O “[RADIO] [TUNE [TO]] PRESET <presetbank (A to C)> <preset number (1 to6)>”

Switches directly to the specifiedpreset station in the specified presetbank.

O “[RADIO] [TUNE [TO]] <frequency>[AM/ FM]”

Tunes to the specified frequency.

Climate control commands

General: Speak temperature where theword <degree> is located (60 to 90 forFahrenheit, 18 to 32 for Centigrade) in thefollowing examples.

O “(CLIMATE/CLIMATE CONTROL) (AUTO/AUTOMATIC)”

Turns the climate control system on andoperates it in AUTO mode

O “[CLIMATE/CLIMATE CONTROL] [SET/SELECT] [DRIVER] TEMPERATURE [TO]<degree>”

Sets the climate control temperature tothe value given in the command. (Whenthe dual mode is selected, only the driv-er’s side temperature will be changed.)

O “[CLIMATE/CLIMATE CONTROL] [SET/SELECT] PASSENGER TEMPERATURE[TO] <degree>”Sets the passenger’s side temperatureto the value given in the command.

O “[CLIMATE/CLIMATE CONTROL] TEM-PERATURE UP/WARMER”

Changes temperature increment by 2degrees. (When the dual mode is se-lected, only the driver’s side tempera-ture will be changed.)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 224: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O “[CLIMATE/CLIMATE CONTROL] TEM-PERATURE DOWN/COOLER”

Changes temperature decrements by 2degrees. (When the dual mode is se-lected, only the driver’s side tempera-ture will be changed.)

Vehicle information commands

General: The display will be switched to thescreen given in the command.

O “FUEL ECONOMY”

O “MAINTENANCE”

O “TIRE PRESSURE”

O “TRIP COMPUTER”

Phone commands

O “[PHONE] DIAL/CALL <phone numberdigits>”

Dials the phone number given in thecommand. Speak the phone number inone sequence. The number is automati-cally dialed.

O “[PHONE] DIAL/CALL <voicetag>”

Dials the phone number registered inthe specified “voicetag”.

O “[PHONE] (DIAL/CALL) MEMORY <mem-

ory location number>”

Dials the speed dial stored in the speci-fied memory location number (1 to 40).

O “PHONE [PLAY] DIRECTORY”

Dials the phone number registered inthe phonebook.

O “PHONE ENTER <phone number dig-its>”

Enters the phone number given in thecommand. You can speak the phonenumber in several parts. After enteringthe number, say “Dial”.

O “PHONE (DISPLAY/SCREEN/MENU)”

Displays the phone screen (the sameresponse as pushing and holding theTALK switch).

O “[PHONE] REDIAL”

Redials the phone number last dialed.

O “[PHONE] INCOMING CALLS”

Shows the incoming call history (1 to5).

O “[PHONE] OUTGOING CALLS”

Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).

O “PHONEBOOK”

Shows the first page of the “Phone-book” list.

Navigation system commands (if soequipped)

See the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for the voice commands avail-able and operations.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 225: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given inthis guide for the appropriate error.Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message SolutionDisplays “COMMAND NOT REC-OGNIZED” or the system fails tointerpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see Command list in this section.2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.NOTE:If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

The system consistently selectsthe wrong voicetag.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Radio Directory orPhone Directory command.

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 226: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ............... 5-2Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ................... 5-2Three-way catalyst....................................... 5-3Low tire pressure warning system ................ 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover ..................... 5-5Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving .............. 5-5All-Wheel Drive (AWD) driving safetyprecautions (For AWD models) ..................... 5-6

Push-button ignition switch............................... 5-6Push-button ignition switch positions .......... 5-7Intelligent Key battery discharge ................. 5-8

Before starting the engine................................. 5-9Starting the engine ........................................... 5-9Driving the vehicle .......................................... 5-10

Automatic transmission ............................. 5-10Parking brake ................................................. 5-14Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system (if soequipped)....................................................... 5-15

Precautions on lane departure warningsystem ...................................................... 5-15Lane departure warning systemoperation .................................................. 5-16

Cruise control ................................................. 5-18Precautions on cruise control ..................... 5-18

Cruise control operations........................... 5-19Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (if soequipped)....................................................... 5-20

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode............................................. 5-21Vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode ........................................................ 5-22Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode ............................................ 5-22Vehicle-to-vehicle distance modeoperation .................................................. 5-24Conventional (fixed speed) cruise controlmode ........................................................ 5-37Preview function (for Intelligent CruiseControl system equipped models) .............. 5-41

Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-42Increasing fuel economy ................................. 5-42All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped)............. 5-43Parking/parking on hills.................................. 5-44Power steering................................................ 5-45Brake system.................................................. 5-45

Braking precautions .................................. 5-45Brake assist.................................................... 5-46

Brake assist .............................................. 5-46

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 227: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Preview function (Intelligent Cruise Controlsystem equipped model)............................ 5-46Anti-lock Brake SYSTEM (ABS).................... 5-48

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ............ 5-50Rear Active Steer (RAS) system ........................ 5-52Cold weather driving ....................................... 5-52

Freeing a frozen door lock .......................... 5-52

Antifreeze ................................................. 5-52Battery ...................................................... 5-52Draining of coolant water ........................... 5-52Tire equipment .......................................... 5-53Special winter equipment .......................... 5-53Driving on SNOW or ice .............................. 5-54Engine block heater (if so equipped)........... 5-54

Z 05.1.31/Y50-D X

Page 228: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

O Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the support ofothers alone in your vehicle. Pets shouldnot be left alone either. They could acci-dentally injure themselves or othersthrough inadvertent operation of the ve-hicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, tempera-tures in a closed vehicle could quicklybecome high enough to cause severe orpossibly fatal injuries to people or ani-mals.

O Closely supervise children when they arearound cars to prevent them from playingand becoming locked in the trunk wherethey could be seriously injured. Keep thecar locked, with the trunk closed, whennot in use, and prevent children’s accessto car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they containcolorless and odorless carbon monoxide.Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can causeunconsciousness or death.

O If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicle in-spected immediately.

O Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

O Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

O Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,otherwise exhaust gases could be drawninto the passenger compartment. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open, followthese precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation buttonto off and the fan control at 4 (high)

to circulate the air.

O If electrical wiring or other cable connec-tions must pass to a trailer through theseal on the trunk lid or the body, followthe manufacturer’s recommendation toprevent carbon monoxide entry into thevehicle.

O If a special body, camper or other equip-ment is added for recreational or otherusage, follow the manufacturer’s recom-mendation to prevent carbon monoxideentry into the vehicle. Do not occupythese areas while the engine is runningeven if the vehicle is parked. Some recre-ational vehicle appliances such asstoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. mayalso generate carbon monoxide.

O The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanic when-ever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ANDDRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 229: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emissioncontrol device installed in the exhaustsystem. Exhaust gases in the three-waycatalyst are burned at high temperaturesto help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

O The exhaust gas and the exhaustsystem are very hot. Keep people, ani-mals or flammable materials away fromthe exhaust system components.

O Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

CAUTION

O Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline seriously reducethe three-way catalyst’s ability to helpreduce exhaust pollutants.

O Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keepdriving if the engine misfires, or if no-ticeable loss of performance or otherunusual operating conditions are de-tected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by an INFINITI dealer.

O Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damagingthe three-way catalyst.

O Do not race the engine while warming itup.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGSYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with the low tirepressure warning system. It monitors tirepressure of all tires except the spare.When the low tire pressure warning lightis lit, one or more of your tires is signifi-cantly underinflated. The system also dis-plays pressure of all tires (except thespare tire) on the display screen by send-ing a signal from a sensor that is installedin each wheel.

The low tire pressure warning system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also,this system may not detect a sudden dropin tire pressure (for example, a flat tirewhile driving).

Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This maycause the low tire pressure warning lightto illuminate.

If the warning light illuminates in low out-side temperatures as described above,check the tire pressure for all four tires.

Starting and driving 5-3

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 230: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Adjust the tire pressure to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label to turnthe low tire pressure warning light OFF.

Frequently check the tire pressure informa-tion display on the monitor screen and ad-just pressure of each tire properly. See“Vehicle information and settings” in the“4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems” section for tirepressure monitor.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure (lower than 27 psi, 190 kPa), theLOW PRESSURE information message willbe displayed on the monitor screen. Thelow tire pressure warning light comes on,and the chime sounds for about 10 sec-onds.

If you select the tire pressure informationin the display, the LOW PRESSURE informa-tion message will be displayed.

For additional information regarding theabove warning, see “Warning/indicatorlights and audible reminders” in the“2. Instruments and controls” section.

WARNING

O If the low tire pressure warning lightflashes while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road toa safe location and stop the vehicle assoon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the pressure for allfour tires. Adjust the pressure to the rec-ommended COLD tire pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label toturn the low tire pressure warning lightOFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it witha spare tire as soon as possible. (See“Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emer-gency” section for changing a flat tire.)

O If your vehicle is equipped with run-flattires, you can continue driving after youhave a flat tire. However, remember thatvehicle handling stability is reduced,which could lead to an accident

and personal injury. See “Wheels andtires” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for more details andmake sure to observe the cautions aboutrun-flat tires. Failure to do so may resultin a serious accident.

O Immediately after a spare tire ismounted, a wheel is replaced or tire rota-tion is performed, tire pressure will notbe indicated on the display and the lowtire pressure warning system will notfunction. Reset the system by driving thevehicle at over 25 MPH (40 km/h) for ap-proximately 10 minutes. If tire pressureis not indicated after performing the re-setting procedure above, contact an IN-FINITI dealer as soon as possible.

O Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by INFINITI could affect theproper operation of the low tire pressurewarning system.

O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

5-4 Starting and driving

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 231: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

The low tire pressure warning system maynot function properly when the wheels areequipped with tire chains or the wheels areburied in snow.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe andprudent manner may result in loss of con-trol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces-sive speed, high speed cornering, or sud-den steering maneuvers, because thesedriving practices could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle. As with any ve-hicle, a loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects, orcause the vehicle to rollover, particularlyif the loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times,and avoid driving when tired. Never drivewhen under the influence of alcohol ordrugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsi-ness). Always wear your seat belt as out-lined in the “Seat belts” section of thismanual, and also instruct your passen-gers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury incollisions and rollovers. In a rollover

crash, an unbelted or improperly beltedperson is significantly more likely to beinjured or killed than a person properlywearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving after drink-ing alcohol increases the likelihood ofbeing involved in an accident injuring your-self and others. Additionally, if you are in-jured in an accident, alcohol can increasethe severity of the injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. Youmust not drive under the influence of al-cohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol related acci-dents. Although the local laws vary onwhat is considered to be legally intoxi-cated, the fact is that alcohol affects allpeople differently and most people under-estimate the effects of alcohol.

Starting and driving 5-5

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 232: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Remember, drinking and driving don’tmix!

And that’s true for drugs too (over thecounter, prescription, and illegal drugs).Don’t drive if your ability to operate yourvehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, orsome other physical condition.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) DRIVINGSAFETY PRECAUTIONS (For AWDmodels)

WARNING

O Do not drive beyond the performancecapability of the tires, even with AWDengaged. Accelerating quickly, sharpsteering maneuvers or sudden brakingmay cause loss of control.

O Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-beltedor radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Install tire chains on the rearwheels when driving on slippery roadsand drive carefully.

O This vehicle is not designed for off-road

(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandyor muddy roads that tires may getstuck in.

O Do not place an AWD equipped vehicleon a two wheel dynamometer or raisetwo wheels off the ground and shift thetransmission to any D (drive) or R (re-verse) position. Doing so may result intransmission damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personal in-jury.

O Never operate the accelerator pedalwith any wheels raised and the otherwheels on the ground while jacking upor with any wheels on a roller and theother wheels on the ground. Otherwise,the vehicle could lurch forward or back-ward.

O When a wheel is off the ground due toan unlevel surface, do not spin thewheel excessively.

Do not operate the push-button ignitionswitch while driving the vehicle except inan emergency. (The engine will stopwhen the ignition switch is pushed 3 con-secutive times or the ignition switch ispushed and held for more than 2 sec-onds.)

CAUTION

O When the battery of the Intelligent Keyruns down, insert the Intelligent Keyinto the Intelligent Key port until aclick sounds. And then, push the igni-tion switch to start the engine.

O If the steering lock release malfunctionindicator appears on the dot matrix liq-uid crystal display, push the push-button ignition switch again whilelightly turning the steering wheel rightand left. See “Dot matrix liquid crystaldisplay” in the “2. Instruments andcontrols” section.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

5-6 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 233: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When the ignition switch is pushed withoutdepressing the brake pedal, the ignitionswitch position will illuminate as follows:

Push center• once to change to ACC.• two times to change to ON.• three times to return to LOCK.

The ignition switch is equipped with ananti-theft steering lock device.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ig-nition switch position cannot be switchedto LOCK until the selector lever is moved tothe P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushedtoward the LOCK position, proceed as fol-lows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P posi-tion.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignitionswitch position will change to the ONposition.

3. Push the ignition switch again to theLOCK position.

The selector lever can be moved from the Pposition if the ignition switch is in the ONposition and the brake pedal is depressed.

In order for the steering wheel to belocked, it must be turned about 1/8 of aright or left turn from the straight up posi-tion.

To lock the steering wheel, push the igni-tion switch to the LOCK position. To unlockthe steering wheel, push the ignitionswitch while slightly turning the steeringwheel right and left.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,the push-button ignition switch cannot beturned from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for opera-tion are displayed on the dot matrix liquid

crystal display in the tachometer. See “Dotmatrix liquid crystal display” in the “2. In-struments and controls” section.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCHPOSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position):

The ignition switch can only be locked inthis position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when itis pushed to the ACC position while car-rying the Intelligent Key or with the Intelli-gent Key inserted in the port.

ACC (Accessories) :

This position activates electrical accesso-ries such as the radio, when the engine isnot running.

ON (Normal operating position) :

This position turns on the ignition systemand electrical accessories.

SSD0519

Starting and driving 5-7

Z 05.7.29/Y50-D X

Page 234: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the push-button ignition switch in ACC or ON posi-tions when the engine is not running for anextended period. This can discharge thebattery.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERYDISCHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is al-most discharged, the guide light jB of theIntelligent Key port jA blinks and the in-dicator appears on the dot matrix liquidcrystal display. See “Dot matrix liquidcrystal display” in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section.

In this case, inserting the Intelligent Keyinto the port j1 allows you to start theengine. Make sure the Intelligent Key isplaced in the correct direction: The frontside faces upward and the key ring

side faces backward as illustrated.

To remove the Intelligent Key from theport, push the ignition switch to the LOCKposition and push in the Intelligent Keyj2 first. Then, the Intelligent Key will beejected to the removal position.

NOTE:

The Intelligent Key port does not changethe Intelligent Key battery. If you see thelow battery indicator, replace the batteryas soon as possible. See “Intelligent Keybattery replacement” in the “8. Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section.

SSD0447 SSD0448

5-8 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 235: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

O Never place anything except the Intelli-gent Key in the Intelligent Key port.Doing so may cause damage to theequipment.

O Make sure the Intelligent Key is in thecorrect direction when inserting it tothe Intelligent Key port. The enginemay not start if it is in the wrong direc-tion.

O Remove the Intelligent Key from theIntelligent Key port after the ignitionswitch is pushed to the LOCK position.

O Do not pull out the Intelligent Key fromthe Intelligent Key port until the Intel-ligent Key is ejected to the removal po-sition.

O Make sure the area around the vehicleis clear.

O Make sure the periodical maintenanceis being performed.

O Make sure all windows and lights areclean.

O Make sure of the proper inflation oftires and their conditions.

O Make sure to lock all doors.

O Make sure to adjust seats and headrestraints.

O Make sure to adjust inside and out-side mirrors.

O Make sure to fasten seat belts and di-rect all passengers to do likewise.

O Make sure to check the operation ofwarning lights when the ignitionswitch is pushed to the ON position.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). (P preferred.)

The starter is designed so that thestarter does not operate unless the se-lector lever is in either one of theabove positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition. Depress the brake pedal andpush the ignition switch to start theengine.

To start the engine immediately, pushand release the ignition switch whiledepressing the brake pedal with theignition switch in any position.

If the engine starts, but fails to run, re-peat the above procedure.

O If the engine is very hard to start inextremely cold weather or when re-starting, depress the accelerator pedala little (approximately 1/3 to the floor)and while holding, crank the engine.Release the accelerator pedal whenthe engine starts.

O If the engine is very hard to start be-cause it is flooded, depress the accel-erator pedal all the way to the floor

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-9

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 236: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to6 seconds. After cranking the engine,release the accelerator pedal. Crankthe engine with your foot off the ac-celerator pedal by depressing thebrake pedal and pushing the push-button ignition switch to start the en-gine. If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15seconds at a time. If the engine does notstart, push the ignition switch to LOCK andwait 10 seconds before cranking again,otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30seconds after starting. Do not race theengine while warming it up. Drive atmoderate speed for a short distancefirst, especially in cold weather. Incold weather, keep the engine runningfor a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes beforeshutting it off. Starting and stoppingthe engine over a short period of timemay make the vehicle more difficult tostart.

5. To stop the engine, shift the selectorlever to the P position and push theignition switch to the LOCK position.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

5 speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your ve-hicle is electronically controlled by atransmission control module to producemaximum efficiency and smooth opera-tion.

Shown on the following pages are the rec-ommended operating procedures for thistransmission. Follow these procedures formaximum vehicle performance anddriving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress thefoot brake pedal and push the selector le-ver button before shifting the selectorlever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D(Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Besure the vehicle is fully stopped before at-tempting to shift the selector lever.

This automatic transmission model is de-signed so that the foot brake pedal mustbe depressed before shifting from P(Park) to any drive position while the ig-nition switch position is ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of the

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-10 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 237: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

other gear positions if the ignition switchis pushed to the LOCK or ACC position.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressedand push the selector lever button toshift into a driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and footbrake, then gradually start the vehiclein motion.

WARNING

O Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral)to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual shiftmode. Always depress the brake pedaluntil shifting is completed. Failure to doso could cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

O Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

O On slippery roads, do not downshift. Thismay cause a loss of control.

O Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while vehicle is moving forward. Nevershift to P (Park) or D (Drive) while vehicleis moving rearward. Failure to do socould cause you to lose control and havean accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by depressingthe accelerator pedal. The foot brake shouldbe used for this purpose.

Shifting

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressingthe brake pedal,

: Push the button,: Just move the selector lever.

After starting the engine, fully depress thebrake pedal and shift the selector leverfrom P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D(Drive), or Manual shift mode position.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R(Reverse). All other positions can be se-lected without pushing the button.

SSD0449

Starting and driving 5-11

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 238: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicleis parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped. The brake pedal must be de-pressed and the selector lever buttonpushed in to move the selector lever fromN (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).Apply the parking brake. When parking ona hill, apply the parking brake first, thenmove the selector lever to the P (Park) po-sition.

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always besure the vehicle is completely stopped be-fore selecting R (Reverse). The brakepedal must be depressed and the se-lector lever button pushed in to move theselector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) orany drive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-gaged. The engine can be started in thisposition. You may shift to N (Neutral) andrestart a stalled engine while the vehicleis moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is shifted from Dto the manual shift gate with the vehiclestopped or while driving, the transmissionenters the manual shift mode. Shift rangecan be selected manually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift rangeis displayed on the dot matrix liquid crys-tal display in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:

M1→←

M2→←

M3→←

M4→←

M5

M5 (5th):

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.M4 (4th):

For driving up or down long slopes whereengine braking would be advantageous.M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.M1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steephills slowly or driving slowly throughdeep snow, sand or mud, or for maximumengine braking on steep downhill grades.

O Remember not to drive at high speedsfor extended periods of time in lowerthan 4th gear. This reduces gasmileage.

O When shifting up, move the selectorlever to the + (up) side. (Shifts tohigher range.)

O When shifting down, move the se-

5-12 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 239: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

lector lever to the − (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)

O Moving the selector lever rapidly tothe same side twice will shift theranges in succession.

O When canceling the manual shiftmode, return the selector lever to theD position. The transmission returnsto the normal driving mode.

O In the manual shift mode, the trans-mission may not shift to the selectedgear. This helps maintain driving per-formance and reduces the chance ofvehicle damage or loss of control.

O In the manual shift mode, the trans-mission automatically shifts down to1st gear before the vehicle comes to astop. When accelerating again, it isnecessary to shift up to the desiredrange.

Accelerator downshift— In D position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depressthe accelerator pedal to the floor. Thisshifts the transmission down into thelower gear, depending on the vehiclespeed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, notethat the transmission will be locked inany of the forward gears according to thecondition.

If the vehicle is driven under extremeconditions, such as excessive wheel spin-ning and subsequent hard braking, thefail-safe system may be activated. Thiswill occur even if all electrical circuits arefunctioning properly. In this case, pushthe switch to the LOCK position and waitfor 3 seconds. Then push the ignitionswitch back to the ON position. The ve-hicle should return to its normal oper-ating condition. If it does not return toits normal operating condition, have anINFINITI dealer check the transmissionand repair if necessary.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,the selector lever may not be moved fromthe P (Park) position even with the brakepedal depressed and the selector leverbutton pushed.

To move the selector lever, perform thefollowing procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCKposition using a suitable tool.

2. Apply the parking brake.

SSD0450

Starting and driving 5-13

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 240: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

3. Remove the shift lock cover jA using asuitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock jB as illus-trated.

5. Push the selector lever button jC andmove the selector lever to N (Neutral)position jD while holding down theshift lock.

6. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition to unlock the steering wheel.Now the vehicle may be moved to thedesired location.

If the battery is discharged completely,the steering wheel cannot be unlocked.Do not move the vehicle with the steeringwheel locked.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P(Park), have an INFINITI dealer check theautomatic transmission system as soonas possible.

To apply: Fully depress the parking brakepedal jA .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Depress the parking brake pedal jA

and the parking brake will be re-leased.

3. Before driving, be sure the brakewarning light goes out.

WARNING

O Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

O Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

O Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

O Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

SPA1286D

PARKING BRAKE

5-14 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 241: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) systemwarns the driver when the vehicle is travel-ing close to either the left or the right of atraveling lane with detectable lanemarkers. It operates at approximately 45MPH (72 km/h) and above. The systemmonitors lane markers of the traveling laneusing the camera unit j1 located inside themap light cover.

When the camera unit detects that the ve-hicle is traveling close to either the left orthe right of the traveling lane, the LDW indi-cator j2 on the instrument panel flashesand a chime sounds to alert the driver.

The LDW system can be turned on or off bypushing the LDW switch j3 . When thesystem is on, the LDW system ON indicatorj4 illuminates.

PRECAUTIONS ON LANEDEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM

WARNING

O This system is only a warning device toinform the driver of an unintended lanedeparture. It will not steer the vehicle

or prevent loss of control. It is the driv-er’s responsibility to stay alert, drivesafely, keep the vehicle in the travelinglane, and be in control of the vehicle atall times.

O The system will not operate at speedsbelow approximately 45 MPH or if it can-not detect lane markers.

O If the lane departure warning systemmalfunctions, it will cancel automati-cally. The LDW indicator light in the in-strument panel will then illuminate (or-ange).

O If the LDW indicator light illuminates (or-ange), park the vehicle in a safe place.Turn the engine off and re-start the en-gine. If the LDW indicator light continuesto illuminate, have the system checkedby an INFINITI dealer.

O Excessive noise will interfere withwarning system chime sound and thechime may not be heard.

The system may not function properlyunder the following conditions:

SSD0451 SSD0452

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-15

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 242: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O On roads where the lane markers arefaded or are not painted clearly.

O On roads where the lane markers arepainted yellow.

O On roads where water, dirt or snow iscovering the lane markers.

The system may not monitor the lanemarkers in certain road, weather ordriving conditions.

O On roads where there are sharpcurves.

O Where the traveling lane merges orseparates.

O On roads where the discontinued lanemarkers are present, such as near toll-gates.

O On roads where there are no generallane markers.

O During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,etc.).

O When strong light (for example, atsunrise or sunset) is directly shiningon the front of the vehicle in the cam-era.

O When entering or exiting a tunnel

where a sudden change in brightnessoccurs.

O When traveling close to the vehicle infront of you, which obstructs the cam-era detection range.

O When the vehicle’s traveling directiondoes not align with the lane marker.

O When rain, snow or dirt adhere to thewindshield in front of the LDW camera.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNINGSYSTEM OPERATION

The LDW system has an automatic modeand manual mode.

In the automatic mode, the LDW systemautomatically turns on when the push-button ignition switch is turned to the ONposition. The LDW system ON indicator j2located on the LDW switch j1 illuminates,indicating that the system is on.

To cancel the LDW system, push the LDWswitch j1 to turn off the LDW system ONindicator j2 . To turn on the system, push

SIC2554

5-16 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 243: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

the LDW switch j1 again.

In the manual mode, the LDW system willbe off when the ignition switch is pushed tothe ON position. The LDW switch must bepushed to turn on the system.

To change modes, push and hold the LDWswitch j1 for more than 4 seconds whenthe LDW system ON indicator j2 is off.Both chime sounds and blinking of the LDWsystem indicator inform you that the modechange has been completed.

When the vehicle approaches either the leftor the right of the traveling lane whiledriving over approximately 45 MPH (72km/h), the LDW indicator j3 on the instru-ment panel flashes and a chime sounds toalert the driver.

When you use the lane change signal andchange your traveling lane, the LDWsystem does not warn you until about 2seconds after the lane change signal isturned off.

When the vehicle speed lowers to less thanapproximately 45 MPH (72 km/h), the LDWsystem does not warn you.

Temporary disabled status at hightemperature

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlightunder high temperature conditions (overapproximately 104°F (40°C)) and thenstarted, the lane departure warning systemmay cancel automatically. The LDW switchON indicator will blink.

When the interior temperature is reduced,the system will again operate automati-cally and the LDW switch ON indicator illu-minates.

SSD0411

Starting and driving 5-17

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 244: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Lane Departure Warning cameraunit maintenance

The LDW camera unit j1 for the LDWsystem is located inside the map lightcover.

To keep the LDW system operating prop-erly, be sure to observe the following:

O Always keep the windshield clean. Thesensing capability of the camera unitdepends on the condition of the wind-shield. See “7. Appearance and care”section for cleaning instruction.

O Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touchthe camera lens or remove the screw lo-cated on the camera unit. Doing socould cause failure or malfunction. Ifthe camera unit is damaged due to anaccident, contact an INFINITI dealer.

O Do not attach a sticker (including trans-parent material) or install an accessorynear the camera unit. This could causefailure or malfunction.

O Do not place reflective materials, suchas a white paper or mirrors on the in-strument panel. Reflection of the sun-light may adversely affect the cameraunit’s lane marker detection capability.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

O If the cruise control system malfunc-tions, it will cancel automatically. TheSET indicator in the instrument panelwill then blink to warn the driver.

O If the engine coolant temperature be-comes excessively high, the cruise con-trol system will be canceled automati-cally.

O If the SET indicator blinks, turn thecruise control main switch off and havethe system checked by your INFINITIdealer.

O The SET indicator may sometimes blinkwhen the cruise control main switch isturned ON while pushing theRESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST orCANCEL switch (located on the steeringwheel). To properly set the cruise controlsystem, perform the steps below in theorder indicated.

SSD0453

CRUISE CONTROL

5-18 Starting and driving

Z 05.2.1/Y50-D X

Page 245: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving un-der the following conditions:

O when it is not possible to keep the ve-hicle at a set speed

O in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed

O on winding or hilly roads

O on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

O in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle controland result in an accident.

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch2. SET/COAST switch3. CANCEL switch4. MAIN (ONzOFF) switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speedbetween 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)without keeping your foot on the accel-erator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push theMAIN switch on. The CRUISE indicator lightwill come on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push theSET/COAST switch and release it. (TheCRUISE SET indicator will come on in theinstrument panel.) Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle will main-tain the set speed.

O To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you releasethe pedal, the vehicle will return to thepreviously set speed.

O The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed on winding or hilly roads. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, follow any ofthese methods:

a) Push the CANCEL button. The SET indi-cator will go out.

b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicatorwill go out.

c) Move the selector lever to the N (Neu-tral) position. The SET indicator will goout.

d) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator and SET indicator willgo out.

O If you depress the brake pedal whilepushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE or

SSD0472

Starting and driving 5-19

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 246: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

SET/COAST switch and reset at thecruising speed, the cruise control willdisengage. Turn the MAIN switch offonce and then turn it on again.

O The cruise control will automaticallycancel if the vehicle slows more than8 MPH (12 km/h) below the set speed.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following methods:

O Depress the accelerator pedal. Whenthe vehicle attains the desired speed,push and release the SET/COASTswitch.

O Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. When the vehicleattains the speed you desire, releasethe switch.

O Push, then quickly release theRESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Eachtime you do this, the set speed will in-crease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following methods:

O Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed,push the SET/COAST switch and re-lease it.

O Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.Release the switch when the vehicleslows down to the desired speed.

O Push, then quickly release theSET/COAST switch. Each time you dothis, the set speed will decrease byabout 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.The vehicle will resume the last set cruis-ing speed when the vehicle speed is over25 MPH (40 km/h).

The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system automatically maintains a se-lected distance from the vehicle travelingin front of you according to that vehicle’sspeed (up to the set speed), or at the setspeed when the road ahead is clear.

The ICC function can be set to one of twocruise control modes:

O Vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode:

For maintaining a selected distancebetween your vehicle and the vehiclein front of you up to the preset speed.

O Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode:

For cruising at a preset speed.

WARNING

O Always drive carefully and attentivelywhen using either cruise control mode.Read and understand the Owner’sManual thoroughly before using thecruise control. To avoid serious injuryor death, do not rely on the system toprevent accidents or to control the ve-

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-20 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 247: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

hicle’s speed in emergency situations.Do not use cruise control except in ap-propriate road and traffic conditions.

O In the conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol mode, a warning buzzer will notsound to warn you if you are too close tothe vehicle ahead. Pay special attentionto the distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle ahead of you or a collisioncould occur.

1. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode

2. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode

Push the MAIN switch jA to choose thecruise control mode between the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode j1 andthe conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode j2 .

Always confirm the setting in the Intelli-gent Cruise Control system display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode, see the following description. For

the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode, see page 5-37.

SELECTING THEVEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE

To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode j1 , quickly push and releasethe MAIN switch jA .

Once a control mode is activated, it cannotbe changed to the other cruise controlmode. To change the mode, push the MAINswitch once to turn the system off. Thenpush the MAIN switch again to turn the

SSD0454

Starting and driving 5-21

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 248: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

system back on and select the desiredcruise control mode.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system automatically maintains a selecteddistance from the vehicle traveling in frontof you according to that vehicle’s speed (upto the set speed), or at the set speed whenthe road ahead is clear.

With ICC, the driver can maintain the samespeed as other vehicles without the con-stant need to adjust the set speed as youwould with a normal cruise control system. PRECAUTIONS ON

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE

The system is intended to enhance the op-eration of the vehicle when following a ve-hicle traveling in the same lane and direc-tion.

If the distance sensor jA detects a slowermoving vehicle ahead, the system will re-duce the vehicle speed so that your vehiclefollows the vehicle in front at the selecteddistance.

The system automatically controls the

throttle and applies the brakes (up to 25%of vehicle braking power) if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is ap-proximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

WARNING

O This system is only an aid to assist thedriver and is not a collision warning oravoidance device. It is the driver’s re-sponsibility to stay alert, drive safelyand be in control of the vehicle at alltimes.

O The system is primarily intended for useon straight, dry, open roads with lighttraffic. It is not advisable to use thesystem in city traffic or congested areas.

O This system will not adapt automaticallyto road conditions. This system shouldbe used in evenly flowing traffic. Do notuse the system on roads with sharpcurves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or infog.

SSD0455

5-22 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 249: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The distance sensor will not detect undermost conditions:

O Stationary and slow moving vehicles

O Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

O Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

O Motorcycles traveling offset in thetravel lane

This system will not automatically brakethe vehicle to a stop.

WARNING

O As there is a performance limit to thedistance control function, never relysolely on the Intelligent Cruise Controlsystem. This system does not correctcareless, inattentive or absent-mindeddriving, or overcome poor visibility inrain, fog, or other bad weather. Decel-erate the vehicle speed by depressingthe brake pedal, depending on the dis-tance to the vehicle ahead and the sur-rounding circumstances in order tomaintain a safe distance betweenvehicles.

O Although the brake operation is con-trolled by the system, the system doesnot automatically stop the vehicle. Ifthe vehicle speed falls below approxi-mately 20 MPH (32 km/h), the Intelli-gent Cruise Control system is automati-cally canceled and a warning chimesounds. (The brake control is also can-celed.)

O The system may not detect the vehiclein front of you in certain road orweather conditions. To avoid accidents,never use the Intelligent Cruise Controlsystem under the following conditions:

− On roads where the traffic is heavy orthere are sharp curves

− On slippery road surfaces such as onice or snow, etc.

− During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,etc.)

When the windshield wiper is oper-ated at the low speed (LO) or highspeed (HI) position, the Intelli-gent Cruise Control system is

automatically canceled.

− When strong light (for example, atsunrise or sunset) is directly shiningon the front of the vehicle

− When rain, snow or dirt adhere to thesystem sensor

− On steep downhill roads (the vehiclemay go beyond the set vehicle speedand frequent braking may result inoverheating the brakes)

− On repeated uphill and downhillroads

− When traffic conditions make it diffi-cult to keep a proper distance be-tween vehicles because of frequentacceleration or deceleration

O Do not use the Intelligent Cruise Con-trol system if you are towing a trailer.The system may not detect a vehicleahead.

O In some road or traffic conditions, a ve-hicle or object can unexpectedly comeinto the sensor detection zone and

Starting and driving 5-23

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 250: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

cause automatic braking. You may needto control the distance from other ve-hicles using the accelerator pedal. Al-ways stay alert and avoid using the ICCsystem when it is not recommended inthis section.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCEMODE OPERATION

Always pay attention to the operation ofthe vehicle and be ready to manually con-trol the proper following distance. Thevehicle-to-vehicle distance control modeof the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sys-tem may not be able to maintain the se-lected distance between vehicles (follow-ing distance) or selected vehicle speedunder some circumstances.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode uses a sensor jA located on thefront of the vehicle to detect vehicles trav-

eling ahead. The sensor generally detectsthe signals returned from the reflectorson a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if thesensor cannot detect the reflector on thevehicle ahead, the ICC system may notmaintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions inwhich the sensor cannot detect the sig-nals:

O When the reflector of the vehicleahead is positioned high on the ve-hicle (trailer, etc.)

O When the reflector on the vehicleahead is missing, damaged or covered

O When the reflector of the vehicleahead is covered with dirt, snow androad spray

O When the snow or road spray fromtraveling vehicles reduces the sensor’svisibility

O When dense exhaust or other smoke(black smoke) from vehicles reducesthe sensor’s visibility

O When excessively heavy baggage isloaded in the rear seat or the trunk ofyour vehicle

SSD0455

5-24 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 251: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O When your vehicle is towing a trailer,etc.

The ICC system is designed to automati-cally check the sensor’s operation. Whenthe sensor is covered with dirt or ob-structs, the system will automatically becanceled. If the sensor is covered withice, a transparent or translucent vinylbag, etc., the ICC system may not detectthem. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may notcancel and may not be able to maintainthe selected following distance from thevehicle ahead. Be sure to check and cleanthe sensor regularly.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode is designed to maintain a selecteddistance and reduce the speed to matchthe slower vehicle ahead; the system willdecelerate the vehicle as necessary. How-ever, the ICC system can only apply up to25% of the vehicles total braking power.This system should only be used whentraffic conditions allow vehicle speeds toremain fairly constant or when vehiclespeeds change gradually. If a vehiclemoves into the traveling lane ahead or ifa vehicle traveling ahead rapidly deceler-ates, the distance between vehicles maybecome closer because the ICC system

cannot decelerate the vehicle quicklyenough. If this occurs, the ICC systemwill sound a warning chime and blink thesystem display to notify the driver to takenecessary action.

The system will cancel and a warningchime will sound if the speed falls belowapproximately 20 MPH (32 km/h). Thesystem will also disengage below the 20MPH (32 km/h) cut-off speed or over themaximum set speed.

Refer to “Approach warning” later in thissection.

The following items are controlled in thevehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

O When there are no vehicles travelingahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode maintains the speed setby the driver. The set speed range isbetween approximately 25 and 90MPH (40 and 144 km/h).

O When there is a vehicle travelingahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode adjusts the speed tomaintain the distance, selected bydriver, from the vehicle ahead. The ad-justing speed range is between ap-

proximately 20 MPH (32 km/h) and upto the set speed.

O When the vehicle traveling ahead hasmoved out from its lane of travel, thevehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode accelerates and maintains ve-hicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehiclespeed or warn you when you approachstationary and slow moving vehicles. Youmust pay attention to vehicle operation tomaintain proper distance from vehiclesahead when approaching toll gates ortraffic congestion.

Starting and driving 5-25

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 252: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The detection zone of the ICC sensor islimited. A vehicle ahead must be in thedetection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicledistance detection mode to maintain theselected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of thedetection zone due to its position withinthe same lane of travel. Motorcycles maynot be detected in the same lane ahead ifthey are traveling offset from the center-line of the lane. A vehicle that is enteringthe lane ahead may not be detected untilthe vehicle has completely moved into thelane. If this occurs, the ICC system maywarn you by blinking the system indi-

cator and sounding the chime. The drivermay have to manually control the properdistance away from vehicle travelingahead.

SSD0252

5-26 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 253: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When driving on some roads, such aswinding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, orroads which are under construction, theICC sensor may detect vehicles in a dif-ferent lane, or may temporarily not detecta vehicle traveling ahead. This may causethe ICC system to decelerate or accel-erate the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be af-fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-neuver or traveling position in the lane,etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs,the ICC system may warn you by blinkingthe system indicator and sounding thechime unexpectedly. You will have to

manually control the proper distanceaway from the vehicle traveling ahead.

When driving on the freeway at a setspeed and approaching a slower travelingvehicle ahead, the ICC will adjust thespeed to maintain the distance, selectedby the driver, from the vehicle ahead. Ifthe vehicle ahead changes lanes or exitsthe freeway, the ICC system will accel-erate and maintain the speed up to theset speed. Pay attention to the driving op-eration to maintain control of the vehicleas it accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed on winding or hilly roads. If thisoccurs, you will have to manually controlthe vehicle speed.

SSD0253 SSD0254

Starting and driving 5-27

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 254: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Intelligent cruise control switch

The system is operated by a MAIN switchand four control switches, all mounted onthe steering wheel.

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:Resumes set speed or increases speedincrementally.

2. SET/COAST switch:Sets desired cruise speed, reducesspeed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:Deactivates the system withouterasing the set speed.

4. DISTANCE switch:Changes the vehicle’s following dis-tance:O LongO MiddleO Short

5. MAIN switch:Master switch to activate the system

Intelligent cruise control systemdisplay and indicators

The display is located under the tachom-eter.

1. Set vehicle speed indicator

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed isdisplayed in km/h.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

Indicates whether it detects a vehiclein front of you.

SSD0456 SSD0457

5-28 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 255: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

3. MAIN switch indicator light (Green)

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

4. Indicates your vehicle

5. Set distance indicator

Displays the selected distance be-tween vehicles set with the DISTANCEswitch.

6. Intelligent Cruise Control systemwarning light (Orange)

The light comes on if there is a mal-function in the ICC system.

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, the indicators come on as il-lustrated to check for a burned-out bulb,and it turns off when the engine isstarted.

Operating vehicle-to-vehicledistance control mode

To turn on the cruise control, quicklypush and release the MAIN switch jA on.The cruise indicator light, set distance in-dicator and set vehicle speed indicatorcome on and in a standby state for set-ting.

SSD0458 SSD0459

Starting and driving 5-29

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 256: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-hicle to the desired speed, push theSET/COAST switch and release it. (Vehicleahead detection indicator, set distance in-dicator and set vehicle speed indicatorcome on.) Take your foot off the accelera-tor pedal. Your vehicle will maintain theset speed.

The Intelligent Cruise Control system can-not be set under the following conditionseven if the SET/COAST switch is pushed.

O When traveling outside the 25 to 90MPH (40 to 144 km/h) speed range

O While the brakes are applied by thedriver

O When pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch without a setspeed in memory

O When the windshield wipers are oper-ating at low speed (LO) or high speed(HI)

O When the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system is switched off

SSD0460

5-30 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 257: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. System set display with vehicle ahead2. System set display without vehicle

ahead

System operation

WARNING

Normally when controlling the distance to avehicle ahead, this system automaticallyaccelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.Depress the accelerator to properly acceler-

ate your vehicle when acceleration is re-quired for a lane change. Depress the brakepedal when deceleration is required tomaintain a safe distance to the vehicleahead due to its sudden braking or if a ve-hicle cuts in. Always stay alert when usingthe ICC system.

The driver sets the desired vehicle speedbased on the road conditions. The ICCsystem maintains the set vehicle speed,similar to standard cruise control, as long

as no vehicle is detected in the laneahead.

The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead:

When a vehicle is detected in the laneahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve-hicle by controlling the throttle and ap-plying the brakes to match the speed of aslower vehicle ahead. The system thencontrols the vehicle speed based on thespeed of the vehicle ahead to maintainthe driver selected distance.

The stoplights of the vehicle come on andthe brake pedal depresses when brakingis performed by the ICC system.

When the brake operates, a noise may beheard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve-hicle ahead detection indicator comes on.The ICC system will also display the setspeed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected:

When a vehicle is no longer detectedahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-ates your vehicle to resume the previouslyset vehicle speed. The ICC system thenmaintains the set speed.

SSD0461

Starting and driving 5-31

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 258: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When a vehicle is no longer detected thevehicle ahead detection indicator turnsoff.

If a vehicle ahead appears during accel-eration to the set vehicle speed or anytime the ICC system is in operation, thesystem controls the distance to that ve-hicle.

When passing another vehicle, the setspeed indicator will flash when the ve-hicle speed exceeds the set speed. Thevehicle detect indicator will turn off whenthe area ahead of the vehicle is open.When the pedal is released, the vehiclewill return to the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set inthe ICC system, you can depress the ac-celerator pedal when it is necessary to ac-celerate your vehicle rapidly.

How to change the set vehiclespeed

To cancel the preset speed, use any ofthese methods:

O Push the CANCEL switch. The set ve-hicle speed indicator will go out.

O Tap the brake pedal. The set vehiclespeed indicator will go out.

O Turn the MAIN switch off. Both theON/OFF switch indicator and set ve-hicle speed indicator will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following methods:

O Depress the accelerator pedal. Whenthe vehicle attains the desired speed,push and release the SET/COASTswitch.

O Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The set vehiclespeed will increase by approximately5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada).

O Push, then quickly release theRESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Eachtime you do this, the set speed will in-crease by approximately 1 MPH (1km/h for Canada).

SSD0462

5-32 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 259: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following methods:

O Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed,push the SET/COAST switch and re-lease it.

O Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.The set vehicle speed will decrease byapproximately 5 MPH (5 km/h forCanada).

O Push, then quickly release theSET/COAST switch. Each time you dothis, the set speed will decrease byapproximately 1 MPH (1 km/h forCanada).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.The vehicle will resume the last set cruis-ing speed when the vehicle speed is over25 MPH (40 km/h).

How to change the set distance tothe vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can beselected at any time depending on thetraffic conditions.

Each time the DISTANCE switch jA ispushed, the set distance will change tolong, middle, short and back to longagain in that sequence.

SSD0463

Starting and driving 5-33

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 260: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O The distance to the vehicle ahead willchange according to the vehiclespeed. The higher the vehicle speed,the longer the distance.

O If the engine is stopped, the set dis-tance becomes “long”. (Each time the

engine is started, the initial settingbecomes “long”.)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicleahead due to rapid deceleration of that

vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, thesystem warns the driver with the chimeand ICC system display. Decelerate by de-pressing the brake pedal to maintain asafe vehicle distance if:

• The chime sounds.

• The vehicle ahead detection and setdistance indicator blink.

The warning chime may not sound insome cases when there is a short dis-tance between vehicles. Some examplesare:

O When the vehicles are traveling at thesame speed and the distance betweenvehicles is not changing

O When the vehicle ahead is travelingfaster and the distance between ve-hicles is increasing

O When the accelerator pedal is de-pressed, overriding the system

O When a vehicle cuts in near your ve-hicle

The warning chime will not sound whenyour vehicle approaches vehicles that areparked or moving slowly.

SSD0464

5-34 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 261: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may soundand the system display may blink whenthe ICC sensor detects some reflectorsjA which are fitted on vehicles in otherlanes or on the side of the road. This maycause the ICC system to decelerate or ac-celerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor maydetect these reflectors when the vehicleis driven on winding roads, hilly roads orwhen entering or exiting a curve. The ICCsensor may also detect reflectors on nar-row roads or in road construction zones.In these cases you will have to manually

control the proper distance ahead of yourvehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af-fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-neuver or driving position in the lane) ortraffic or vehicle condition (for example, ifa vehicle is being driven with some dam-age).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following con-ditions and the control is automaticallycanceled.

O When the vehicle speed falls belowapproximately 20 MPH (32 km/h)

O When the selector lever is shifted tothe N (Neutral) position

O When the windshield wipers are oper-ated at low speed (LO) or high speed(HI)

O When the VDC is turned off

O When the VDC operates

O When the engine coolant temperaturebecomes excessively high

Warning light and display

Condition A

The chime sounds and the IntelligentCruise Control system is canceled auto-matically in the conditions describedbelow. Part of the system display willcome on or blink, making it impossible toset.

O When the VDC is turned off

O When the VDC operates

O When a tire slips

SSD0284A SSD0465

Starting and driving 5-35

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 262: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O When the SNOW mode switch isturned on

O When strong light (sunlight, etc.) is di-rectly shining on the front of the ve-hicle

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are nolonger present, turn the system off usingthe Intelligent Cruise Control MAINSwitch. Turn the ICC system back on touse the system.

Condition B

When the sensor window is dirty, makingit impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,the ICC system is automatically canceled.

The chime sounds and the systemwarning light (Orange) will come on andthe set distance indicators will blink.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park thevehicle in a safe place, turn the engineoff. Clean the sensor window with a softcloth and then perform the settings again.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operatingproperly, the chime sounds and thesystem warning light (Orange) will comeon.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park thevehicle in a safe place. Turn the engineoff, restart the engine, resume driving andset the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system orthe indicator stays on, it may indicatethat the system is malfunctioning. Al-

SSD0466 SSD0458

5-36 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 263: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

though the vehicle is still driveable undernormal conditions, have the vehiclechecked at an INFINITI dealer.

Sensor maintenance

The sensor for the ICC system jA is lo-cated below the front bumper.

To keep the ICC system operating prop-erly, be sure to observe the following:

O Always keep the sensor clean. Wipewith a soft cloth carefully so as not todamage the sensor.

O Do not strike or damage the areasaround the sensor. Do not touch or re-move the screw located on the sensor.Doing so could cause failure or mal-function. If the sensor is damaged

due to an accident, contact anINFINITI dealer.

O Do not attach a sticker (includingtransparent material) or install an ac-cessory near the sensor. This couldcause failure or malfunction.

CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED)CRUISE CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)without keeping your foot on the accel-erator pedal.

WARNING

O In the conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol mode, a warning chime doesnot sound to warn you if you are tooclose to the vehicle ahead, as neitherthe presence of the vehicle ahead northe vehicle-to-vehicle distance is de-tected.

O Pay special attention to the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicleahead of you or a collision could occur.

SSD0455

Starting and driving 5-37

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 264: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Always confirm the setting in the Intelli-gent Cruise Control system display.

O Do not use the conventional (fixedspeed) cruise control mode when drivingunder the following conditions:

— when it is not possible to keep the ve-hicle at a set speed

— in heavy traffic or in traffic that variesin speed

— on winding or hilly roads

— on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

— in very windy areas

O Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

Conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol switch

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:Resumes set speed or increases speedincrementally.

2. SET/COAST switch:Sets the desired cruise speed, reducesspeed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:Deactivates the system without erasingthe set speed.

4. MAIN switch:Master switch to activate the system.

Conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol mode display andindicators

The display is located under the tachom-eter.

1. Cruise set switch indicator:Displays while the vehicle speed is con-trolled by the conventional (fixedspeed) cruise control mode of the ICCsystem.

2. MAIN switch indicator light:Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

SSD0467 SSD0468

5-38 Starting and driving

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 265: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

3. Cruise system warning light:Comes on if there is a malfunction inthe cruise control system.

Operating conventional (fixedspeed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode, push and hold theMAIN switch jA for longer than about 1.5seconds.

When pushing the MAIN switch on, theIntelligent Cruise Control system displayand the CRUISE indicator light (Green) inthe instrument cluster come on. After youhold the MAIN switch on for longer thanabout 1.5 seconds, the Intelligent CruiseControl system display goes out. TheCRUISE indicator stays lit. You can now

set your desired cruising speed. Pushingthe MAIN switch again will turn thesystem completely off.

When the ignition switch is pushed to theLOCK position, the system is also auto-matically turned off. To use the IntelligentCruise Control again, quickly push and re-lease the MAIN switch (vehicle-to-vehicledistance control mode) or push and holdit (conventional cruise control mode)again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise con-trol, make sure to turn the ON/OFF switchoff when not using the Intelligent CruiseControl.

SSD0469

Starting and driving 5-39

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 266: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-hicle to the desired speed, push theSET/COAST switch and release it. (TheCRUISE SET indicator will come on in thedisplay.) Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal. Your vehicle will maintain the setspeed.

O To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you releasethe pedal, the vehicle will return tothe previously set speed.

O The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, manually main-tain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any ofthe following methods:

a) Push the CANCEL button. The CRUISESET indicator will go out.

b) Tap the brake pedal. The CRUISE SETindicator will go out.

c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator and CRUISE SET in-dicator will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. Whenthe vehicle attains the desired speed,push and release the SET/COASTswitch.

b) Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE set switch. When the ve-hicle attains the speed you desire, re-lease the switch.

c) Push, then quickly release theRESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Eachtime you do this, the set speed will in-crease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed,push the SET/COAST switch and re-lease it.

b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.Release the switch when the vehicleslows down to the desired speed.

c) Push, then quickly release theSET/COAST switch. Each time you dothis, the set speed will decrease byabout 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.The vehicle will resume the last set cruis-ing speed when the vehicle speed is over25 MPH (40 km/h).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following con-ditions and the control is automaticallycanceled.

O When the vehicle slows down morethan 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the setspeed

O When the vehicle speed falls belowapproximately 20 MPH (32 km/h)

SSD0470

5-40 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 267: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O When the selector lever is shifted tothe N (Neutral) position

O When the VDC operates (except ABS,which is functional with ICC systemoperation)

O When the engine coolant temperaturebecomes excessively high

Warning light

When the system is not operating prop-erly, the chime sounds and the systemwarning light (Orange) will come on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park thevehicle in a safe place. Turn the engineoff, restart the engine, resume driving andthen perform the setting again.

If it is not possible to set or the indicatorstays on, it may indicate that the systemis malfunctioning. Although the vehicle isstill driveable under normal conditions,

have the vehicle checked at an INFINITIdealer.

PREVIEW FUNCTION (forIntelligent Cruise Control systemequipped models)

The ICC system with the preview functionidentifies the need to apply emergencybraking by sensing the vehicle ahead inthe same lane and the distance to the ve-hicle ahead and relative speed from it, itapplies the brake pre-pressure before thedriver depresses the brake pedal andhelps improve brake response by re-ducing pedal free play.

For more details, refer to “Brake assist”later in this section.

SSD0490

Starting and driving 5-41

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 268: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and ensurethe future reliability and economy of yournew vehicle.

Failure to follow these recommendationsmay result in shortened engine life and re-duced engine performance.

O Avoid driving for long periods at con-stant speed, either fast or slow. Donot run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

O Do not accelerate at full throttle in anygear.

O Avoid quick starts.

O Avoid hard braking as much as pos-sible.

O Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Main-tain cruising speeds with a constantaccelerator position.

O Drive at moderate speeds on the high-way.

O Avoid unnecessary stopping and brak-ing. Keep a safe distance behind othervehicles.

O Select a gear range suitable to roadconditions.

O Avoid unnecessary prolonged engineidling.

O Keep your engine tuned up.

O Follow the recommended periodicmaintenance schedule.

O Keep the tires inflated at the correctpressure. Improper tire pressure willincrease wear and waste fuel.

O Make sure the front wheels are prop-erly aligned. Improper alignment willcause premature tire wear and lowerfuel economy.

O Climate control operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner onlywhen necessary.

O When cruising at highway speeds, it is

more economical to use the air condi-tioner and leave the windows closed toreduce drag.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

5-42 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 269: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The AWD warning light is located in themeter.

The AWD warning light comes on whenthe ignition switch is pushed to the ONposition. It turns off soon after the engineis started.

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD sys-tem while the engine is running, thewarning light will come on.

The warning light may blink rapidly (abouttwice per second) while trying to free astuck vehicle due to high power train oiltemperature. The driving mode maychange to two-wheel drive. If the warninglight blinks rapidly during operation, stopthe vehicle with the engine idling in asafe place immediately. Then if the lightgoes off after a while, you can continuedriving.

A large difference between the diametersof front and rear wheels will make thewarning light blink slowly (about once pertwo seconds). Pull off the road in a safearea, and idle the engine. Check that alltire sizes are the same, tire pressure iscorrect and tires are not worn.

If the warning light is blinking after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked by an INFINITI dealer as soon aspossible.

WARNING

Do not attempt to test an AWD equippedvehicle with two wheels on a two wheel dy-namometer and the other two wheelsraised. Doing so may result in transmissiondamage or unexpected vehicle movementwhich could result in serious vehicledamage or personal injury.

CAUTION

O Do not operate the engine on a freeroller when any of the wheels areraised.

O If the warning light comes on whiledriving there may be a malfunction inthe AWD system. Reduce the vehiclespeed and have your vehicle checkedby an INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible.

O If the warning light remains on afterthe above operation, have your vehi-

SSD0336

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-43

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 270: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

cle checked by an INFINITI dealer assoon as possible.

O The power train may be damaged if youcontinue driving with the warning lightblinking rapidly.

WARNING

O Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

O Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.

O Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

O Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park).Failure to do so could cause the vehicleto move unexpectedly or roll away andresult in an accident.

O Make sure the automatic transmissionselector lever has been pushed as farforward as it can go and cannot bemoved without depressing the buttonat the end of the lever.

SD1006MA

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-44 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 271: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rollinginto the street when parked on asloping drive way, it is a good practiceto turn the wheels as illustrated.

O HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: j1

Turn the wheels into the curb and movethe vehicle forward until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

O HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: j2

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curbside wheel gently touches the curb.

O HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: j3

Turn the wheels toward the side of theroad so the vehicle will move away fromthe center of the road if it moves.

4. Push the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will be muchharder to operate.

The power assisted steering uses a hydrau-lic pump, driven by the engine, to assiststeering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,you will still have control of the vehicle.However, much greater steering effort isneeded, especially in sharp turns or at lowspeeds.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hy-draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,you will still have braking at two wheels.

You may feel a small click and hear a soundwhen the brake pedal is fully depressedslowly. This is not a malfunction andmeans the brake assist mechanism is oper-ating properly.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by usingengine vacuum. If the engine stops, youcan stop the vehicle by depressing thebrake pedal. However, greater foot pres-sure on the brake pedal will be required tostop the vehicle and the stopping distancewill be longer.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driventhrough water, the brakes may get wet. Asa result, your braking distance will belonger and the vehicle may pull to one sideduring braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly tapping the brake pedalto heat-up the brakes. Do this until thebrakes return to normal. Avoid driving the

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-45

Z 05.2.1/Y50-D X

Page 272: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

vehicle at high speeds until the brakesfunction correctly.

Parking brake bedding

The parking brake shoes must be “beddeddown” whenever the stopping effect of theparking brake is weakened or wheneverthe parking brake shoes and/or drums arereplaced, in order to assure the bestbraking performance.

This procedure is described in the Vehicleservice manual and can be performed by anINFINITI dealer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This will cause overheatingof the brakes, wearing out the brake andpads faster and reduce gas mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speedand downshift to a lower gear before goingdown a slope or long grade. Overheatedbrakes may reduce braking performanceand could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

O While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or acceler-ating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

O If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist for thebrakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedalexceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist isactivated generating greater braking forcethan a conventional brake booster evenwith light pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist brak-ing operation and is not a collision warningor avoidance device. It is the driver’s respon-sibility to stay alert, drive safely and be incontrol of the vehicle at all times.

PREVIEW FUNCTION (IntelligentCruise Control system equippedmodel)

When the Preview Function identifies theneed to apply emergency braking bysensing a vehicle ahead in the same laneand the distance and relative speed from it,it applies the brake pre-pressure before thedriver depresses the brake pedal and helpsimprove brake response by reducing pedalfree play.

BRAKE ASSIST

5-46 Starting and driving

Z 05.2.1/Y50-D X

Page 273: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O This system will not operate when thevehicle is moving at approximately 20MPH (32 km/h) or less.

O The pre-pressure function ceaseswhen the following conditions aremet:

a) When the driver depresses the accel-erator pedal or the brake pedal.

b) If the driver does not operate the ac-celerator or brake pedal within ap-proximately 1 second.

O The sensor will not detect:

a) Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

b) Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

c) Motorcycles traveling offset in thetravel lane as illustrated

WARNING

O This system is only an aid to assistbraking operation and is not a collisionwarning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert,drive safely and be in control of the ve-hicle at all times.

O As there is a performance limit to thePreview Function, never rely solely onthis system. This system does not cor-rect careless inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor vis-ibility in rain, fog, or other badweather. Reduce vehicle speed by de-pressing the brake pedal, in order tomaintain a safe distance between ve-hicles.

O The system may not detect the vehiclein front of you in certain road orweather conditions. The Preview Func-tion may not operate properly underthe following conditions. The vehicle isstill drivable under normal conditionsand the Brake Assist will operate.— When rain, snow or dirt adhere to

the system sensor— When strong light (for example, at

sunrise or sunset) is directly shiningon the front of the vehicle

SSD0338

Starting and driving 5-47

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 274: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

— Winding or hilly roads may causethe sensor to temporarily not detecta vehicle in the same lane or maydetect objects or vehicles in otherlanes.

— Vehicle position in the lane maycause the sensor to temporarily notdetect a vehicle in the same lane ormay detect objects or vehicles inother lanes.

O When the Preview Function operates,the brake pedal may move slightly andmay make a small noise. This is not asystem malfunction. Warning light and display

When the Preview Function is not oper-ating properly, the buzzer sounds and thesystem warning light (Orange) will comeon.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park thevehicle in a safe place. Turn the engineoff, restart the engine and resume driving.

If the indicator stays on, it may indicatethat the Preview Function is malfunc-tioning (the brake is operative). Althoughthe Vehicle is still driveable under normal

conditions, have the vehicle checked atan INFINITI dealer.

How to handle the sensor

The sensor for the Preview Function iscommon with Intelligent Cruise Controland is located below the front bumper.

To keep the Preview Function operatingproperly, be sure to observe the fol-lowing:

O Always keep the sensor clean. Wipewith a soft cloth carefully so as not todamage the sensor.

O Do not strike or damage the areasaround the sensor. Do not touch or re-move the screw located on the sensor.Doing so could cause failure or mal-function. If the sensor is damageddue to an accident, contact anINFINITI dealer.

O Do not attach a sticker (includingtransparent material) or install an ac-cessory near the sensor. This couldcause failure or malfunction.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) controlsthe brakes so the wheels will not lock

SSD0471

5-48 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 275: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

when braking abruptly or when brakingon slippery surfaces. The system detectsthe rotation speed at each wheel and var-ies the brake fluid pressure to preventeach wheel from locking and sliding. Bypreventing wheel lockup, the systemhelps the driver maintain steering controland helps to minimize swerving and spin-ning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold itdown.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stopping distances.

Normal operation

The ABS will not operate at speeds below3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h). The speedswill vary according to road conditions.When the ABS senses that one or morewheels are close to locking up, the actua-tor (under the hood) rapidly applies andreleases hydraulic pressure (like pumpingthe brakes very quickly). While the actua-tor is working, you may feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibra-tion from the actuator under the hood.This is normal and indicates that the ABSis working properly. However, the ABS op-eration may indicate that road conditionsare hazardous and extra care is requiredwhile driving.

Self-test feature

The ABS consists of electronic sensors,electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoidscontrolled by a computer. The computerhas a built-in diagnostic feature that teststhe system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed inforward or reverse. When the self-test oc-curs, you may hear a clank noise and/orfeel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal and is not an indication of anymalfunction. If the computer senses anymalfunction, it switches the ABS off andturns on the ABS brake warning light inthe instrument panel. The brake systemwill then behave normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the light comes on during the self-test,or while you are driving, you should takeyour vehicle to an INFINITI dealer for re-pair at your earliest convenience.

WARNING

The anti-lock brake system is a sophisti-cated device, but it cannot prevent acci-dents resulting from careless or dangerousdriving techniques. It can help maintain ve-hicle control during braking on slipperysurfaces, but remember that the stoppingdistance on slippery surfaces will be longerthan on normal surfaces even with the anti-lock system. Stopping distances may alsobe longer on rough, gravel or snow coveredroads, or if you are using tire chains. Tiretype and condition of tires may also affectbraking effectiveness. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in front ofyou. Ultimately, the responsibility forsafety of self and others rests in the handsof the driver.

O When replacing tires, install the speci-fied size of tires on all four wheels.

O When installing a spare tire, make sureit is the proper size and type as speci-fied on the Tire and Loading Informa-

Starting and driving 5-49

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 276: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

tion label. See “9. Technical and con-sumer information” section of thismanual.

When accelerating or driving on a slipperysurface, the tires may spin or slide. Withthe Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system, sensors detect these movementsand control the braking and engineoutput to help improve vehicle stability.

O When the VDC system is operating,the “SLIP” indicator in the instrumentpanel blinks.

O When only the Traction Control System(TCS) portion of the VDC system is op-erating, the “SLIP” indicator in the in-strument panel blinks.

O If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the roadconditions are slippery. Be sure to ad-just your speed and driving to theseconditions. Be sure to drive carefully.See “SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT”, and“VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF INDICATOR LIGHT” in the “2. In-struments and controls” section.

O Indicator lightIf a malfunction occurs in the system,the “SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicatorlights illuminate in the instrumentpanel. As long as these warning lightsare illuminated, the VDC system func-tion is canceled.

The VDC system uses an Active Brake Lim-ited Slip (ABLS) function to improve ve-hicle traction. The ABLS system workswhen one of the driving wheels is spin-ning on a slippery surface. The ABLS sys-tem brakes the spinning wheel, whichdistributes the driving power to the otherdrive wheel. If the vehicle is operatedwith the VDC system turned off, all VDCsystem and TCS functions will be turnedoff. The ABLS system and ABS will stilloperate with the VDC system off. If theABLS system or ABS is activated, the“SLIP” indicator light will blink and youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pul-sation in the brake pedal. This is normaland is not an indication of a malfunction.

While the VDC system is operating, youmay feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or feel a vibration fromunder the hood. This is normal and indi-cates that the VDC system is workingproperly.

The VDC system computer has a built-indiagnostic feature that tests the systemeach time you start the engine and movethe vehicle at a low speed forward orbackward. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel apulsation in the brake pedal. This is

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM

5-50 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 277: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

normal and is not an indication of a mal-function.

WARNING

O The VDC system is designed to help im-prove driving stability but does not pre-vent accidents due to abrupt steeringoperation at high speeds or due tocareless or dangerous driving tech-niques. Reduce vehicle speed and beespecially careful when driving and cor-nering on slippery surfaces and alwaysdrive carefully.

O If engine related parts such as mufflerare not standard equipment or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” in-dicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi-cator lights may illuminate.

O Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer barsand bushings are not INFINITI ap-proved or are extremely deterioratedthe VDC system may not operate prop-erly. This could adversely affect vehicle

handling performance, and the “VDCOFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator orboth indicator lights may illuminate.

O If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or“SLIP” indicator or both indicatorlights may illuminate.

O When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the VDC system may not operate prop-erly and the “VDC OFF” indicator or“SLIP” indicator or both indicatorlights may illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

O When driving on unstable surfaces suchas a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp,the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indi-cator or both indicator lights may illu-minate. This is not a malfunction. Re-start the engine after driving onto astable surface.

O If wheels or tires other than those rec-

ommended are used, the VDC systemmay not operate properly and “VDCOFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator orboth indicator lights may illuminate.

O The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.

Starting and driving 5-51

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 278: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The Rear Active Steer (RAS) system is anelectronically controlled four-wheelsteering system.

The angle of the rear wheels are adjustedby the RAS system, depending on the ve-hicle speed and steering angle. The rearwheels are designed to turn momentarilyin the opposite direction and then changeto the same direction as the front wheels.

At low speeds, the rear wheels will notturn and the system functions as a two-wheel steering system.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theRAS function will stop but the ordinarytwo-wheel steering system will operatenormally. The “RAS” warning light will il-luminate.

If the light illuminates while you are driv-ing, contact an INFINITI dealer for repair.

WARNING

The RAS system, although a sophisticateddevice, cannot prevent accidents resultingfrom careless or dangerous driving tech-niques. Ultimately the responsibility forsafety of self and others rests in the hands

of the driver. Therefore only through atten-tive and careful driving methods can theRAS system be fully appreciated and safetyassured.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing,apply de-icer or glycerin to it through thekey hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heatthe key before inserting it into the keyhole.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated thatthe temperature will drop below 32°F(0°C), check antifreeze to assure properwinter protection. For additional informa-tion, see “Engine cooling system” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged duringextremely cold weather conditions, thebattery fluid may freeze and damage thebattery. To maintain maximum efficiency,the battery should be checked regularly.For additional information, see “Battery”in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside withoutantifreeze, drain the cooling system byopening the drain plug located under the

REAR ACTIVE STEER (RAS) SYSTEM COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-52 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 279: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

radiator. Refill before operating the ve-hicle. See “Engine cooling system” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion for changing engine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design toprovide superior performance on drypavement. However, the performanceof these tires will be substantially re-duced in snowy and icy conditions. Ifyou operate your vehicle on snowy oricy roads, INFINITI recommends theuse of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASONtires on all four wheels. Please consultan INFINITI dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability infor-mation.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,studded tires may be used. However,some provinces and states prohibittheir use. Check local, state and provin-cial laws before installing studdedtires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may bepoorer than that of non-studded snowtires.

3. Tire chains may be used if desired.

Make sure they are of proper size forthe tires on your vehicle and are in-stalled according to the chain manufac-turer’s suggestions.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-cording to location. Check the local lawsbefore installing tire chains. When in-stalling tire chains, make sure they are theproper size for the tires on your vehicle andare installed according to the chain manu-facturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE ClassS chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”chains are designed to meet the SAE stan-dard minimum clearances between the tireand the closest vehicle suspension or bodycomponent required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chainsor cables). The minimum clearances are de-termined using the factory equipped tiresize. Other types may damage your vehicle.Use chain tensioners when recommendedby the tire chain manufacturer to ensure atight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to prevent thepossibility of whipping action damage tothe fenders or underbody. If possible,avoid fully loading your vehicle when usingtire chains. In addition, drive at a reducedspeed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be

damaged and/or vehicle handling and per-formance may be adversely affected.

O Never install tire chains on TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tires.

O Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

O Tire chains must be installed only onthe rear wheels and not on the frontwheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on pavedroads which are clear of snow. Drivingwith chains in such conditions cancause damage to the various mecha-nisms of the vehicle due to some over-stress.

4. For all-wheel drive:If you install snow tires, they must alsobe the same size, brand, constructionand tread pattern on all four wheels.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following itemsbe carried in the vehicle during winter:

1. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-move ice and snow from the win-

Starting and driving 5-53

Z 05.2.1/Y50-D X

Page 280: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

dows and wiper blades.

2. A sturdy, flat board to be placed underthe jack to give it firm support.

3. A shovel to dig the vehicle out ofsnow-drifts.

4. Extra window washer fluid to refill thereservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

O Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

O Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshiftingtoo fast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

O Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

O Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

O Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patchof ice is seen ahead, brake beforereaching it. Try not to brake while onthe ice, and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

O Do not use cruise control on slipperyroads.

O Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

An engine block heater to assist extremecold temperature starting is availablethrough an INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

Do not use your heater with an ungroundedelectrical system or two-pronged (cheater)adapters. You can be injured by an elec-trical shock if you use an ungroundedconnection.

5-54 Starting and driving

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 281: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

6 In case of emergency

Roadside assistance program........................... 6-2Flat tire ............................................................ 6-2

Low tire pressure warning system............... 6-2Run-flat tires (if so equipped) ..................... 6-3Changing a flat tire ..................................... 6-4

Jump starting.................................................... 6-9

Push starting.................................................. 6-11If your vehicle overheats................................ 6-12Towing your vehicle........................................ 6-13

Towing recommended by INFINITI............ 6-14Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuckvehicle) ..................................................... 6-16

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 282: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year,unlimited mileage Roadside Assistanceplan. In the event of a roadsideemergency, Roadside Assistance Serviceis available to you. Please refer to yourWarranty Information Booklet (U.S.) orWarranty & Roadside AssistanceInformation Booklet (Canada) for details.Both the Warranty Information Bookletand Roadside Assistance Calling Card inyour Owner’s Literature Portfolio providethe Toll-Free Number to call for assistance.Roadside Assistance is provided 24 hoursa day, 365 days a year, for 4 years fromthe date sold to give emergency roadsidehelp, in the event of mechanical ornonmechanical trouble(s) such as flattires, out-of-gas, dead battery, lost keys,mechanical breakdown, accident, etc.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGSYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with the low tirepressure warning system. It monitors tirepressure of all tires except the spare.When the tire pressure warning light is lit,one or more of your tires is significantlyunderinflated. If equipped, the systemalso displays pressure of all tires (exceptthe spare tire) on the display screen bysending a signal from a sensor that is in-stalled in each wheel. If the vehicle is be-ing driven with a low tire pressure (lowerthan 27 psi, 190 kPa), the low tire pres-sure warning system will activate andwarn you of it by the low tire pressurewarning light or a LOW PRESSURE infor-mation displayed on the screen. This sys-tem will activate only when the vehicle isdriven at speeds above 20 MPH (32km/h). For more details, please refer to“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “2. Instruments and con-trols” section, “Tire pressure information”in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone,and voice recognition systems” sectionand “Low tire pressure warning system”in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

O If the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on or a LOW PRESSURE informa-tion is displayed on the monitor screenwhile driving, avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers or abrupt braking, reducevehicle speed, pull off the road to asafe location and stop the vehicle assoon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the pressure ofall four tires. Adjust the pressure to therecommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label to turn the low tire pres-sure warning light OFF. If you have aflat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible.

O If your vehicle is equipped with run-flattires, you can continue driving after youhave a flat tire. However, rememberthat vehicle handling stability is re-duced, which could lead to an accident

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 283: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

and personal injury. See “Wheels andtires” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for more details andmake sure to observe the cautions aboutrun-flat tires. Failure to do so may resultin a serious accident.

O Immediately after a spare tire ismounted, a wheel is replaced or a tire ro-tation is performed, tire pressure will notbe indicated on the display and the lowtire pressure warning system will notfunction. Reset the system and by drivingthe vehicle at over 25 MPH (40 km/h) forapproximately 10 minutes. If tire pres-sure is not indicated after performing theresetting procedure above, contact an IN-FINITI dealer as soon as possible.

O Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by INFINITI could affect theproper operation of the low tire pressurewarning system.

O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

RUN-FLAT TIRES (if so equipped)

Run-flat tires are those tires that can beused temporarily if they are punctured.After driving to a safe location, replace thepunctured run-flat tire, following the in-structions later in “Changing a flat tire”.For additional information, see “Wheelsand tires” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. Also, see the tire safetyinformation in the INFINITI Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.

WARNING

O Although you can continue driving with apunctured run-flat tire, remember thatvehicle handling stability is reduced,which could lead to an accident and per-sonal injury. Also, driving a long distanceat high speeds may damage the tires.

O Do not drive at speeds above 55 MPH (88km/h) and do not drive more than 50miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flattire. A punctured tire may burst andcause a serious accident, resulting inpersonal injury.

O Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoidhard cornering or braking, which maycause you to lose control of the vehicle.

O If a rear tire is punctured, replace it witha non-punctured tire, especially whendriving on rainy snowy or icy roads.

CAUTION

O Never install tire chains on a puncturedrun-flat tire, as this could damage yourvehicle.

O Avoid driving over any projection or pot-hole, as the clearance between the ve-hicle and the ground is smaller than nor-mal.

O Do not enter an automated car wash witha punctured run-flat tire.

O Have the punctured tire replaced by anINFINITI dealer as soon as possible, asthe tire’s performance capability isreduced.

In case of emergency 6-3

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 284: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc-tions below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the roadand away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply theparking brake. Shift the automatictransmission into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,and to signal professional road assis-tance personnel that you need assis-tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-hicle and stand in a safe place, awayfrom traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

O Make sure the parking brake is se-curely applied and the automatic trans-mission is shifted into P (Park).

O Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

O Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

O When a spare tire is mounted or awheel is replaced, tire pressure will notbe indicated and the low tire pressurewarning system will not function. Con-tact an INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks j1 at both the frontand back of the wheel diagonally oppo-site the flat tire to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

MCE0001A

6-4 In case of emergency

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 285: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire fromthe storage area located inside the trunk asillustrated.

Raise the trunk floor cover j1 using thehandle jA , then hang it on the edge of thetrunk opening j2 . Remove the cap j3holding the spare tire.

SCE0558Spare tire − Type A

SCE0579Spare tire − Type B

SCE0580Jacking tools − T-type

SCE0581Jacking tools − Conventional

In case of emergency 6-5

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 286: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Jacking up the vehicle andremoving the damaged tire

WARNING

O Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

O Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not usethe jack provided with your vehicle on

other vehicles. The jack is designed forlifting only your vehicle during a tirechange.

O Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle forjack support.

O Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

O Never use blocks on or under the jack.

O Do not start or run the engine while ve-hicle is on the jack, as it may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slip differen-tials.

O Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attachedto the jack body and the following in-structions.

CE1089-AJack-up point

6-6 In case of emergency

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 287: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint so that top of the jack contactsthe vehicle at the jack-up point. Alignthe center of both the jack head and thenotch at the jack-up point as shown.Also fit the notched portion of the ve-hicle in the groove of the jack head asshown.

The jack should be used on level firmground.

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turnsby turning counterclockwise with thewheel nut wrench. Do not remove the

wheel nuts until the tire is off theground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tireclears the ground. To lift the vehicle, se-curely hold the jack lever and rod withboth hands as shown above. Removethe wheel nuts, and then remove thetire.

Installing the spare tire

The T-type spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions underthe heading “Wheels and tires” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surfacebetween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on andtighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

SCE0504 SCE0039

In case of emergency 6-7

Z 05.2.14/Y50-D X

Page 288: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

wheel nuts alternately and evenly untilthey are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with thewheel nut wrench, tighten the wheelnuts securely in the sequence as illus-trated (j1 , j2 , j3 , j4 , j5 ). Lower thevehicle completely.

WARNING

O Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tight-ened wheel nuts can cause the wheel tobecome loose or come off. This couldcause an accident.

O Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

O Retighten the wheel nuts after the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.). As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torque witha torque wrench.

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Wheel nut tightening torque:80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)

O Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-sure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked forthree hours or more or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on theTire and Loading Information label af-fixed to the driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display of the tire pres-sure information may show higher pres-sure than the COLD tire pressure after thevehicle has been driven more than 1 mile(1.6 km). This is because the tire pressur-izes as the tire temperature rises. Thisdoes not indicate a system malfunction.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jackingequipment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunkfloor carpeting over the damaged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

O Always make sure that the spare tire andjacking equipment are properly securedafter use.

SCE0505

6-8 In case of emergency

Z 05.2.1/Y50-D X

Page 289: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Such items can become dangerous pro-jectiles in an accident or sudden stop.

O The T-type spare tire and small sizespare tire are designed for emergencyuse. See “Wheels and tires” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

If needed Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty Information Booklet(Canada).

To start your engine with a booster bat-tery, the instructions and precautionsbelow must be followed.

WARNING

O If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

O Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

O Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulphuric acid solution whichcan cause severe burns. If the fluidshould come into contact with any-thing, immediately flush the contactedarea with water.

O Keep the battery out of the reach ofchildren.

O The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly ratedbattery can damage your vehicle.

O Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do notlean over the battery when jumpstarting.

O Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

O Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty Information Booklet(Canada).

JUMP STARTING

In case of emergency 6-9

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 290: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personal in-jury.

1. Remove the battery cover and the en-gine compartment cover. To removethe engine compartment cover, un-hook the clips as illustrated.

2. If the booster battery is in another ve-hicle jA , position the two vehicles (jA

and jB ) to bring their batteries intoclose proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles totouch.

3. Apply parking brake. Move the se-lector lever to P (Park). Switch off allunnecessary electrical systems (light,heater, air conditioner, etc.).

4. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with afirmly wrung out moist cloth jC to re-

duce explosion hazard.

5. Connect jumper cables in the se-quence as illustrated (j1 → j2 → j3→ j4 ).

If the battery is disconnected or dis-charged, the steering wheel will lockand cannot be turned. Supply powerusing jumper cables before pushingthe ignition switch and disengagingthe steering lock.

SCE0559 SCE0560

6-10 In case of emergency

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 291: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

O Always connect positive (+) to positive(+) and negative (−) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

O Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that clamps do not con-tact any other metal.

6. Start the engine of the booster vehiclejA and let it run for a few minutes.

7. Keep the engine speed of the boostervehicle jA at about 2,000 rpm, andstart your engine of the jumped ve-hicle jB in the normal manner.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, push the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position and wait 10seconds before trying again.

8. After starting your engine, carefullydisconnect the negative cable andthen the positive cable (j4 → j3 →j2 → j1 ).

9. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).Be sure to dispose of the cloth used tocover the vent holes as it may be con-taminated with corrosive acid.

10. Put the battery cover and the enginecompartment cover on.

Do not attempt to start the engine bypushing.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannot bepush started. Attempting to do so maycause transmission damage.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Infor-mation Booklet (Canada).

PUSH STARTING

In case of emergency 6-11

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 292: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

O Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

O To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

O Do not open the hood if steam iscoming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicatedby an extremely high temperature gaugereading), or if you feel a lack of enginepower, detect abnormal noise, etc., takethe following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,apply the parking brake and move theselector lever to P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the climate control. Open allthe windows, move the heater or air

conditioner temperature control tomaximum hot and fan control to highspeed.

3. If engine overheating is caused byclimbing a long hill on a hot day, runthe engine at a fast idle (approxi-mately 1,500 rpm) until the tempera-ture gauge indication returns tonormal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listenfor steam or coolant escaping from theradiator before opening the hood (Ifsteam or coolant is escaping, turn offthe engine.). Do not open the hoodfurther until no steam or coolant canbe seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is run-ning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant isleaking, or the cooling fan does notrun, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine cooling fancan start at any time when the coolant tem-perature is high.

7. After the engine cools down, checkthe coolant level in the reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolantto the reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at thenearest INFINITI dealer.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Infor-mation Booklet (Canada).

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-12 In case of emergency

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 293: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro-vincial in Canada) and local regulationsfor towing must be followed. Incorrecttowing equipment could damage your ve-hicle. Towing instructions are availablefrom an INFINITI dealer. Local service op-erators will generally be familiar with theapplicable laws and procedures fortowing. To assure proper towing and toprevent accidental damage to your ve-hicle, INFINITI recommends that youhave a service operator tow your vehicle.It is advisable to have the service op-erator carefully read the following precau-tions.

WARNING

O Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

O Never get under your vehicle after ithas been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

O When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpower train are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

O Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to“Flat towing” in the “9. Technical andconsumer information” section of thismanual.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Infor-mation Booklet (Canada).

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-13

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 294: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYINFINITI

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

INFINITI recommends that your vehiclebe towed with the driving (rear) wheelsoff the ground or place the vehicle on aflat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

O Never tow automatic transmission mod-els with the rear wheels on the groundor four wheels on the ground (forwardor backward), as this may cause se-rious and expensive damage to thetransmission. If it is necessary to towthe vehicle with the front wheelsraised, always use towing dollies underthe rear wheels.

O When towing rear wheel drive modelswith the front wheels on the ground oron towing dollies: Push the ignitionswitch to the ACC or ON position, andsecure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similardevice. Never secure the steering wheelby pushing the ignition switch to theLOCK position. This may damage thesteering lock mechanism.

SCE0561Two-wheel drive models

6-14 In case of emergency

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 295: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

INFINITI recommends that towing dolliesbe used when towing your vehicle or thevehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as il-lustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow AWD models with any of thewheels on the ground as this may causeserious and expensive damage to thepower train.

SCE0488All-wheel drive models

SCE0562

In case of emergency 6-15

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 296: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing astuck vehicle)

WARNING

O Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

O Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

Securely install the vehicle recovery hookj1 stored with jacking tools. Make surethat the hook is properly secured in theoriginal place after use.

Do not use the tie down hooks j2 fortowing or vehicle recovery.

CAUTION

O Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the vehicle recovery hooks ormain structural members of the vehicle.Otherwise, the vehicle body will be

damaged.

O Do not use the vehicle tie downs to freea vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.

O Never tow a vehicle using the vehicletie downs or recovery hooks.

O Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front of the vehicle. Never pull onthe vehicle at an angle.

O Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or cooling sys-tems.

O Pull devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow,mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and be-hind the vehicle is clear of obstruc-tions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left

to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward andbackward.

O Shift back and forth between R (Re-verse) and D (Drive).

O Apply the accelerator as little as pos-sible to maintain the rocking motion.

O Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D.

O Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after afew tries, contact a professionaltowing service to remove the vehicle.

6-16 In case of emergency

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 297: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior .............................................. 7-2Washing...................................................... 7-2Waxing........................................................ 7-2Removing spots .......................................... 7-3Underbody .................................................. 7-3Glass .......................................................... 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels ............................... 7-3Chrome parts .............................................. 7-3

Cleaning interior............................................... 7-3

Floor mats................................................... 7-4Seat belts ................................................... 7-4Rear sunshade (if so equipped) .................. 7-4

Corrosion protection......................................... 7-5Most common factors contributing tovehicle corrosion......................................... 7-5Environmental factors influence the rateof corrosion ................................................ 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........ 7-5

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 298: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

In order to maintain the appearance ofyour vehicle, it is important to take propercare of it.

To protect the paint surface, wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

O after a rainfall to prevent possibledamage from acid rain

O after driving on coastal roads

O when contaminants such as soot, birddroppings, tree sap, metal particles orbugs get on the paint surface

O when dust or mud builds up on thesurface

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, parkin a shady area or protect the vehicle witha body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-face when putting on or removing thebody cover.

WASHING

Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the ve-hicle with a wet sponge and plenty ofclean water. Clean the vehicle thoroughlyusing a mild soap, special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquidmixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot)water. Rinse the vehicle again with plentyof clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on thedoors, hatches and hood are particularlyvulnerable to the effects of road salt.Therefore, these areas must be regularlycleaned. Make sure that the drain holesin the lower edge of the door are open.Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and washaway road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paintsurface by using a damp chamois to drythe vehicle.

CAUTION

O Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

O Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot,as the surface may becomewater-spotted.

O Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removing caked-ondirt or other foreign substances so thepaint surface is not scratched or dam-aged.

WAXING

If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use awax specified for use over clear coats, suchas Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax, becauseyour INFINITI has been finished with thefinest paint and hard clear coats. YourINFINITI dealer can assist you in choosingthe proper product.

O Wax your vehicle only after a thoroughwashing. Follow the instructions sup-plied with the wax.

O Do not use a wax containing any abra-sives, cutting compounds or cleanersthat may damage the vehicle finish.

O If the surface does not polish easily,use a road tar remover and wax again.

Machine compound or aggressive pol-ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 299: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

finish may dull the finish or leave swirlmarks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,insects, and tree sap as quickly as pos-sible from the paint surface to avoid last-ing damage or staining. Special cleaningproducts are available at an INFINITIdealer or automotive accessory stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used inwinter, the underbody must be cleanedregularly. This will prevent dirt and saltfrom building up and causing underbodyand suspension corrosion. Before thewinter period and again in the spring, theunderseal must be checked and, if neces-sary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke anddust film from the glass surfaces. It isnormal for glass to become coated with afilm after the vehicle is parked in the hotsun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth willeasily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electricalconductors, radio antenna elements or rearwindow defogger elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly, especially during wintermonths in areas where road salt is used.Salt could discolor the wheels if not re-moved.

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain thefinish.

Occasionally remove loose dust from theinterior trim, plastic parts and seats usinga vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe thevinyl and leather surfaces with a clean,soft cloth dampened in mild soap solu-tion, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth.Before using any fabric protector, readthe manufacturer’s recommendations.Some fabric protectors contain chemicalsthat may stain or bleach the seat mate-rial. Use a cloth dampened only withwater, to clean the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

O Never use benzine, thinner, or anysimilar material.

O The leather seats should be regularlycoated with a leather wax like saddlesoap. Never use car wax.

O Only use fabric protectors approved byINFINITI.

O Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It maydamage the lens cover.

CLEANING INTERIOR

Appearance and care 7-3

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 300: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

FLOOR MATS

The use of INFINITI floor mats can extendthe life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matterwhat mats are used, be sure they are fit-ted for your vehicle and are properly po-sitioned in the footwell to prevent inter-ference with pedal operation. Matsshould be maintained with regularcleaning and replaced if they become ex-cessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid

This model includes front floor mat brack-ets to act as floor mat positioning aid.INFINITI floor mats have been speciallydesigned for your vehicle model. The frontfloor mats have grommet holes in them.To install, simply position the mat byplacing the floor mat bracket through thefloor mat grommet hole while centeringthe mat in the floor pan contour.

Periodically check to make certain thatthe mats are properly positioned.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wipingthem with a sponge dampened in a mildsoap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-pletely before using them.

See “Seat belt maintenance” in the“1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemi-cal solvents to clean the seat belts, sincethese materials may severely weaken theseat belt webbing.

REAR SUNSHADE (if so equipped)

Screen

To clean, fully extend the rear sunshadescreen and clean dust or dirt off using avacuum cleaner from the inside of thecompartment. See “Rear sunshade” in the“2. Instruments and controls” section forrear sunshade operation.

SAI0031

7-4 Appearance and care

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 301: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

Be careful not to damage the screen whilecleaning.

Cover

Wipe the rear sunshade cover with aclean, dry cloth.

CAUTION

Never use benzine, thinner or any otherneutral detergent as this may deform thecover.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

O The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panelsections, cavities, and other areas.

O Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stonechips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water onthe vehicle body underside can acceleratecorrosion. Wet floor coverings will not drycompletely inside the vehicle, and shouldbe removed for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas ofhigh relative humidity, especially thoseareas where the temperatures stay abovefreezing where atmospheric pollution ex-ists, or where road salt is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate therate of corrosion to those parts which arenot well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of saltin the air in coastal areas, or heavy roadsalt use will accelerate the corrosion pro-cess. Road salt will also accelerate thedisintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROMCORROSION

O Wash your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

O Always check for minor damage to thepaint and repair it as soon as pos-sible.

O Keep drain holes at the bottom of thedoors open to avoid water accumula-tion.

O Check the underbody for accumulationof sand, dirt or salt. If present, washwith water as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 302: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

O NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debrisfrom the passenger compartment bywashing it out with a hose. Remove dirtwith a vacuum cleaner or broom.

O Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicingare extremely corrosive. They acceleratecorrosion and deterioration of underbodycomponents such as the exhaust system,fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floorpan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must becleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust andcorrosion, which may be required in someareas, consult an INFINITI dealer.

7-6 Appearance and care

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 303: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirement ................................. 8-2General maintenance ........................................ 8-2

Explanation of maintenance items................ 8-2Maintenance precautions.................................. 8-5Engine compartment check locations................. 8-7

VK45DE engine............................................ 8-7VQ35DE engine ........................................... 8-9

Engine cooling system .................................... 8-10Checking engine coolant level.................... 8-11Changing engine coolant ........................... 8-11

Engine oil ....................................................... 8-13Checking engine oil level ........................... 8-13Changing engine oil and filter .................... 8-14

Automatic transmission fluid........................... 8-16Power steering fluid ........................................ 8-17Brake fluid...................................................... 8-17Window washer fluid....................................... 8-18Battery ........................................................... 8-18

Jump starting............................................. 8-20Drive belts ...................................................... 8-20Spark plugs .................................................... 8-21

Replacing spark plugs ............................... 8-21

Air cleaner ...................................................... 8-22Windshield wiper blades ................................. 8-23

Cleaning.................................................... 8-23Replacing .................................................. 8-23

Parking brake and brake pedal ........................ 8-25Checking parking brake ............................. 8-25Checking brake pedal ................................ 8-25Brake booster............................................ 8-26

Fuses ............................................................. 8-26Engine compartment.................................. 8-27Passenger compartment ............................ 8-28

Intelligent Key battery replacement................. 8-29Lights............................................................. 8-31

Headlights ................................................ 8-32Exterior and interior lights ......................... 8-33

Wheels and tires ............................................. 8-35Tire pressure ............................................. 8-35Tire labeling .............................................. 8-38Types of tires............................................. 8-40Tire chains ................................................ 8-42Changing wheels and tires......................... 8-43

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 304: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Your new INFINITI has been designed tohave minimum maintenance requirementswith longer service intervals to save youboth time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essen-tial to maintain your INFINITI’s fine me-chanical condition, as well as its emissionand engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure that the specified maintenance, aswell as general maintenance, is per-formed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the onlyone who can ensure that your vehicle re-ceives the proper maintenance care. Youare a vital link in the maintenance chain.

Scheduled maintenance:

For your convenience, both required andoptional scheduled maintenance itemsare described and listed in your “INFINITIService and Maintenance Guide”. Youmust refer to that guide to ensure thatnecessary maintenance is performed onyour INFINITI at regular intervals.

General maintenance:

General maintenance includes those itemswhich should be checked during normalday-to-day operation. They are essential

for proper vehicle operation. It is yourresponsibility to perform these proceduresregularly as prescribed.

These checks or inspections can be doneby yourself, a qualified technician or, ifyou prefer, an INFINITI dealer.

Where to go for service:

If maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have thesystems checked and serviced by anINFINITI dealer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through tech-nical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership information systems. They arecompletely qualified to work on INFINITIvehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that an INFINITIdealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenancerequirements on your vehicle — in areliable and economic way.

During the normal day-to-day operation ofthe vehicle, general maintenance shouldbe performed regularly as prescribed inthis section. If you detect any unusualsounds, vibrations or smell, be sure tocheck for the cause or have an INFINITIdealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify an INFINITI dealer if youthink that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-nance work, see “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCEITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe performed from time to time, unlessotherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that alldoors and the engine hood, operate prop-erly. Also ensure that all latches lock se-curely. Lubricate hinges and latches ifnecessary. Make sure that the secondarylatch keeps the hood from opening when

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 305: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

the primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt orother corrosive materials, check lubrica-tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regularbasis. Make sure that the headlights,stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights,and other lights are all operating properlyand installed securely. Also check head-light aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: Whenchecking the tires, make sure no wheelnuts are missing, and check for any loosewheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-ery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gaugeoften and always prior to long distancetrips. If necessary, adjust the pressure inall tires, including the spare, to the pres-sure specified. Check carefully fordamage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If thevehicle should pull to either side whiledriving on a straight and level road, or ifyou detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancingmay be needed.

For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on aregular basis. Check the windshield atleast every six months for cracks or otherdamage. Have a damaged windshield re-paired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check forcracks or wear if they do not wipe prop-erly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked on a regular basis, such aswhen performing periodic maintenance,cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure thepedal does not catch or require uneveneffort. Keep the floor mat away from thepedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha-nism: On a fairly steep hill, check thatyour vehicle is held securely with the se-lector lever in the P (Park) positionwithout applying any brakes.

Brake pedal*: Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure it has the properdistance under it when depressed fully.Check the brake booster function. Be sureto keep the floor mat away from thepedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pullthe vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake*: Check that the pedal hasthe proper travel and confirm that yourvehicle is held securely on a fairly steephill with only the parking brake applied.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seatbelt system (For example, buckles, an-chors, adjusters and retractors) operateproperly and smoothly, and are installedsecurely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,fraying, wear or damage.

Seats: Check seat position controls suchas seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc.to ensure they operate smoothly and thatall latches lock securely in every position.Check that the head restraints move up

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 306: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

and down smoothly and that the locks (ifso equipped) hold securely in all latchedpositions.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in thesteering conditions, such as excessivefree play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make surethat all warning lights and chimes are op-erating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets prop-erly and in sufficient quantity when oper-ating the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Checkthat the wipers and washer operateproperly and that the wipers do notstreak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked periodically (For example,each time you check the engine oil or re-fuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in eachcell.It should be between the MAX and MINlines. Vehicles operated in high tempera-tures or under severe condition require

frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that thebrake fluid level is between the MAX andMIN lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that nobelt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level afterparking the vehicle on a level spot andturning off the engine. (Wait more than 15minutes for the oil to drain back into theoil pan.)

Exhaust system: Make sure there are noloose supports, cracks or holes. If thesound of the exhaust seems unusual orthere is a smell of exhaust fumes, imme-diately locate the trouble and correct it.See “Precautions when starting anddriving” in the “5. Starting and driving”section for exhaust gas (Carbon monox-ide).

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle forfuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks afterthe vehicle has been parked for a while.Water dripping from the air conditionerafter use is normal. If you should noticeany leaks or if gasoline fumes are evi-

dent, check for the cause and have it cor-rected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:Check the level when the fluid is cold andthe engine is turned off. Check the linesfor proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front ofthe radiator and clean off any dirt, in-sects, leaves, etc., that may have accumu-lated. Make sure the hoses have nocracks, deformation, deterioration orloose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequentlyexposed to corrosive substances such asthose used on icy roads or to controldust. It is very important to remove thesesubstances, otherwise rust will form onthe floor pan, frame, fuel lines andaround the exhaust system. At the end ofwinter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, beingcareful to clean those areas where mudand dirt may accumulate. For additionalinformation, see “Cleaning exterior” inthe “7. Appearance and care” section.

Windshield washer fluid*: Check thatthere is adequate fluid in the tank.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 307: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

When performing any inspection or mainte-nance work on your vehicle, always takecare to prevent serious accidental injury toyourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-lowing are general precautions whichshould be closely observed.

WARNING

O Park the vehicle on a level surface, applythe parking brake securely and block thewheels to prevent the vehicle frommoving. Move the selector lever to P(Park).

O Be sure the ignition switch is in the LOCKposition when performing any parts re-placement or repairs.

O If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans,belts and any other moving parts.

O It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewel-ry,such as rings, watches, etc. befor-eworking on your vehicle.

O Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

O If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

O Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, support itwith safety stands.

O Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from fuel tank and the bat-tery.

O Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may come onat any time without warning, even if theignition key is in the OFF position andthe engine is not running. To avoid in-jury, always disconnect the negative bat-tery cable before working near the fan.

O The fuel filter or fuel lines should be ser-viced by an INFINITI dealer because thefuel lines are under high pressure evenwhen the engine is off.

CAUTION

O Do not work under the hood while theen-gine is hot. Turn the engine off and waituntil it cools down.

O Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

O Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

O Avoid direct contact with used engine oiland coolant. Improperly disposed en-gine oil, and coolant, and/or other ve-hicle fluids can damage the environ-ment. Always conform to local regula-tions for disposal of vehicle fluid.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 308: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section gives instructions regarding onlythose items which are relatively easy formost owners to perform. A genuineINFINITI Service Manual is also available.See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manualorder information” in the “9. Technical andconsumer information” section.

You should be aware that incomplete or im-proper servicing may result in operatingdifficulties or excessive emissions, andcould affect your warranty coverage. If indoubt about any servicing, we recommendthat it be done by an INFINITI dealer.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 309: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

VK45DE ENGINE

To remove the engine compartment cover,unhook the clips located as illustrated.

SDI1816

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 310: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Fuse/fusible link holder2. Battery3. Engine oil filler cap4. Brake fluid reservoir5. Window washer fluid reservoir6. Engine coolant reservoir

7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Radiator filler cap9. Engine oil dipstick10. Air cleaner

SSI0097

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 311: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

VQ35DE ENGINE

To remove the engine compartment cover,unhook the clips located as illustrated.

SDI1817

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 312: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Fuse/fusible link holder2. Battery3. Engine oil filler cap4. Brake fluid reservoir5. Window washer fluid reservoir6. Engine coolant reservoir

7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Radiator filler cap9. Engine oil dipstick10. Air cleaner

The engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a high-quality, year-round,anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corro-sion inhibitors, therefore additionalcooling system additives are not neces-sary.

WARNING

O Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Wait until the engine andradiator cool down. Serious burns couldbe caused by high pressure fluid es-caping from the radiator. See precau-tions in “If your vehicle overheats”found in the “6. In case of emergency”section of this manual.

O The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure

SSI0098

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 313: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalentwith the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water/distilled water. The use of other types ofcoolant solutions may damage your enginecooling system.

Outsidetemperature

down toAnti-

freeze

Demineral-ized water or

distilledwater°C °F

−35 −30 50% 50% CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoirtank when the engine is cold. If the coolantlevel is below MIN j2 , open the reservoirtank cap jA and add coolant up to the MAXj1 level. If the reservoir tank is empty,check the coolant level in the radiatorwhen the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-cient coolant in the radiator, fill the ra-diator with coolant up to the filler openingand also add it to the reservoir tank up tothe MAX level j1 .

If the cooling system requires coolant fre-

quently, have it checked by anINFINITI dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

O Major cooling system repairs should beperformed by an INFINITI dealer. Theservice procedures can be found in theappropriate INFINITI Service Manual.

O Improper servicing can result in re-duced heater performance and engineoverheating.

WARNING

O To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

O Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

O Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaner assoon as possible.

SDI1818

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 314: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Keep coolant out of reach of childrenand pets.

When changing engine coolant, be surethe ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-tion.

1. Remove the engine cover (VK45DE en-gine) or the air inlet duct (VQ35DE en-gine) to expose the radiator filler cap.

2. Open the radiator drain plug jA , andthen remove the radiator filler cap jB .

O Be careful not to allow coolant to con-tact drive belts.

O Waste coolant must be disposed ofproperly. Check your local regula-tions.

2. Close the radiator drain plug securelyafter the coolant is drained.

3. Fill the radiator slowly with the propermixture of antifreeze solution anddemineralized water/distilled water.Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAXlevel. Then install the radiator fillercap.

4. Start the engine and warm it up untilit reaches normal operating tempera-ture. Then race the engine two orthree times under no load. Watch theengine coolant temperature gauge forsigns of overheating.

SDI1819 SDI1820VK45DE engine

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 315: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

5. Stop the engine. After it completelycools down, refill the radiator up tothe filler opening. Fill the reservoirtank up to the MAX level. Check thedrain plug for any sign of leakage.

6. Check the coolant level again afterdriving the vehicle.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-ing temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than15 minutes for the oil to drain backinto the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick jA and wipe itclean. Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and checkthe oil level. It should be between theH and L marks j1 . If the oil level isbelow the L mark j2 , remove the oilfiller cap and pour recommended oilthrough the opening. Do not overfillj3 .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the se-verity of operating conditions.

SDI1821VQ35DE engine

SDI1822VK45DE engine

SDI1823VQ35DE engine

ENGINE OIL

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 316: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL ANDFILTER

Change the engine oil and filter accordingto the maintenance intervals shown in theINFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-ing temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait morethan 15 minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using asuitable floor jack and safety jackstands.

• Place the safety jack stands underthe vehicle jack-up points.

• A suitable adapter should be at-tached to the jack stand saddle.

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.

a. Remove the small plastic clip at thecenter point of the undercover.

b. Then remove the other bolts thathold the undercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and supportpoints are used to avoid vehicle damage.

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under thedrain plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.3. Remove the drain plug j1 with a

wrench and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the en-gine oil is hot.

SDI1824VK45DE engine

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 317: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

O Check your local regulations.

(Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the en-gine oil filter change is needed.)

4. Loosen the oil filter j2 with an oilfilter wrench. Remove the oil filter byturning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mountingsurface with a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old rubber gas-ket remaining on the mounting sur-face of the engine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter withclean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until aslight resistance is felt, then tightenadditionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:11 to 15 ft-lb(14.7 to 20.5 Nzm)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plugwith a new washer. Securely tightenthe drain plug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 to 29 ft-lb(29 to 39 Nzm)

Do not use excessive force.9. Refill engine with recommended oil

and install the oil filler cap securely.

CAUTION

The dipstick must be inserted in place toprevent oil spillage from the dipstick holewhile filling the engine with oil.

SDI1825VQ35DE engine

SDI1826VK45DE engine

SDI1827VQ35DE engine

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 318: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technicaland consumer information” section fordrain and refill capacity. The drain andrefill capacity depends on the oil tem-perature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Al-ways use the dipstick to determine theproper amount of oil in the engine.

10. Start the engine and check forleakage around the drain plug andthe oil filter. Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait morethan 15 minutes. Check the oil levelwith the dipstick. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into po-sition as the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plasticclip out.

b. Hold the engine undercover intoposition.

c. Insert the clip through the under-cover into the hole in the frame,then push the center of the clip into lock the clip in place.

d. Install the other bolts that hold theundercover in place. Be careful notto strip the bolts or over-tightenthem.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to theground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter prop-erly.

WARNING

O Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

O Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

O Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

When checking or replacement is re-quired, we recommend an INFINITI dealerfor servicing.

CAUTION

O Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF.Do not mix with other fluids.

O Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATFwill cause deterioration in driveabilityand automatic transmission durability,and may damage the automatic trans-mission, which is not covered by theINFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

The specified automatic transmissionfluid is also described on caution labelslocated on the flip side of the hood.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 319: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank.

The fluid level should be checked usingthe HOT range at fluid temperatures of122 to 176°F (50 to 80°C) or using theCOLD range at fluid temperatures of 32 to86°F (0 to 30°C).

CAUTION

O Do not overfill.

O Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equiva-lent.

WARNING

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or con-taminated fluid may damage the brake sys-tem. The use of improper fluids candamage the brake system and affect thevehicle’s stopping ability.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. Ifthe fluid is below the MIN line j2 or thebrake warning light comes on, add Genu-ine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid

or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAXline j1 . If fluid must be added frequently,the system should be checked by anINFINITI dealer.

For further brake fluid specification infor-mation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Tech-nical and consumer information” sectionof this manual.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfaceswith water.

SDI1408A SDI1828

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 320: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WARNING

Antifreeze is poisonous and should bestored carefully in marked containers out ofthe reach of children.

Add fluid when the low washer fluidwarning light illuminates. Pull up the res-ervoir tank cap and add a washer solventto the water for better cleaning. In thewinter season, add a windshield washerantifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSANWindshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &Antifreeze Fluid or equivalent.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution. Thismay result in damage to the paint.

O Keep the battery surface clean anddry. Any corrosion should be washedoff with a solution of baking soda andwater.

O Make certain the terminal connectionsare clean and securely tightened.

O If the vehicle is not to be used for 30days or longer, disconnect the nega-tive (—) battery terminal cable to pre-vent discharging it.

WARNING

O Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-ated by the battery is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, donot touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immedi-ately flush with water for at least 15minutes and seek medical attention.

O Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid

SDI1829

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 321: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

can cause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

O When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

O Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

O Keep the battery out of the reach ofchildren.

Check the fluid level in each cell (Removethe battery cover if it is necessary). Itshould be between the UPPER LEVEL j1and LOWER LEVEL j2 lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add onlydistilled water to bring the level to the in-dicator in each filler opening. Do not over-fill.

1. Remove the cell plugs jA .

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPERLEVEL j1 line.

If the side of the battery is not clear,check the distilled water level by lookingdirectly above the cell; the condition j1indicates OK and the conditions j2 needsmore to be added.

3. Tighten cell plugs jA .

Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

DI0137MA SDI1480C

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 322: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jumpstarting” in the “6. In case of emergency”section. If the engine does not start byjump starting, the battery may have to bereplaced. Contact an INFINITI dealer.

1. Water pump2. Alternator3. Crankshaft pulley4. Power steering fluid pump5. Air conditioner compressor

1. Power steering fluid pump2. Alternator3. Crankshaft pulley4. Air conditioner compressor.: Tension checking points

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the LOCKposition. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs ofunusual wear, cuts, fraying or loose-

SDI1411VK45DE engine

SDI1549AVQ35DE engine

DRIVE BELTS

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 323: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

ness. If the belt is in poor condition orloose, have it replaced or adjusted byan INFINITI dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly forcondition in accordance with the main-tenance schedule in your “INFINITIService and Maintenance Guide”.

WARNING

Be sure the engine is off, ignition switch isin the LOCK position and that the parkingbrake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to removethe spark plugs. An incorrect socket candamage the spark plugs.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see anINFINITI dealer for servicing.

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace theplatinum- tipped jA spark plugs as fre-quently as the conventional type sparkplugs since they will last much longer.Follow the maintenance schedule in“INFINITI Service and MaintenanceGuide”, but do not reuse them bycleaning or regapping.

SDI0145C

SPARK PLUGS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 324: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Always replace spark plugs with recom-mended or equivalent ones.

Remove the retainers j1 as illustratedand pull out the filter element j2 .

The filter element should not be cleanedand reused. Replace it according to themaintenance intervals. See “INFINITI Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide” for mainte-nance intervals. When replacing the filter,wipe the inside of the air cleaner housingand the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING

O Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you orothers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops flame if theengine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the aircleaner removed, and be careful whenworking on the engine with the air

SDI1830VK45DE engine

SDI1831VQ35DE engine

AIR CLEANER

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 325: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

cleaner removed.

O Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyor attempt to start the engine with theair cleaner removed. Doing so could re-sult in serious injury.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after usingthe windshield washer or if a wiper bladechatters when running, wax or other ma-terial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not formwhen rinsing with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild de-tergent. Then rinse the blade with clearwater. If your windshield is still not clearafter cleaning the blades and using thewiper, replace the blades. REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition and the windshield wiper switchON. Push the ignition switch to theLOCK position when the wiper is in thefully up position. The wiper will stopas illustrated.

The wiper should be in the fully up posi-tion to avoid scratching the engine hoodor wiper arm.

SDI1874

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 326: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

2. Pull the wiper arm.

3. Push the release tab jA , and thenmove the wiper blade down the wiperarm j1 while pushing the release tabto remove.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto thewiper arm until a click sounds.

CAUTION

O After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

O Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arm may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

O Worn windshield wiper blades candamage the windshield and impairdriver vision.

If you wax the surface of the hood, becareful not to let wax get into the washernozzle jA . This may cause clogging orimproper windshield washer operation. Ifwax gets into the nozzle, remove it with aneedle or small pin jB .

SDI1649

SDI1832

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 327: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, depress theparking brake pedal slowly and firmly,and check the notches between the initialand final position of the pedal jA . If it isout of the range, see an INFINITI dealer.

Range: 3 to 4 notches under a depressingforce of 44 lb (196 N).

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the dis-tance between the upper surface of thepedal and the metal floor jA . If it is out ofthe range shown above, see an INFINITIdealer.

Range: 4 inch (100 mm) or more under adepressing force of 110 lb (490N).

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust everytime the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See an INFINITI dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does not re-turn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle haveaudible wear indicators. When a brakepad requires replacement, it will make ahigh pitched scraping or screechingsound when the vehicle is in motionwhether or not the brake pedal is de-pressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal or othernoise may be heard. Occasional brakenoise during light to moderate stops isnormal and does not affect the function orperformance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For additional information,see the maintenance log section of your

SDI1391F DI1020MO

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 328: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

“INFINITI Service and MaintenanceGuide” for maintenance intervals.

BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as fol-lows:

1. With the engine off, press and releasethe brake pedal several times. Whenbrake pedal movement (distance oftravel) remains the same from onepedal application to the next, continueon to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, startthe engine. The pedal height shoulddrop a little.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stopthe engine. Keeping the pedal de-pressed for about 30 seconds, thepedal height should not change.

4. Run the engine for 1 minute withoutdepressing the brake pedal, then turnit off. Depress the brake pedal severaltimes. The pedal travel distance willdecrease gradually with each depres-sion as the vacuum is released fromthe booster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, seean INFINITI dealer.

Two types of fuses are used. Type jA isused in the fuse boxes in the engine com-partment. Type jB is used in the passen-ger compartment fuse box.

Type jA fuses are provided as sparefuses. They are stored in the passengercompartment fuse box.

Type jA fuses can be installed in the en-gine compartment and passenger com-partment fuse boxes.

If a type jA fuse is used to replace a typejB fuse, the type jA fuse will not be levelwith the fuse pocket as shown in the il-lustration. This will not affect the perfor-mance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse isinstalled in the fuse box securely.

Type jB fuses cannot be installed in theunderhood fuse boxes. Only use type jAfuses in the underhood fuse boxes.

SDI1751 SDI1752

FUSES

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 329: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage the elec-trical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushedto the LOCK position and the head-

light switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the engine hood and remove thecover on the battery and the fuse/fusible link holder.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holdercover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. If the fuse is open jA , replace it witha new fuse jB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have theelectrical system checked and re-paired by an INFINITI dealer.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate and fuses are in good condition,check the fusible links. If any of thesefusible links are melted, replace only withgenuine INFINITI parts.

SDI1479A SDI1753Type A

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 330: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage the elec-trical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushedto the LOCK position and the head-

light switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the fuse box lid.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse pullerjA .

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with anew fuse.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have theelectrical system checked and re-paired by an INFINITI dealer.

SDI1754Type B

SDI1833

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 331: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Release the lock knob at the back of theIntelligent Key and remove the me-chanical key.

2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver jA

wrapped with a cloth into the slit jB ofthe corner and twist it to separate theupper part from the lower part.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

O Do not touch the internal circuit andelectric terminals as it could cause amalfunction.

Recommended battery: CR2025 orequivalent

Make sure that the ! side faces thebottom of the case. The ! mark isstamped on the bottom of the case.

4. Align the tips of the upper and lowerparts, and then push them together un-til it is securely closed.

5. Push the buttons two or three times tocheck its operation.

See an INFINITI dealer if you need any as-sistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5above.

O Be careful not to touch the circuit boardand the battery terminal as it couldcause a malfunction.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

O When changing batteries, do not letdust or oil get on the Intelligent Key.

FCC Notice:

This equipment has been tested and foundto comply with the limits for a Class B digi-tal device pursuant to part 15 of the FCCRules (j1 : the certification number). Theselimits are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interference ina residential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radio fre-quency energy and, if not installed andused in accordance with the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radiocommunications. However, there is noguarantee that interference will not occurin a particular installation. If this equip-ment does cause harmful interference toradio or television reception, which can be

SDI1834 SDI1835

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 332: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

determined by turning the equipment offand on, the user is encouraged to try tocorrect the interference by one or more ofthe following measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna

— Increase the separation between theequipment and the receiver

— Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that to whichthe receiver is connected.

— Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 333: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. Front turn signal light

2. Clearance light/Headlight (high-beam)

3. Headlight (low-beam)

4. Map light

5. Rear personal light

6. Fog light

7. Front side marker light

8. Front sill plate light

9. Step light

10. License plate light

11. High-mounted stop light

12. Trunk light

13. Back-up light

14. Rear combination light (rear turnsignal/tail/stop/side marker light)

SDI1836

LIGHTS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 334: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the xenon headlightbulb

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they pro-duce a high voltage. To prevent an electricshock, never attempt to modify or disas-semble. Always have your xenon head-lights replaced at an INFINITI dealer. Foradditional information, see “Headlight andturn signal switch” in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section.

If replacement is required, see anINFINITI dealer.

Replacing the halogen headlightbulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam typewhich uses a replaceable headlight (halo-gen) bulb. If replacement is required, seean INFINITI dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

O High pressure halogen gas is sealed in-side the bulb. The bulb may break ifthe glass envelope is scratched or thebulb is dropped.

O Only touch the plastic base when han-dling the bulb. Never touch the glassenvelope. Touching the glass could sig-nificantly affect bulb life and/or head-light performance.

O Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Wattage 55

Bulb no. H1

O Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture, and smoke mayenter the headlight body and affect theperformance of the headlight.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact an INFINITI dealer.

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 335: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.Front turn signal light* 21 T20Front fog light* 55 H11Clearance light* 5 T10Front side marker light* 5 T10Rear combination light*

back-up 18 T16turn signal 21 WY21Wstop/tail/side marker LED —

License plate light* LED —Map light 8 —Rear personal light 8 —Vanity mirror light 1.8 —Step light* 3.4 —Trunk light* 5 —High-mounted stop light* LED —

*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D,E or F. When replacing a bulb, first re-move the lens and/or cover.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 336: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

SDI1679

SDI1837Map light

SDI1838Rear personal light

SDI1839Vanity mirror light

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 337: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the“6. In case of emergency” section.

TIRE PRESSURE

Low tire pressure warning system

This vehicle is equipped with the low tirepressure warning system. It monitors tirepressure of all tires except the spare. Whenthe low tire pressure warning light is lit,one or more of your tires is significantly un-derinflated. The system also displays pres-sure of all tires (except the spare tire) onthe display screen by sending a signal froma sensor that is installed in each wheel.

The low tire pressure warning system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, thissystem may not detect a sudden drop intire pressure (for example a flat tire whiledriving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “2. Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire pressure informa-tion” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,phone and voice recognition systems” sec-tion, “Low tire pressure warning system” inthe “5. Starting and driving” section, and“Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency”section.

Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure of the tires (includingthe spare) often and always prior to longdistance trips. The recommended tirepressure specifications are shown on theTire and Loading Information label underthe “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. TheTire and Loading Information label is af-fixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularlybecause:

O Most tires naturally lose air over time.

O Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires are con-sidered COLD after the vehicle has beenparked for 3 or more hours, or driven lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including underinflation, may adversely affect tire lifeand vehicle handling.

WARNING

O Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

O The Gross Vehicle Weight rating islocated on the FMVSS label. Thevehicle weight capacity is indi-cated on the Tire and Loading In-formation label. Do not load yourvehicle beyond this capacity. Over-loading your vehicle may result inreduced tire life, unsafe operatingconditions due to premature tirefailure, or unfavorable handlingcharacteristics and could also leadto a serious accident. Loading be-yond the specified capacity mayalso result in failure of other ve-hicle components.

O Before taking a long trip, or when-ever you heavily load your vehicle,use a tire pressure gauge to ensurethat the tire pressures are at thespecified level.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 338: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (137 km/h) unless it isequipped with high speed ratedtires. Driving faster than 85 MPH(137 km/h) may result in tirefailure, loss of control and possibleinjury.

O For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Tire and loading information label

j1 Seating capacity: The maximumnumber of occupants that can beseated in the vehicle.

j2 Vehicle load limit: See “loading infor-mation” in the “9. Technical and con-sumer information” section.

j3 Original size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

SDI1574B

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 339: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

j4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set bythe manufacturer to provide the bestbalance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

j5 Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling”later in this section.

j6 and j7 Spare tire size or compactspare tire size (if soequipped)

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare it to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add or re-lease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare. (Refer to the“Wheels and tires” section.)

SIZECOLD TIREINFLATIONPRESSURE

FR0NTORIGINAL

TIRE

P245/45R1896V

230 kPa,35 PSI

P245/40R1994W

230 kPa,35 PSI

REARORIGINAL

TIRE

P245/45R1896V

230 kPa,35 PSI

P245/40R1994W

230 kPa,35 PSI

SPARETIRE T145/80D17 420 kPa,

60 PSI

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 340: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case ofa recall.

j1 Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles. (Notall tires have this information.)

2. Three-digit number (215): Thisnumber gives the width in millimetersof the tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (60): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (16): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (94): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

SDI1575

ExampleSDI1606

Example

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 341: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

j2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-ment of Transportation”. Thesymbol can be placed above,below or to the left or right ofthe Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s iden-tification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-tional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

6. Four numbers represent the week andyear the tire was built. For example,the numbers 3103 means the 31stweek of 2003. If these numbers aremissing, then look on the other side-wall of the tire.

j3 Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubber-coated fabric in the tire.Tire manufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, and oth-ers.

j4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sureThis number is the greatest amount ofair pressure that should be put in thetire. Do not exceed the maximum per-missible inflation pressure.

j5 Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. When re-placing the tires on the vehicle, al-

ways use a tire that has the same loadrating as the factory installed tire.

j6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”Indicates whether the tire requires aninner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tube-less”).

j7 The word “radial”The word “radial” is shown, if the tirehas radial structure.

j8 Manufacturer or Brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

Other tire-related terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, In-tended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the side-wall that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering or bears manufacturer,brand and/or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than the samemolding on the other sidewall of the tire,or (2) the outward facing sidewall of anasymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

SDI1607

Example

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 342: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

O When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(Example: summer, All Season, Snow orRun-flat) and construction. An INFINITIdealer may be able to help you with infor-mation about tire type, size, speed ratingand availability.

O Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

O Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by INFINITI could affect theproper operation of the low tire pressurewarning system.

O For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

INFINITI specifies all season tires on somemodels to provide good performance allyear, including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All Season tires are identified by ALLSEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) onthe tire sidewall. Snow tires have bettersnow traction than All Season tires andmay be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tiresINFINITI specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performance ondry roads. Summer tire performance is sub-stantially reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire tractionrating M&S on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowyor icy conditions, INFINITI recommendsthe use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tireson all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary toselect tires equivalent in size and loadrating to the original equipment tires. Ifyou do not, it can adversely affect thesafety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speedratings than factory equipped tires andmay not match the potential maximum ve-hicle speed. Never exceed the maximumspeed rating of the tire.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, INFINITI recommends the useof SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

For additional traction on icy roads,studded tires may be used. However, someprovinces and states prohibit their use.Check local, state and provincial laws be-fore installing studded tires. Skid and trac-tion capabilities of studded snow tires, onwet or dry surfaces, may be poorer thanthat of non-studded snow tires.

Snow tires could affect the proper opera-tion of the low tire pressure monitoringsystem.

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 05.7.14/Y50-D X

Page 343: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Run-flat tires (if so equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with run-flattires, you can continue driving to a safe lo-cation even if they are punctured. Alwaysuse run-flat tires of the same size on allfour wheels. Mixing tire sizes or construc-tion may reduce vehicle handling stability.If necessary, contact an INFINITI dealerfor assistance.

O Frequently check the tire pressure in-formation display on the monitorscreen and adjust pressure of each tireproperly. (The order of the tire pressurefigures displayed on the screen doesnot correspond with the actual order ofthe tire position.)

O If the vehicle is being driven with a flattire or very low tire pressure, the lowtire pressure warning system will acti-vate and warn you of it by the low tirepressure warning light or a WARNINGdisplayed on the monitor screen. If thisoccurs, pull off the road to a safe loca-tion and stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Check the tire pressure for allfour wheels and adjust the pressure. ifa tire is flat, replace it with a spare tireas soon as possible.

WARNING

O Although you can continue driving with apunctured run-flat tire, remember thatvehicle handling stability is reduced,which could lead to an accident and per-sonal injury. Also, driving a long distanceat high speeds may damage the tire. Todrive safely:− Do not drive at speeds above 55 MPH

(88 km/h) and do not drive more than50 miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat tire. A punctured tire may burstand cause a serious accident, re-sulting in personal injury.

− Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoidhard cornering or braking, which maycause you to lose control of the ve-hicle.

− If a rear tire is punctured, replace itwith a non-punctured tire, especiallywhen driving on rainy, snowy or icyroads.

O Always have punctured run-flat tiresreplaced.

CAUTION

O Never install tire chains on a puncturedrun-flat tire, as this could damage yourvehicle.

O Avoid driving over any projection or pot-hole, as the clearance between the ve-hicle and the ground is smaller than nor-mal.

O Do not enter an automated car wash witha punctured run-flat tire.

O Have the punctured tire replaced by anINFINITI dealer as soon as possible, asthe tire’s performance capability isreduced.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

Z 05.7.14/Y50-D X

Page 344: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION

O Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted orradial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and maydamage the transmission, transfer caseand differential gears.

O ONLY use spare tires specified for theAWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-mended that all four tires be replaced withtires of the same size, brand, constructionand tread pattern. The tire pressure andwheel alignment should also be checkedand corrected as necessary. Contact anINFINITI dealer.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on pavedroads which are clear of snow. Driving with

chains in such conditions can causedamage to the various mechanisms of thevehicle due to some overstress.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-cording to location. Check the local lawsbefore installing tire chains. When in-stalling tire chains, make sure they are theproper size for the tires on your vehicle andare installed according to the chain manu-facturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE ClassS chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”chains are designed to meet the SAE stan-dard minimum clearances between the tireand the closest vehicle suspension or bodycomponent required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chainsor cables). The minimum clearances are de-termined using the factory equipped tiresize. Other types may damage your vehicle.Use chain tensioners when recommendedby the tire chain manufacturer to ensure atight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to prevent thepossibility of whipping action damage tothe fenders or underbody. If possible,avoid fully loading your vehicle when usingtire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced

speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may bedamaged and/or vehicle handling and per-formance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on pavedroads which are clear of snow. Driving withchains in such conditions can causedamage to the various mechanisms of thevehicle due to some overstress.

CAUTION

O Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

O Never install tire chains on a T-type sparetire or a punctured run-flat tire, as thiscould damage your vehicle.

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 05.7.14/Y50-D X

Page 345: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

INFINITI recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km). See “Flattire” in the “6. In case of emergency”section for tire replacing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheelnuts to the specified torque with atorque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightenedto the specification at all times. It is rec-ommended that wheel nuts be tightenedto the specification at each tire rotationinterval.

WARNING

O After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

O Retighten the wheel nuts when thevehicle has been driven for 600miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of aflat tire, etc.).

O Do not include the T-type spare tireor any other small size spare tire inthe tire rotation.

O For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

1. Wear indicator2. Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

O Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulgingor objects caught in the tread. Ifexcessive wear, cracks, bulging ordeep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

SDI1662 MDI0004B

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 346: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When wearindicators are visible, the tire(s)should be replaced.

O Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact an INFINITIdealer.

O For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,speed rating and load carrying capacity asoriginally equipped. See “Specifications”in the “9. Technical and consumer informa-tion” section for recommended types andsizes of tires and wheels.

WARNING

O The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of differentbrands, construction (bias, bias-beltedradial, run-flat), or tread patterns can ad-versely affect the ride, braking, han-dling, ground clearance, body-to-tireclearance, tire chain clearance, low tirepressure warning system, speedometercalibration, headlight aim and bumperheight. Some of these effects may leadto accidents and could result in seriouspersonal injury.

O If the wheels are changed for anyreason, always replace with wheelswhich have the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set could causepremature tire wear, degrade vehiclehandling characteristics and/or interfer-ence with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to de-creased braking efficiency and/or earlybrake pad/shoe wear. Refer to “Wheelsand tires” in the “9. Technical

and consumer information” section ofthis manual for wheel off-set dimen-sions.

O When a spare tire is mounted, a wheel isreplaced or a tire rotation is performed,tire pressure will not be indicated on thedisplay and the low tire pressurewarning system will not function. Resetthe system by driving the vehicle at over25 MPH (40 km/h) for approximately 10minutes. If tire pressure is not indicatedafter performing the resetting procedureabove, contact an INFINITI dealer assoon as possible.

O Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by INFINITI could affect theproper operation of the low tire pressurewarning system.

O Do not install a deformed wheel or tireeven if it has been repaired. Such wheelsor tires could have structural damageand could fail without warning.

O The use of retread tire is notrecommended.

8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 347: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or ra-dial), and tread pattern on all four wheels.Failure to do so may result in a circumferencedifference between tires on the front and rearaxles which will cause excessive tire wearand may damage the transmission, transfercase and differential gears (AWD models).

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle han-dling and tire life. Even with regular use,wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to transmission damage.

For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.

Care of wheels

O Wash the wheels when washing the ve-hicle to maintain their appearance.

O Clean the inner side of the wheels whenthe wheel is changed or the undersideof the vehicle is washed.

O Do not use abrasive cleaners whenwashing the wheels.

O Inspect wheel rims regularly for dentsor corrosion. Such damage may causeloss of pressure or poor seal at the tirebead.

O INFINITI recommends that the roadwheels be waxed to protect againstroad salt in areas where it is usedduring winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY(T-type) spare tire) (if so equipped)

When a spare tire is mounted (t-type orconventional), the low tire pressurewarning system will not function.

Observe the following precautions if theT-type spare tire must be used, otherwiseyour vehicle could be damaged or involvedin an accident.

WARNING

O The T-type spare tire should be used foremergency use. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

O Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

O Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-45

Z 05.7.14/Y50-D X

Page 348: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keepthe pressure of the full size spare tire (ifso equipped) at the recommended pres-sure for standard tires, as indicated onthe Tire and Loading Information label.For Tire and Loading Information labellocation, see “Tire and Loading Informa-tion label” in the index of this manual.

O With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive your vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

O When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire should be used on the frontwheels and original tire used on the rearwheels (drive wheels). Use tire chainsonly on the two rear original tires.

O Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire will wear at a faster rate thanthe standard tire. Replace the spare tireas soon as the tread wear indicatorsappear.

O Do not use the spare tire on other ve-hicles.

O Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

O Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

O Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will notfit properly and may cause damage to thevehicle.

O Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do not driveover obstacles. Also do not drive the ve-hicle through an automatic car washsince it may get caught.

8-46 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z 05.7.14/Y50-D X

Page 349: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .... 9-2Fuel recommendation .................................. 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendation....... 9-5Recommended SAE viscosity number ........... 9-6Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricantrecommendations........................................ 9-7

Specifications................................................... 9-8Engine......................................................... 9-8Wheels and tires.......................................... 9-9Dimensions and weights.............................. 9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle in anothercountry........................................................... 9-10Vehicle identification ...................................... 9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate ......................................................... 9-10Vehicle identification number (Chassisnumber) .................................................... 9-10Engine serial number ................................. 9-11F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...................... 9-11

Emission control information label ............. 9-12Tire and loading information label .............. 9-12Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-12

Installing front license plate ........................... 9-13Vehicle loading information ............................ 9-14

Terms........................................................ 9-14Vehicle load capacity ................................. 9-15Loading tips .............................................. 9-16

Towing a trailer ............................................... 9-17Flat towing ................................................ 9-17

Uniform tire quality grading............................. 9-17Emission control system warranty ................... 9-18Reporting safety defects (US only) ................... 9-19Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test (US only) .................................................. 9-19Event data recorders ...................................... 9-20Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation..................................................... 9-20

In the event of a collision........................... 9-20

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 350: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure in-structed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) RecommendedspecificationsUS measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 76 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1Engine oil*6Drain and refill

With oil filter changeVK45DE 5-3/4 qt 4-3/4 qt 5.5

For VK45DE engineO API Certification Mark*2, *3O API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*2, *3O ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III*2, *3For VQ35DE engineO API Certification Mark*2, *3O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*3O ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III*3

VQ35DE 5 qt 4-1/8 qt 4.7

Without oil filterchange

VK45DE 5-1/4 qt 4-3/8 qt 4.9

VQ35DE 4-5/8 qt 3-7/8 qt 4.4

Cooling system

With reservoirVK45DE 11 qt 9-1/8 qt 10.4

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalentVQ35DE 9-3/8 qt 7-7/8 qt 8.9

ReservoirVK45DE 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8VQ35DE 5/8 qt 1/2 qt 0.6

Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*4Differential gear oil — — — API GL-5 Viscosity SAE 80W-90*7

Transfer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmis-sion Fluid*8

Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions inthe “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*10Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*9

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System OilType S or exact equivalent

Window washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

*1: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation.*2: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.*3: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for recommended SAE viscosity number.*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not

covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.*5: Available in mainland US through an INFINITI dealer.*6: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.*7: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 32°F (0°C).*8: DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an INFINITI dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended

brand(s) of DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM automatic transmission fluid.*9: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” in this section for air conditioner specification label.*10: For Canada, Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

Z 05.2.1/Y50-D X

Page 351: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

VK45DE engine

In order to maintain engine and exhaustsystem durability and performance, un-leaded premium gasoline with an octanerating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)number (Research octane number 96) mustbe used.

If premium gasoline is not available, un-leaded regular gasoline with an octane rat-ing of 87 AKI number (Research octanenumber 91) may be temporarily used, butonly under the following precautions:

O Have the fuel tank filled only partiallywith unleaded regular gasoline, and fillup with unleaded premium gasoline assoon as possible.

O Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt ac-celeration

VQ35DE engine

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-KnockIndex) number (Research octane number91).

For improved vehicle performance, IN-FINITI recommends the use of unleadedpremium gasoline with an octane rating of

at least 91 AKI number (Research octanenumber 96).

CAUTION

O Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emission con-trol system, and may also affect warrantycoverage.

O Under no circumstances should a leadedgasoline be used, because this willdamage the three-way catalyst.

O Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Yourvehicle is not designed to run on E-85fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuelsystem components and is not coveredby the INFINITI vehicle limitedwarranty.

Gasoline specifications

INFINITI recommends using gasoline thatmeets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)specifications where it is available. Manyof the automobile manufacturers devel-oped this specification to improve emis-sion system and vehicle performance. Askyour service station manager if the gaso-

line meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter(WWFC) specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-formulated gasolines. These gasolines arespecially designed to reduce vehicle emis-sions. INFINITI supports efforts towardscleaner air and suggests that you use refor-mulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline con-taining oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBEand methanol with or without advertisingtheir presence. INFINITI does not recom-mend the use of fuels of which the oxygen-ate content and the fuel compatibility foryour INFINITI cannot be readily deter-mined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,please take the following precautions asthe usage of such fuels may cause vehicleperformance problems and/or fuel systemdamage.

O The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than that rec-ommended for unleaded gasoline.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 352: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

O If an oxygenate-blend, excepting amethanol blend, is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

O If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol (me-thyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It shouldalso contain a suitable amount of appro-priate cosolvents and corrosion inhibi-tors. If not properly formulated with ap-propriate cosolvents and corrosion in-hibitors, such methanol blends maycause fuel system damage and/or ve-hicle performance problems. At thistime, sufficient data is not available toensure that all methanol blends are suit-able for use in INFINITI vehicles.

If any undesirable driveability problemssuch as engine stalling or hard hot startingare experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend ofMTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gaso-line. E-85 can only be used in a FlexibleFuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel inyour vehicle. U.S. government regulationsrequire fuel ethanol dispensing pumps tobe identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage for thatregion.

Aftermarket fuel additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use ofany aftermarket fuel additives (Example:fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, in-take valve deposit removers, etc.) whichare sold commercially. Many of these addi-tives intended for gum, varnish or depositremoval may contain active solvent or simi-lar ingredients that can be harmful to thefuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended above cancause persistent, heavy spark knock.(Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.)If severe, this can lead to engine damage.If you detect a persistent heavy spark

knock even when using gasoline of thestated octane rating, or if you hear steadyspark knock while holding a steady speedon level roads, have your dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which IN-FINITI is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result inknocking, after-run or overheating. This inturn may cause excessive fuel consump-tion or damage to the engine. If any of theabove symptoms are encountered, haveyour vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealeror other competent service facility.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time while ac-celerating or driving up hills. This is nocause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 353: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

1. API certification mark2. API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensuresatisfactory engine life and performance,see 9Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants9 in this section. INFINITIrecommends the use of an energy conserv-ing oil in order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-cation or International Lubricant Standard-ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)certification and SAE viscosity standard.These oils have the API certification markon the front of the container. Oils which donot have the specified quality label shouldnot be used as they could cause enginedamage.

VQ35DE engine model: If you cannot findengine oil with the API certification mark,use an API grade SG/SH, Energy Con-serving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energyconserving oil. An oil with a single designa-

tion SG or SH, or in combination with othercategories (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD)may also be used if one with the API certifi-cation mark cannot be found. An ILSACgrade GF-I, GF-II, GF-III oil can also beused.

INFINITI recommends mineral based oils.These oils must however, meet the APIquality and SAE viscosity ratings specifiedfor your vehicle.

Oil additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use ofoil additives. The use of an oil additive isnot necessary when the proper oil type isused and maintenance intervals are fol-lowed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter orhas been previously used should not beused.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thicknesschanges with temperature. Because of this,it is important that the engine oil viscositybe selected based on the temperatures atwhich the vehicle will be operated beforethe next oil change. The chart of recom-mended SAE viscosity number shows the

STI0367A

Technical and consumer information 9-5

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 354: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

recommended oil viscosities for the ex-pected ambient temperatures. Choosing anoil viscosity other than that recommendedcould cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use the genuine oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described inchange intervals.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals foryour engine are based on the use of thespecified quality oils and filters. Oil and fil-ter other than the specified quality, or oiland filter change intervals longer than rec-ommended could reduce engine life.Damage to engines caused by impropermaintenance or use of incorrect oil andfilter quality and/or viscosity is not coveredby the new INFINITI vehicle limited war-ranties.

Your engine was filled with a high qualityengine oil when it was built. You do nothave to change the oil before the first rec-ommended change interval. Oil and filterchange intervals depend upon how you useyour vehicle. Operation under the following

conditions may require more frequent oiland filter changes.

O repeated short distance driving at coldoutside temperatures,

O driving in dusty conditions,

O extensive idling,

O stop and go “rush hour” traffic,

O aggressive driving.

Refer to the 9INFINITI Service and Mainte-nance Guide9 for the maintenanceschedule.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITYNUMBER

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for alltemperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 vis-cosity oil may be used if the outside

TI1028-C

9-6 Technical and consumer information

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 355: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

temperature is above 0°F (−18°C).

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANTRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in yourINFINITI vehicle must be charged withthe refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) andthe lubricant, NISSAN A/C system oilType S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubricantwill cause severe damage to the air condi-tioning system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner system compo-nents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourINFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’sozone layer. Although this refrigerantdoes not affect the earth’s atmosphere,certain governmental regulations requirethe recovery and recycling of any refriger-ant during automotive air conditioningsystem service. Your INFINITI dealer hasthe trained technicians and equipmentneeded to recover and recycle your air

conditioning system refrigerant.

Contact an INFINITI dealer when ser-vicing your air conditioning system.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 356: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

ENGINE

Model VQ35DE VK45DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement6-cylinder, V-slantedat 60°

8-cylinder, V-slantedat 90°

Bore 3 Stroke in (mm)3.760 3 3.205 (95.53 81.4)

3.661 3 3.256 (93.03 82.7)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498) 274.2 (4,494)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2

Idle speed rpm See the emission control information labelon the underside of the hood.Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

Spark plug

Standard PLFR5A-11 PLFR5A-11

Service optionHot type PLFR4A-11 PLFR4A-11

Cold type PLFR6A-11 PLFR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

STI0425VQ35DE model

STI0397BVK45DE model

SPECIFICATIONS

9-8 Technical and consumer information

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 357: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum18 x 8JJ 1.85 (47)

19 x 8-1/2JJ* 1.97 (50)

Spare 17 x 4T 1.18 (30)

Tire

Type Size Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]

ConventionalP245/45R18

33 (230)245/40R19*

Spare (T-type) T145/80D17 60 (420)

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length(without front license plate)(with front license plate)

in (mm)in (mm)

192.6 (4,893)192.9 (4,899)

Overall width in (mm) 70.8 (1,798)

Overall height in (mm)59.4 (1,508)*60.0 (1,523)**

Front tread in (mm)60.5 (1,537)*61.1 (1,551)**

Rear tread in (mm)61.0 (1,550)*60.7 (1,543)**

Wheelbase in (mm) 114.2 (2,900)

*: Two-wheel drive (2WD) model**: All-wheel drive (AWD) model

Technical and consumer information 9-9

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 358: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

If you plan to travel in another country,you should first find out if the fuel avail-able is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane ratingmay cause engine damage. All gasolinevehicles must be operated with unleadedgasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your ve-hicle to areas where appropriate fuel isnot available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, prov-ince or district, it may be necessary tomodify the vehicle to meet local laws andregulations.

The laws and regulations for motor ve-hicle emission control and safety stan-dards vary according to the country,state, province or district; therefore, ve-hicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, trans-portation, and registration are the re-sponsibility of the user. INFINITI is notresponsible for any inconvenience thatmay result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate isattached as shown. This number is theidentification for your vehicle and is usedin the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown in theengine compartment.

STI0431 STI0421

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOURVEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

9-10 Technical and consumer information

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 359: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine asshown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards (F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is af-fixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: GrossVehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR), month andyear of manufacture, Vehicle Identifica-tion Number, (VIN), etc. Review it care-fully.

STI0303BVQ35DE

STI0266CVK45DE

STI0186B

Technical and consumer information 9-11

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 360: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label isattached as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on theTire and Loading Information label affixedto the pillar as illustrated.

AIR CONDITIONERSPECIFICATION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label isattached as shown.

STI0422 STI0186B STI0423

9-12 Technical and consumer information

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 361: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Use the following steps to mount the li-cense plate:

Before mounting the license plate, con-firm that the following parts are enclosedin the plastic bag.

Only use the recommended mounting po-sition or Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)sensor obstruction (if so equipped) mayresult.

O License plate bracket

O J-nut x 2

O Screw x 2

O Screw grommet x 2

1. Temporarily place the license platebracket while aligning part jA of thefront bumper with part jB of the rearsurface of the license plate bracket.

2. To determine where to drill the hole,mark along both sides of themounting hole by using a felt-tip pen.

3. Remove the license plate bracket andconnect the arcs to form ovals. Markthe point in the center of each oval.These are the pilot drilling locations.

4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a0.39 inch (10 mm) drill bit at theSTI0419

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Technical and consumer information 9-13

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 362: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

marked locations. (Be sure that the drillonly goes through the fascia, ordamage to the nut may occur.)

5. Insert grommets into the hole on thefascia.

6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into thegrommet hole to add 90° turn onto thepart jC .

7. Insert a J-nut into the license platebracket before placing the license platebracket on the fascia.

8. Install the license plate bracket withscrews.

9. Install the license plate with bolts thatare no longer than 0.55 inch (14 mm).

WARNING

O It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside the vehicle.In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

O Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts.

O Be sure everyone in your vehicle isin a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourselfwith the following terms before loadingyour vehicle:

O Curb Weight (actual weight of your ve-hicle) - vehicle weight including: stan-dard and optional equipment, fluids,emergency tools, and spare tire as-sembly. This weight does not includepassengers and cargo.

O GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

O GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -maximum total combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers,luggage, hitch, trailer tongue loadand any other optional equipment.This information is located on theF.M.V.S.S. label.

O GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit speci-fied for the front or rear axle. This in-formation is located on the F.M.V.S.S.label.

O GCWR (Gross Combined WeightRating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

O Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

9-14 Technical and consumer information

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 363: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label.

O Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the weight of total occu-pants weight subtracted from theload limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not ex-

ceed the number of occupants shown as“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

STI0458

Technical and consumer information 9-15

Z 05.7.28/Y50-D X

Page 364: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

occupants, then add the total luggageweight to the value. Examples are shownin the illustration.

Steps for determining correct loadlimit

(1) Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.) or 640-340(5x70)=300 kg.

(5) Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurment of Weights” later inthis section.

LOADING TIPS

O The GVW must not exceed GVWR orGAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S.certification label.

O Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

O Properly secure all cargo to helpprevent it from sliding or shifting.Do not place cargo higher than theseatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

O Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximumfront and rear GAWRs. If you do,parts of your vehicle can break, tiredamage could occur, or it canchange the way your vehiclehandles. This could result in loss ofcontrol and cause personal injury.

O Overloading could not only shortenthe life of your vehicle and the tires,but also could lead to hazardous ve-hicle handling and long brakingdistance. This may cause a prema-ture tire malfunction, which couldresult in a serious accident and per-sonal injury. Failures caused byoverloading are not covered by thevehicle’s warranty.

9-16 Technical and consumer information

Z 05.7.28/Y50-D X

Page 365: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Your vehicle was designed to be used tocarry passengers and cargo. INFINITI doesnot recommend trailer towing, because itplaces additional loads on your vehicle’sengine, drivetrain, steering, braking, andother systems.

If you must use this vehicle to tow a trailer,the trailer load should never exceed 1,000lbs.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from towing atrailer is not covered by INFINITI warranties.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground is sometimes called flat towing.This method is sometimes used whentowing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

O Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

O Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

O DO NOT tow any automatic transmissionvehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission parts dueto lack of transmission lubrication.

O For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing Recommended by INFINITI”in the “6. In case of emergency” sectionof this manual.

Automatic transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-matic transmission, an appropriate vehicledolly MUST be placed under the towed ve-hicle’s drive wheels. Always follow thedolly manufacturer’s recommendationswhen using their product.

DOT (Department Of Transportation)Quality Grades: All passenger car tiresmust conform to federal safety require-ments in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

Treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on tire wear rate when tested undercontrolled conditions on specified govern-ment test courses. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100. However, rela-tive tire performance depends on actualdriving conditions, and may vary signifi-cantly from the norm due to variations indriving habits, service practices and differ-ences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades from highest to lowestare AA, A, B and C. Those grades representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pavementas measured under controlled conditions

TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 9-17

Z 05.7.14/Y50-D X

Page 366: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to your vehicletires is based on straight-ahead braking trac-tion tests and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

Temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. They represent a tire’s resistance toheat build-up, and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperature cancause tire material to degenerate, reducingtire life. Excessive temperatures can lead tosudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds toa performance level which all passengercar tires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades A and B represent higher levels ofperformance on laboratory test wheelsthan the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

Your INFINITI is covered by the followingemission warranties.

For US:

O Emission Defects Warranty

O Emissions Performance Warranty(See Warranty Information Booklet fordetails.)

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be foundwith other vehicle warranties in your War-ranty Information Booklet (Warranty andRoadside Assistance Information (Canadaonly)) that comes with your INFINITI. Ifyou did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet (Warranty and Roadside Assis-tance Information (Canada only)), or it hasbecome lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

O INFINITI DivisionNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 47038, Gardena,CA 90247-6838

O Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario,L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

9-18 Technical and consumer information

Z 05.7.14/Y50-D X

Page 367: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying IN-FINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in in-dividual problems between you, yourdealer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may either callthe Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236. You may also writeto: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-portation, Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety from theHotline.

You may notify INFINITI by contactingour Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200.

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive(AWD) should never be tested using a twowheel dynamometer (such as the dyna-mometers used by some states for emis-sions testing), or similar equipment. Makesure you inform test facility personnel thatyour vehicle is equipped with AWD before itis placed on a dynamometer. Using thewrong test equipment may result in trans-mission damage or unexpected vehiclemovement which could result in serious ve-hicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states/areas, your vehicle may be required to be inwhat is called the “ready condition” for anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of theemission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”when it is driven through certain drivingpatterns. Usually, the “ready condition”can be obtained by ordinary usage of thevehicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-paired or the battery is disconnected, thevehicle may be reset to a “not ready condi-tion”. Before taking the I/M test, check thevehicle’s inspection/maintenance testreadiness condition. Push the ignitionswitch to the ON position without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL) comes on steady for 20 sec-onds and then blinks for 10 seconds, theI/M test condition is “not ready”. If theMIL does not blink after 20 seconds, theI/M test condition is “ready”.

If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “notready” condition, drive the vehicle throughthe following pattern to set the vehicle tothe “ready condition”. If you cannot or donot want to perform the driving pattern, anINFINITI dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and pru-dent manner according to traffic conditionsand obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine. Allow the engine toidle until the engine coolant tempera-ture gauge needle points between the Cand H (normal operating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the accel-erator pedal completely and keep it re-leased for at least 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only) READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)

Technical and consumer information 9-19

Z 05.7.14/Y50-D X

Page 368: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

for a moment, then drive the vehicle ata speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96km/h) for at least 9 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine run-ning.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55km/h) and maintain the speed for 20seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h) and maintain the speed for atleast 3 minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmis-sion gear selector lever in the “P” or“N” position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least onemore time.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeatthe preceding step. Any safe driving modeis acceptable between steps. Do not stopthe engine until step 7 is completed.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety ofcomputers that monitor and control a num-ber of systems to optimize performanceand help service technicians with diag-nosis and repair. Depending on the equip-ment on your vehicle, some of the com-puters monitor emission control systems,braking systems, engine systems, trans-mission systems, tire pressure systemsand airbag systems. Some data about ve-hicle operation may be stored in the com-puters for use during servicing. Other datamay be stored if a crash event occurs. Forexample, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-mance, and seat belt use by the driver orpassenger may be recorded, depending onvehicle equipment. These types of systemsare sometimes called Event Data Re-corders.

Special equipment can be used to accessthe electronic data that may be stored inthe vehicle’s computers (sounds are not re-corded). INFINITI and INFINITI dealershave equipment to access some of thisdata; others may also have this equipment.The data may be retrieved during routinevehicle servicing or for special research. Itmight also be accessed with the consent ofthe vehicle owner or leasee, in response toa request by law enforcement, or as other-wise required or permitted by law.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is thebest source of service and repair informa-tion for your vehicle. Filled with wiring dia-grams, illustrations and step-by-step diag-nostic and adjustment procedures, thismanual is the same one used by the factorytrained technicians working at an INFINITIdealer. Also available are genuine INFINITIOwner’s Manuals, and genuine INFINITIService and Owner’s Manuals for olderINFINITI models.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability of genu-ine INFINITI Service Manuals for the 2000model year and later, contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genu-ine INFINITI Service Manuals for the 1999model year and prior, see an INFINITIdealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genu-ine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals for the

EVENT DATA RECORDERS OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUALORDER INFORMATION

9-20 Technical and consumer information

Z 05.7.14/Y50-D X

Page 369: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

2006 model year and prior, see anINFINITI dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITIService Manual or Owner’s Manual pleasecontact an INFINITI dealer. For the phonenumber and location of an INFINITI dealerin your area call the INFINITI SatisfactionCenter at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingualINFINITI representative will assist you.

Also available are genuine INFINITI Ser-vice and Owner’s Manuals for olderINFINITI models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In thisunlikely event, there is some important in-formation you should know. Many insur-ance companies routinely authorize theuse of non-genuine collision parts in orderto cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of GenuineINFINITI Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restoredusing parts made to INFINITI’s original ex-acting specifications — if you want to helpit to last and hold its resale value, the solu-tion is simple. Tell your insurance agentand your repair shop to only use GenuineINFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITI doesnot warrant non-INFINITI parts, nor doesINFINITI’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help pro-tect your personal safety, preserve yourwarranty protection and maintain the re-sale value of your vehicle. And if your ve-hicle was leased, using Genuine INFINITIParts may prevent or limit unnecessary ex-cess wear and tear expenses at the end ofyour lease.

INFINITI designs its hoods with crumplezones to minimize the risk that the hoodwill penetrate the windshield of your ve-hicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imita-tion) parts may not provide such built insafeguards. Also, non-genuine parts oftenshow premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to re-pair your vehicle. And some states have en-acted laws that restrict insurance compa-nies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the newvehicle warranty. These laws help protectyou, so you can take action to protect your-self.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visitus at:

www.infiniti.com (for U.S. customers) orwww.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)

Technical and consumer information 9-21

Z 05.7.14/Y50-D X

Page 370: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

MEMO

9-22 Technical and consumer information

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 371: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

10 Index

A

ABS (Anti-lock brake system)........... 5-48Adaptive Front lighting System ........ 2-29Adaptive Front lighting System(AFS) indicator light......................... 2-17Air bag system, Side and curtain(See supplemental side air bagand curtain side-impact air bagsystem) .......................................... 1-47Air bag warning labels..................... 1-50Air bag warning light .............. 1-50, 2-16Air cleaner housing filter ................. 8-22Air conditioner

Air conditioner service ............... 4-29Air conditioner specificationlabel ......................................... 9-12Air conditioning systemrefrigerant and lubricantrecommendations............... 4-29, 9-7Automatic climate control .......... 4-25In-cabin microfilter.................... 4-29Operation (See automaticclimate control) ......................... 4-25

Alcohol, drugs and driving................. 5-5All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ..................... 5-43

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) driving safetyprecautions (For AWD models) ........... 5-6All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warninglight (AWD models) ......................... 2-12Ambient temperature, Airconditioner ..................................... 4-28Anchor point locations

Top tether strap......................... 1-26Antenna.......................................... 4-58Antifreeze....................................... 5-52Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .......... 5-48Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)warning light .................................. 2-12Appearance care

Exterior appearance care ............. 7-2Interior appearance care.............. 7-3

Armrest ............................................ 1-7Ashtrays (See cigarette lighter andashtrays) ........................................ 2-38Audible reminders .......................... 2-19Audio operation precautions ........... 4-30“AUDIO” settings............................ 4-14Audio system.................................. 4-30Autochanger

Compact Disc (CD) ..................... 4-40Automatic

Anti-glare inside mirror .............. 3-24

Automatic sunroof ..................... 2-46Automatic transmission fluid(ATF).......................................... 8-16Automatic transmissionposition indicator light............... 2-17Climate control .......................... 4-25Drive positioner ......................... 3-26Driving with automatictransmission ............................. 5-10Seat positioner, seat.................. 3-26Transmission selector leverlock release............................... 5-13

Automatic headlights off delay ........ 2-28Automatic upper vent system .......... 4-28Auxiliary input jacks........................ 4-58Avoiding collision and rollover......... 5-5

B

Battery ........................................... 8-18Battery saver system ................. 2-29

Before starting the engine ................. 5-9Belts (See drive belts) ..................... 8-20BLUETOOTH hands-free phonesystem ........................................... 4-59BOSE AudioPilot ............................. 4-15BOSE Centerpoint ........................... 4-15

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 372: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

BrakeAnti-lock brake system (ABS) ..... 5-48Brake booster............................ 8-26Brake fluid ................................ 8-17Brake pedal............................... 8-25Brake pedal check ..................... 8-25Brake system............................. 5-45Parking brake check ......... 5-14, 8-25Parking brake operation............. 5-14Warning light............................. 2-12

Break-in schedule ........................... 5-42Brightness control, Instrumentpanel.............................................. 2-30Bulb check/instrument panel .......... 2-11Bulb replacement............................ 8-31

C

Cabin air filter................................. 4-29Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ......................................... 9-2Cargo (See vehicle loadinginformation).................................... 2-43Cargo net........................................ 2-43Car phone or CB radio ..................... 4-58CD care and cleaning....................... 4-42Center multi-function controlpanel................................................ 4-3Child restraints ............................... 1-17

Booster seat installation onfront passenger seat.................. 1-35

Booster seat installation onrear seat center or outboardpositions................................... 1-33Booster seats ............................ 1-30Child restraint installation onfront passenger seat.................. 1-27Child restraint installation onrear seat center or outboardpositions................................... 1-19LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system ...... 1-24Precautions on booster seats ..... 1-30Top tether strap anchor pointlocations ................................... 1-27With top tether strap.................. 1-26

Child safety .................................... 1-11Child safety rear door lock................. 3-7Chimes

Audible reminders ..................... 2-19Seat belt warning light andchime........................................ 2-16

Cigarette lighter and ashtrays ......... 2-38Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............. 8-27Cleaning exterior and interior ..... 7-2, 7-3Climate control, Automatic climatecontrol............................................ 4-25Climate controlled seats(Front seats) ................................... 2-34Clock .............................................. 2-37“Clock” settings.............................. 4-17Cold weather driving ....................... 5-52

“Comfort and Convenience”settings .......................................... 4-18Compact Disc (CD) changeroperation........................................ 4-40Compass (if so equipped).................. 2-8Console box.................................... 2-42Controls, Heater and air conditionercontrols (See automatic climatecontrol)........................................... 4-25Conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol switch ................................ 5-37Coolant

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants ............................ 9-2Changing engine coolant ........... 8-11Checking engine coolant level .... 8-11

Corrosion protection ......................... 7-5Cruise control ................................. 5-18Cruise control, Fixed speed cruise control(on ICC system) .............................. 5-37Cruise control/Intelligent CruiseControl (ICC) system MAIN switchindicator light (Green) ..................... 2-17Cup holders .................................... 2-39Curtain side-impact air bag system(See supplemental side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag system) . 1-47

D

Daytime running light system .......... 2-29

10-2

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 373: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Defroster switch, Rear window andoutside mirror defroster switch........ 2-26Dimensions and weights ................... 9-9“DISPLAY” settings......................... 4-14Door open warning light .................. 2-13Dot matrix liquid crystal display ...... 2-20Dot matrix

Engine start operation indicator . 2-21Intelligent Key batterydischarge indicator.................... 2-22Intelligent Key insertionindicator ................................... 2-21Intelligent Key removalindicator ................................... 2-21“LOCK” warning......................... 2-22NO KEY ID indicator ................... 2-22NO KEY warning......................... 2-21Shift “P” warning....................... 2-21Steering lock releasemalfunction indicator................. 2-21

Drive belts ...................................... 8-20Drive positioner, Automatic ............. 3-26Driving

Cold weather driving.................. 5-52Driving with automatictransmission ............................. 5-10Precautions when starting anddriving ........................................ 5-2

E

Economy, Fuel................................. 5-42Emission control informationlabel............................................... 9-12Emission control systemwarranty ......................................... 9-18Engine

Before starting the engine............ 5-9Break-in schedule...................... 5-42Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants ............................ 9-2Changing engine coolant ........... 8-11Changing engine oil and filter .... 8-14Checking engine coolant level .... 8-11Checking engine oil level ........... 8-13Coolant temperature gauge.......... 2-6Engine block heater ................... 5-54Engine compartment checklocations ..................................... 8-7Engine cooling system ............... 8-10Engine oil .................................. 8-13Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation ......................... 9-5Engine oil viscosity ...................... 9-5Engine serial number ................. 9-11Engine specifications................... 9-8If your vehicle overheats............ 6-12Starting the engine ...................... 5-9

Event data recorders ....................... 9-20Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ........ 5-2

F

5 speed automatic transmission ..... 5-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label............ 9-11Filter

Air cleaner housing filter ............ 8-22Changing engine oil and filter .... 8-14

Flashers (See hazard warningflasher switch) ................................ 2-32Flat tire............................................. 6-2Flat tire, Low tire pressure warningsystem ............................................. 5-3Flat towing ..................................... 9-17Floor mat cleaning ............................ 7-4Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid(ATF).......................................... 8-16Brake fluid ................................ 8-17Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants ............................ 9-2Engine coolant........................... 8-10Engine oil .................................. 8-13Power steering fluid................... 8-17Window washer fluid ................. 8-18

FM-AM-Satellite radio withcompact disc (CD) changer .............. 4-37Fog light switch............................... 2-31Front passenger air bag status light. 2-17Front power seat adjustment ............. 1-2

10-3

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 374: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

FuelCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants ............................ 9-2Fuel economy ............................ 5-42Fuel octane rating ........................ 9-4Fuel recommendation .................. 9-3Gauge ......................................... 2-6

“FUEL ECONOMY” information ........... 4-8Fuel-filler door ................................ 3-21Fuses.............................................. 8-26Fusible links ................................... 8-27

G

Garage door opener, HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver ...................... 2-51Gauge .............................................. 2-4

Engine coolant temperaturegauge.......................................... 2-6Fuel gauge................................... 2-6Odometer.................................... 2-5Speedometer............................... 2-5Tachometer ................................. 2-5

General maintenance ........................ 8-2Glove box ....................................... 2-41Glove box lock ................................ 2-41

H

Hazard warning flasher switch......... 2-32

Head restraint................................... 1-5Headlights

Bulb replacement ...................... 8-32Headlight switch........................ 2-27Xenon headlights ...................... 2-26

Headphones (See Infinitimobile entertainmentsystem) ................................. 4-47, 4-56Heated seats .................................. 2-33Heater

Automatic climate control .......... 4-25Engine coolant heater ................ 5-54

HomeLink Universal Transceiver .... 2-51Hood release .................................. 3-18Horn ............................................... 2-32How to stop alarm, Vehicle security . 2-24How to use “BRIGHTNESS CONTROLAND DISPLAY ON/OFF” button ........... 4-7How to use INFINITI controller .......... 4-4How to use “INFO” button ................. 4-7How to use “SETTING” button.......... 4-12How to use “STATUS” button ............. 4-7How to use “TRIP”/“FUEL ECON”button .............................................. 4-7How to use the mechanical key.......... 3-4

I

Ignition switch, Automatictransmission models....................... 5-10Immobilizer system ........................ 2-24

In-cabin microfilter ......................... 4-29Indicator lights............................... 2-17INFINITI advanced air bagsystem ........................................... 1-42INFINITI mobile entertainmentsystem (MES).................................. 4-45INFINITI voice recognitionsystem (if so equipped) ................... 4-67Inside automatic anti-glaremirror ............................................. 3-24Inspection/maintenance (I/M)test ................................................ 9-19Instrument brightness control......... 2-30Instrument panel .............................. 2-3Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system ........................................... 5-20Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system, Preview function................. 5-41Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system/Preview Function warninglight (Orange) ................................. 2-14Intelligent Key battery ...................... 5-8Intelligent Key batteryreplacement ................................... 8-29Intelligent Key system ...................... 3-8Intelligent Key system, Keyoperating range ................................ 3-8Intelligent Key system, Keyoperation........................................ 3-10Intelligent Key system, Warningsignals ........................................... 3-11

10-4

Z 05.7.27/Y50-D X

Page 375: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Intelligent Key warning light ........... 2-14Interior light control switch ............. 2-49Interior light replacement ............... 8-33Interior lights ................................. 2-49Interior trunk lid release ................. 3-20

J

Jump starting .................................... 6-9

K

Keyless entry (See remote keylessentry system).................................. 3-14Keys (Intelligent Key) ........................ 3-2

L

Label, Air conditioner specificationlabel............................................... 9-12Label, Emission control informationlabel............................................... 9-12Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification label.. 9-11Labels

Air bag warning labels ............... 1-50Engine serial number ................. 9-11Vehicle identification number(VIN) ......................................... 9-10

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)chime ............................................. 2-19

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)switch ............................................ 2-35Lane Departure Warning (LDW)system ........................................... 5-15Lane Departure Warning (LDW)system indicator light (Orange)........ 2-17“Language/Units” settings.............. 4-18License plate, Installing frontlicense plate ................................... 9-13Light

Air bag warning light.................. 1-50Bulb replacement ...................... 8-31Fog light switch ......................... 2-31Headlight switch........................ 2-27Headlights Bulb replacement ..... 8-32Interior lights ............................ 2-49Map lights................................. 2-49Replacement ............................. 8-31Trunk light................................. 2-51Vanity mirror lights .................... 2-51Warning/indicator lightsand audible reminders ...... 2-12, 2-17Xenon headlights ...................... 2-26

Lights, Exterior and interior lightreplacement ................................... 8-33Loading information (See vehicleloading information) ....................... 9-14Lock

Door locks ................................... 3-5Glove box lock ........................... 2-41Power door lock........................... 3-7

Trunk lid lock opener lever ......... 3-19Lockout protection ............................ 3-7Low fuel warning light ..................... 2-14Low tire pressure warning light........ 2-14Low tire pressure warningsystem.............................. 5-3, 6-2, 8-35

M

MaintenanceBattery ...................................... 8-18General maintenance................... 8-2Inside the vehicle........................ 8-3Maintenance precautions............. 8-5Outside the vehicle...................... 8-2Seat belt maintenance ............... 1-16

“MAINTENANCE” information .......... 4-10Maintenance notice......................... 4-11Main power window switch(driver’s side).................................. 2-44Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)..... 2-18Map lights ...................................... 2-49Meter illumination control knob......... 2-7Meters and gauges ........................... 2-4Meters and gauges, Instrumentbrightness control........................... 2-30Mirror

Automatic anti-glare insidemirror........................................ 3-24Outside mirror control................ 3-25Outside mirrors ......................... 3-25

10-5

Z 05.2.3/Y50-D X

Page 376: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

N

Net, Cargo net................................. 2-43New vehicle break-in....................... 5-42Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System. 2-24

O

Odometer ......................................... 2-5Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants ............................ 9-2Changing engine oil and filter .... 8-14Checking engine oil level ........... 8-13Engine oil .................................. 8-13Engine oil viscosity ...................... 9-5

Outside mirror control ..................... 3-25Outside mirrors............................... 3-25Overheat, If your vehicle overheats . 6-12Owner’s Manual/Service Manualorder information............................ 9-20

P

ParkingBrake check............................... 8-25Parking brake check .................. 5-14Parking brake operation............. 5-14Parking on hills ......................... 5-14

Parking/parking on hills.................. 5-44

“Phone” settings ............................ 4-16Precision phased audio................... 4-15Power

Front seat adjustment .................. 1-2Power door lock........................... 3-7Power outlet .............................. 2-37Power steering fluid................... 8-17Power steering system............... 5-45Power windows ......................... 2-44

PrecautionsAudio operation......................... 4-30Braking precautions .................. 5-45Child restraints.......................... 1-17Cruise control ............................ 5-18Maintenance ............................... 8-5Seat belt usage ........................... 1-8Supplemental restraintsystem ...................................... 1-36When starting and driving ............ 5-2

Pre-crash seat belts ........................ 1-12Preview function (for Intelligentcruise control system) ..................... 5-41Preview function (Intelligentcruise control system equippedmodel)............................................ 5-46Push starting .................................. 6-11Push-button ignition switch .............. 5-6Push-button ignition switchpositions .......................................... 5-7

R

Radio............................ 4-30, 4-43, 4-44Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ..... 9-19Rear Active Steer (RAS) system ....... 5-52Rear Active Steer (RAS) warninglight (if so equipped) ...................... 2-16Rear control switches for audio........ 4-44Rear control switches fortemperature.................................... 4-29“REAR DISPLAY” settings (if soequipped)....................................... 4-13Rear door lock, Child safety reardoor lock .......................................... 3-7Rear personal lights ........................ 2-49Rear power point............................. 2-37Rear seat adjustment ........................ 1-4Rear sunshade................................ 2-48Rear view monitor ........................... 4-20Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch ............................................ 2-26Registering your vehicle in anothercountry........................................... 9-10Remote controller ........................... 4-48Remote keyless entry system .......... 3-14Reporting safety defects(US only)......................................... 9-19Roadside assistance program............ 6-2Rollover ............................................ 5-5Run-flat tires ............................ 6-3, 8-40

10-6

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 377: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

S

SafetyChild seat belts ......................... 1-11Reporting safety defects (USonly) ......................................... 9-19

SeatBelt warning light ........................ 1-9Belt warning light and chime...... 2-16

Seat adjustmentFront power seat adjustment........ 1-2Rear seat adjustment................... 1-4

Seat belt(s)Child safety ............................... 1-11Injured persons......................... 1-12Larger children .......................... 1-12Precautions on seat belt usage..... 1-8Pre-crash seat belts ................... 1-12Pregnant women........................ 1-12Seat belt cleaning........................ 7-4Seat belt extenders.................... 1-16Seat belt maintenance ............... 1-16Seat belts.................................... 1-8Shoulder belt heightadjustment................................ 1-16Three-point type ........................ 1-13

Seat(s)Driver-side memory ................... 3-26Heated seats ............................. 2-33Seats .......................................... 1-2

Security system, Vehicle securitysystem ........................................... 2-22Security systems (Infiniti VehicleImmobilizer System), Enginestart ............................................... 2-24Security systems (See vehiclesecurity system).............................. 2-22Servicing air conditioner (Seeautomatic climate control)............... 4-25Servicing climate control ................. 4-29Shift lock release ............................ 5-13Shift lock release, CVT..................... 5-13Shifting, Automatic transmission..... 5-10Shoulder belt height adjustment(front seats) ................................... 1-16Side air bag system (Seesupplemental side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag system) . 1-47Spare tire (temporary use only(T-type) spare tire)........................... 8-45Spark plugs .................................... 8-21Speed sensitive vol ......................... 4-15Speedometer .................................... 2-5Starting

Before starting the engine............ 5-9Jump starting............................... 6-9Precautions when starting anddriving ........................................ 5-2Push starting............................. 6-11Starting the engine ...................... 5-9

Start menu ....................................... 4-6

Start-up screen (model withNavigation system) ........................... 4-5Steering

Power steering fluid................... 8-17Power steering system............... 5-45Tilting telescopic steeringcolumn...................................... 3-22

Steering-wheel-mounted controlsfor audio......................................... 4-42Storage .......................................... 2-39Sun visors ...................................... 3-23Sunglasses holder .......................... 2-41Sunroof .......................................... 2-46

Automatic sunroof ..................... 2-46Supplemental air bag warninglabels ............................................. 1-50Supplemental air bagwarning light ......................... 1-50, 2-16Supplemental restraint system........ 1-36

Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem ...................................... 1-36

Supplemental side and curtainside-impact air bag system.............. 1-47Surround volume ............................ 4-15Switch

Fog light switch ......................... 2-31Hazard warning flasherswitch ....................................... 2-32Headlight switch........................ 2-27Ignition switch automatictransmission models ................. 5-10

10-7

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 378: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

Power door lock switch ................ 3-7Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch .............. 2-26Turn signal switch...................... 2-31Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)off switch .................................. 2-36

T

Tachometer ...................................... 2-5Temperature gauge, Engine coolanttemperature gauge ........................... 2-6Theft (INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem), Engine start ...................... 2-24Three-way catalyst ........................... 5-3Tilting telescopic steeringcolumn ........................................... 3-22Tire

Flat tire........................................ 6-2Low tire pressure warningsystem ........................................ 5-3Pressure, Low tire pressurewarning light ............................. 2-14Run-flat tires ............................... 6-3Uniform tire quality grading ....... 9-17

TiresTire chains................................. 8-42Tire pressure ............................. 8-35Tire rotation............................... 8-43Types of tires............................. 8-40Wheel/tire size ............................ 9-9

Wheels and tires........................ 8-35Tire and loading informationlabel...................................... 8-36, 9-12“TIRE PRESSURE” information ........... 4-9Top tether strap child restraints....... 1-26Towing

Tow truck towing ....................... 6-13Towing a trailer.......................... 9-17Towing load/specification chart . 9-15

Trailer towing.................................. 9-17Transceiver, HomeLink UniversalTransceiver ..................................... 2-51Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid(ATF).......................................... 8-16Driving with automatictransmission ............................. 5-10Transmission selector lever lockrelease...................................... 5-13

Transmitter (See remote keylessentry system).................................. 3-14Traveling or registering yourvehicle in another country ............... 9-10“TRIP COMPUTER” information ........ 4-10Trunk

Interior trunk lid release ............ 3-20Lid lock opener lever.................. 3-18Light ......................................... 2-51

Trunk lid release switch................... 3-19Trunk pass-through........................... 1-7

Trunk release power cancelswitch ............................................ 3-19Turn signal switch........................... 2-31

U

Underbody cleaning.......................... 7-3Uniform tire quality grading............. 9-17

V

Vanity mirror lights ......................... 2-51Valet hand-off ................................... 3-4Vehicle

Dimensions and weights.............. 9-9Identification number (VIN) ....... 9-10Loading information .................. 9-14Recovery (freeing a stuckvehicle) ..................................... 6-16Security system ......................... 2-22Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)off switch .................................. 2-36

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) offindicator light ................................. 2-19Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system ........................................... 5-50Vehicle information and settings ....... 4-7Vehicle load capacity ...................... 9-15Ventilators...................................... 4-23“Voice Recognition” settings ........... 4-17“Volume and Beeps” settings.......... 4-16

10-8

Z 05.7.19/Y50-D X

Page 379: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

W

Warning labels, Air bag warninglabels ............................................. 1-50Warning light

Air bag warning light ....... 1-50, 2-16Brake warning light................... 2-12Door open warning light............ 2-13Low fuel warning light............... 2-14Low tire pressure warninglight .......................................... 2-14Seat belt warning light andchime........................................ 2-16

Warning lights ................................ 2-12Warning, Hazard warning flasherswitch ............................................ 2-32Warning, Low tire pressure warningsystem ............................................. 5-3Warning, Warning/indicator lightsand audible reminders ................... 2-11Warranty, Emission control systemwarranty ......................................... 9-18Washer switch, Windshield wiperand washer switch ......................... 2-25Washing ........................................... 7-2Waxing ............................................. 7-2Weights (See dimensions andweights) ........................................... 9-9Wheel/tire size ................................. 9-9Wheels and tires ............................ 8-35

Cleaning aluminum alloywheels ........................................ 7-3

Window washer fluid ...................... 8-18Window(s)

Cleaning...................................... 7-3Power windows ......................... 2-44

Windshield wiper and washerswitch ............................................ 2-25Wiper

Windshield wiper and washerswitch ....................................... 2-25Wiper blades............................. 8-23

X

Xenon headlights ........................... 2-26

10-9

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X

Page 380: 2006 Infiniti M45 Owner Guideof dealer service. To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of

MEMO

10-10

Z 04.12.13/Y50-D X